709257
22
Zoom out
Zoom in
Vorherige Seite
1/252
Nächste Seite
.
4K MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER
GY-HC550U/GY-HC550E/
GY-HC500U/GY-HC500E/GY-HC500SPCU
INSTRUCTIONS
.
.
Wireless LAN antenna is not included in GY-HC500U/GY-HC500E/GY-HC500SPCU.
The specifications and appearance of this product are subject to changes for further improvement
without prior notice.
Please check the latest version of the INSTRUCTIONS from the following Mobile User Guide. You can
also download the PDF from the Mobile User Guide.
Mobile User Guide
When you are outside, you can refer to the instructions from your Android phone or iPhone.
http://manual3.jvckenwood.com/pro/mobile/global/
You can view the Mobile User Guide using the browser on your Android phone or iPhone.
Thank you for purchasing this product.
Before operating this unit, please read the
instructions carefully to ensure the best possible
performance.
In this manual, each model number is described
without the last letter (U/E) which means the
shipping destination.
(U: for USA and Canada, E: for Europe)
Only “U” models (GY-HC550U/GY-HC500U/
GY-HC500SPCU) have been evaluated by UL.
Please read the following before getting started:
For Customer Use:
Model No.
Serial No.
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the body.
Retain this information for future reference.
GY-HC550U/GY-HC500U/GY-HC500SPCU
IM 1.01
B5A-2966-00
2
.
1.
Read these instructions.
2.
Keep these instructions.
Important Safety Instructions
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
These are general Important Safety Instructions and certain items may not
apply to all appliances.
3.
FOR USA
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
For USA-California Only
This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate
Material – special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the
cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as
power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen
into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not
operate normally, or has been dropped.
Important Safety Instructions
3
Introduction
.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Pour Californie des États-Unis seulement
Cet appareil contient une pile-bouton CR au lithium qui contient du perchlorate – une
manipulation spéciale peut être requise.
Voir www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Respecter toutes les instructions.
Ne pas utiliser cet appareil à proximité de l’eau.
Ne nettoyer qu’avec un chiffon sec.
Ne pas boucher les ouvertures de ventilation.
Installer selon les instructions du fabricant.
Ne pas installer à proximité de sources de chaleur telles que des radiateurs,
des accumulateurs de chaleur, des poêles, ou d’autres appareils
(comprenant les amplificateurs) qui produisent de la chaleur.
Protéger le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter qu’il ne soit piétiné ou ne se coince, tout
particulièrement au niveau de la fiche, de la prise de courant et du point où il sort de l’appareil.
Utiliser uniquement des équipements/accessoires spécifiés par le fabricant.
N’utiliser qu’avec le chariot, le stand, le trépied, le support ou
la table spécifié par le fabricant, ou vendu avec l’appareil.
Lorsqu’un chariot est utilisé, faire attention pour déplacer
la combinaison chariot/appareil pour éviter des blessures
causées par un basculement.
Débrancher cet appareil pendant un orage ou quand il
n’est pas utilisé pendant une longue durée.
L’entretien ou la réparation de l’appareil doit être effectué par du personnel qualifié uniquement.
Un dépannage est nécessaire lorsque l’appareil a été endommagé d’une façon ou d’une autre,
telle que lorsque le cordon d’alimentation ou la fiche est endommagé, si du liquide a été renversé
ou si des objets sont tombés à l’intérieur de l’appareil, si l’appareil a été exposé à la pluie ou
à l’humidité, ne fonctionne pas normalement ou a fait une chute.
1.
Lire ces instructions.
2.
Conserver ces instructions.
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES
Ces informations sont des CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES et
certains points peuvent ne pas s’appliquer à tous les appareils.
3.
POUR LES ÉTATS-UNIS
Tenir compte de tous les avertissements.
4
Important Safety Instructions
Introduction
Safety Precautions
.
CAUTION
FOR USA AND CANADA
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with
arrowhead symbol, within
an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to
the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that
may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a
risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within
an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to
the presence of important
operating and maintenance
(servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying
the appliance.
RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
.
POUR CANADA
RISQUE
D’ELECTROCUTION
NE PAS OUVRIR
ATTENTION:
POUR EVITER TOUT RISQUE
D’ELECTROCUTION NE PAS
OUVRIR LE BOITER. AUCUNE
PIECE INTERIEURE N’EST A
REGLER PAR L’UTILISATEUR. SE
REFERER A UN AGENT QUALIFIE
EN CAS DE PROBLEME.
ATTENTION
Le symbole de l’éclair à
l’intérieur d’un triangle
équilatéral est destiné à
alerter l’utilisateur sur la
présence d’une “tension
dangereuse” non isolée dans
le boîtier du produit. Cette
tension est suffisante pour
provoquer l’électrocution de
personnes.
Le point d’exclamation à
l’intérieur d’un triangle
équilatéral est destiné à
alerter l’utilisateur sur la
présence d’opérations
d’entretien importantes au
sujet desquelles des
renseignements se trouvent
dans le manuel
d’instructions.
Ces symboles ne sont
utilisés qu’aux Etats-Unis.
Safety Precautions
5
Introduction
.
Model Number:
Trade Name:
Responsible
party:
Address:
Telephone
Number:
Supplier's Declaration of Conformity
GY-HC550U
GY-HC500U
GY-HC500SPCU
JVC
JVCKENWOOD USA
Corporation
500 Valley Road,
Suite 203 Wayne,
NJ 07470
973-317-5000
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
.
Changes or modifications not
approved by JVC could void the
user’s authority to operate the
equipment. This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial
environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required
to correct the interference at his own
expense.
.
Numéro de
modèle :
Nom de marque :
Personne
responsable :
Adresse :
Numéro de
téléphone :
Déclaration de conformité du fournisseur
GY-HC550U
GY-HC500U
GY-HC500SPCU
JVC
JVCKENWOOD USA
Corporation
500 Valley Road,
Suite 203 Wayne,
NJ 07470
973-317-5000
Cet ensemble se conforme à la partie 15 des
règles de la FCC (Federal Communications
Commission). Le fonctionnement est sujet aux
deux conditions suivantes : (1) Cet appareil ne
peut pas causer d’interférences nuisibles, et
(2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence
reçue, comprenant des interférences qui
peuvent causer un mauvais fonctionnement.
.
Des changements ou modifications
non approuvés par JVC peuvent
annuler le droit de l’utilisateur de faire
fonctionner l’appareil. Cet appareil a
été testé et il a été reconnu qu’il se
conforme aux limites concernant
l’appareillage informatique de classe
A correspondant à la partie 15 des
règles de la FCC. Ces limites sont
conçues pour fournir une protection
raisonnable contre les interférences
dangereuses lorsque l’équipement est
utilisé dans un environnement
commercial.
Cet appareil génère, utilise et peut
émettre de l’énergie des fréquences
radio et, s’il n’est pas installé et utilisé
selon les instructions du fabricant,
peut causer des interférences
nuisibles en communications radio.
L’utilisation de cet équipement dans
une zone résidentielle est susceptible
de causer des interférences néfastes,
auquel cas l’utilisateur devra prendre
des mesures à ses propres frais.
6
Safety Precautions
Introduction
.
CAUTION:
The mains plug shall remain readily
operable.
Remove the mains plug immediately if
the camera functions abnormally.
.
WARNING:
The battery pack, the camera with
battery installed, and the remote control
with battery installed should not be
exposed to excessive heat such as direct
sunlight, fire or the like.
.
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR
SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR
MOISTURE.
.
NOTES:
The rating plate and safety caution are
on the bottom and/or the back of the
main unit.
The serial number plate is on the
bottom of the unit.
The rating information and safety
caution of the AC adapter are on its
upper and lower sides.
.
Caution on Replaceable lithium
battery
The battery used in this device may
present a fire or chemical burn hazard if
mistreated.
Do not recharge, disassemble, heat
above 100°C (212°F) or incinerate.
Replace battery with Panasonic, Sanyo,
Sony or Maxell CR2025.
Danger of explosion or risk of fire if the
battery is incorrectly replaced.
Dispose of used battery promptly.
Keep away from children.
Do not disassemble and do not dispose
of in fire.
.
Attention:
La prise secteur doit être opérationnelle.
Débranchez immédiatement la fiche
secteur si le caméscope ne fonctionne
pas normalement.
.
Avertissement:
Évitez d’exposer la batterie, le
caméscope avec la batterie insérée ou la
télécommande avec la batterie insérée à
une chaleur excessive, telle que celle
des rayons directs du soleil, d’un feu ou
de tout autre source de chaleur.
.
AVERTISSEMENT : POUR EVITER
LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE OU
D’ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS
EXPOSER L’APPAREIL A LA
PLUIE NI A L’HUMIDITE.
.
REMARQUES :
La plaque d’identification et
l’avertissement de sécurité se trouvent
sous l’appareil et/ou au dos.
La plaque du numéro de série est
située sur la partie inférieure de
l’appareil.
Les informations d’identification et
l’avertissement de sécurité de
l’adaptateur secteur sont situés sur ses
côtés supérieur et inférieur.
.
Avertissement sur la pile au
lithium remplaçable
La pile utilisée dans cet appareil peut
présenter des risques d’incendie ou de
brûlure chimique si elle est mal traitée.
Ne pas recharger, démonter, chauffer à
plus de 100°C (212°F) ni mettre au feu.
Remplacez la pile avec Panasonic,
Sanyo, Sony ou Maxell CR2025.
Danger d’explosion ou risque d’incendie
si la pile n’est pas changée correctement.
Jeter immédiatement les piles usées.
Placer hors de la portée des enfants.
Ne pas démonter ni jeter au feu.
Safety Precautions
7
Introduction
.
When the equipment is installed in a
cabinet or on a shelf, make sure that it
has sufficient space on all sides to allow
for ventilation (10 cm (3-15/16") or more
on both sides, on top and at the rear).
Do not block the ventilation holes.
(If the ventilation holes are blocked by a
newspaper, or cloth etc. the heat may not
be able to get out.)
No naked flame sources, such as lighted
candles, should be placed on the
apparatus.
When discarding batteries,
environmental problems must be
considered and the local rules or laws
governing the disposal of these batteries
must be followed strictly.
.
The apparatus shall not be exposed to
dripping or splashing and that no objects
filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be
placed on the apparatus.
.
Do not point the lens directly into the
sun. This can cause eye injuries, as well
as lead to the malfunctioning of internal
circuitry. There is also a risk of fire or
electric shock.
CAUTION!
The following notes concern possible
physical damage to this unit and to the
user.
Carrying or holding this unit by the LCD
monitor can result in dropping the unit,
or in a malfunction.
Do not use a tripod on unsteady or
unlevel surfaces. It could tip over,
causing serious damage to the unit.
CAUTION!
Connecting cables (Audio/Video, etc.) to
this unit and leaving it on top of the TV is
not recommended, as tripping on the
cables will cause the unit to fall, resulting
in damage.
.
Si le matériel est installé dans un coffret
ou sur une étagère, s’assurer qu’il y a un
espace suffisant sur tous les côtés pour
permettre la ventilation (10 cm (3-15/16")
ou plus sur les deux côtés, au dessus et
à l’arrière).
Ne pas boucher les orifices de
ventilation.
(Si les orifices de ventilation sont
bouchés par un journal, un tissu, etc., la
chaleur peut ne pas s’éliminer.)
Aucune source à flamme nue, telle que
des bougies allumées, ne doit être
placée sur l’appareil.
En jetant des batteries aux ordures, les
problèmes d’environnement doivent être
pris en considération et les
réglementations locales ou la législation
concernant le rebut de ces batteries
doivent être strictement respectées.
.
L’appareil ne doit pas être exposé à de
l’eau ou à des éclaboussures et les
objets remplis de liquide, tels que des
vases, ne doivent pas être placés sur
l’appareil.
.
Ne dirigez pas l’objectif directement vers
le soleil. Vous pourriez vous abîmer la
vue et l’appareil pourrait être
endommagé. Il y a aussi risque
d’incendie ou d’électrocution.
Attention!
Les remarques suivantes sont destinées
à protéger l’utilisateur et le caméscope
contre des dommages éventuels.
Ne pas transporter ou saisir le
caméscope par l’écran LCD, car il
pourrait tomber ou s’endommager.
Ne pas utiliser de trépied
photographique sur des surfaces
irrégulières et inclinées. Il pourrait
tomber et le caméscope pourrait être
sérieusement endommagé.
Attention!
Avec des câbles (Audio/Vidéo, etc.)
raccordés, il est recommandé de ne pas
laisser le caméscope sur le dessus du
téléviseur, car tirer sur les câbles
pourrait faire tomber le caméscope,
causant des dommages.
8
Safety Precautions
Introduction
GY-HC550U
Radio Frequency Energy Safety Information
Warning
This JVC camera generates RF EME while
transmitting. RF
EME (Radio Frequency Electric
& Magnetic Energy) has the potential to cause
slight thermal, or heating effects to any part of
your body less than the recommended distance
from this radio transmitter’s antenna. RF energy
exposure is determined primarily by the distance
to and the power of the transmitting device. In
general, RF exposure is minimized when the
lowest possible power is used or transmission
time is kept to the minimum required for
consistent communications, and the greatest
distance possible from the antenna to the body
is maintained.
The following list provides you with the information
required to ensure that you are aware of RF
exposure.
0
While transmitting, always keep the antenna
and the radio at least 5 cm (1-31/32”) from your
body or face, as well as from any bystanders.
0
To maintain compliance with FCC's RF
exposure guidelines, use only the supplied
antenna (with antenna holder).
Unauthrized antenna, modification, or
attachments could damage the transmitter and
may violate FCC regulations.
Electromagnetic Interference Compatibility
Electronic devices are susceptible to
electromagnetic interference (EMI) if they are not
adequately shielded or designed for
electromagnetic compatibility.
Because this product generates RF energy, it can
cause interference to such equipment.
0
Turn OFF
your WLAN where signs are posted to
do so. Hospitals and health care facilities use
equipment that is sensitive to electromagnetic
radiation.
0
Turn OFF your product while on board an aircraft
when so instructed. Use of the product must be
in accordance with airline regulations and/or
crew instructions.
Informations sur la sécurité en présence
d'énergie par radiofréquences
Avertissement
Ce
caméscope
JVC génère de l'EME par RF lors
de la transmission. L'EME par RF (énergie
électrique et magnétique par radiofréquences)
peut causer de légers effets thermiques ou
chauffants sur toute partie de votre corps,
lorsque vous trouvez à une distance inférieure à
celle recommandée de l’antenne de cet émetteur
radio. L'exposition à l'énergie par
radiofréquences est principalement déterminée
par la distance et la puissance de l'appareil
émetteur. En général, l'exposition aux
radiofréquences est minimisée lorsqu'on utilise
la puissance la plus faible possible ou que le
temps de transmission est maintenu au minimum
requis pour assurer des communications
cohérentes et lorsqu'on maintient la plus grande
distance possible entre l'antenne et le corps.
La liste suivante vous fournit les informations dont
vous avez besoin pour être sûr d'être informé de
l'exposition aux radiofréquences.
0
Pendant la transmission, gardez toujours
l’antenne et
la radio à au moins 5 cm (1-31/32”)
de votre corps ou de votre visage, ainsi que de
toutes les personnes aux alentours.
0
Pour maintenir la conformité avec les directives
d’exposition RF de la FCC, utilisez uniquement
l’antenne fournie (avec support d'antenne).
Une antenne, une modification ou des
accessoires non autorisés peuvent
endommager le transmetteur et enfreindre les
réglementations de la FCC.
Compatibilité aux interférences
électromagnétiques
Les appareils électroniques sont sensibles aux
interférences électromagnétiques (EMI) s'ils ne
sont pas correctement protégés ou conçus pour
une compatibilité électromagnétique.
Étant donné que cet appareil génère de l’énergie
par radiofréquences, il peut provoquer des
interférences avec ce genre d’équipement.
0
Éteignez votre WLAN lorsque des signes vous
l'indiquant s'affichent. Les hôpitaux et les
établissements de santé utilisent un
équipement sensible aux rayonnements
électromagnétiques.
0
Éteignez votre appareil lorsque vous trouvez à
bord d’un avion et qu'on vous le demande.
L'utilisation de l'appareil doit être conforme aux
règlements de
la compagnie aérienne et/ou aux
instructions de l'équipage.
Safety Precautions
9
Introduction
GY-HC550U
For indoor use only (5150-5250 MHz) in
Canada
There are legal restrictions on the use and
outdoor use depending on the country and
region. Please be careful not to violate the law.
Data transmission is always intiated by software,
which is the passed down through the MAC,
through the digital and analog baseband, and
finally to the RF chip. Several special packets are
initiated by the MAC.These are the only ways the
digital baseband portion will turn on the RF
transmitter, which it then turns off at the end of
the packet. Therefore, the transmitter will be on
only while one of the aforementioned packets is
being transmitted.In other words, this device
automatically discontinue transmission in case
of either absence of information to transmit or
operational failure.
Frequency Tolerance: 20 ppm
This radio transmitter (6549A-W8997M1216)
has been approved by Innovation, Science and
Economic Development
Canada to operate with
the antenna types listed bellow, with the
maximum permissible gain indicated.
Antenna types not included in this list that have
a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated
for any type listed are strictly prohibited use with
this device.
Antenna
type
Gain Impedance
Dipole
3.6 dBi (4.9-5.8 GHz)
50 Ω
1.9 dBi (2.4-2.5 GHz)
Pour usage intérieur seulement (5150-5250
MHz) au Canada
Il existe des restrictions légales concernant
l’utilisation générale et extérieure en fonction du
pays et de la région. Veillez à respecter la loi.
La transmission des données est toujours initiée
par le logiciel, puis les données sont transmises
par l'intermédiaire du MAC, par la bande de base
numérique et analogique et, enfin à la puce RF.
Plusieurs paquets spéciaux sont initiés par le
MAC. Ce sont les seuls moyens pour qu'une de
la bande de base numérique active l'émetteur
RF, puis désactive celui-ci à la fin du paquet. En
conséquence, l'émetteur reste uniquement
activé lors de la transmission d'un des paquets
susmentionnés. En d'autres termes, ce dispositif
interrompt automatiquement toute transmission
en cas d'absence d'informations à transmettre
ou de défaillance.
Tolérance de fréquence: 20 ppm
Le présent émetteur radio (6549 A-W 8997 M
1216) a été approuvé par Innovation, Sciences
et Développement économique Canada pour
fonctionner avec les types d'antenne énumérés
ci-dessous et
ayant un gain admissible maximal.
Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste,
et dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal
indiqué pour tout type figurant sur la liste, sont
strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de
l'émetteur.
Types
d'antenne
Gain l'impédance
Dipôle
3.6 dBi (4.9-5.8 GHz)
50 Ω
1.9 dBi (2.4-2.5 GHz)
10
Safety Precautions
Introduction
GY-HC550U
This transmitter must not be co-located or
operated in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter.
This device contains licence-exempt
transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with
Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
A
This device may not cause interference.
B
This device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
The available scientific evidence does not show
that any health problems are associated with
using low power wireless devices. There is no
proof, however, that these low power wireless
devices are
absolutely safe. Low power Wireless
devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy
(RF) in the microwave range while being used.
Whereas high levels of RF can produce health
effects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level
RF that does not produce heating effects causes
no known adverse health effects. Many studies
of low-level RF exposures have not found any
biological effects. Some studies have suggested
that some biological effects might occur, but
such findings have not been confirmed by
additional research.
The RF module, W8997-M1216 has been tested
and found to comply with FCC/ISED radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment and meets the FCC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure Guidelines and RSS-102 of the
ISED radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules.
Cet émetteur ne doit pas être co-localisé ou
utilisé en
conjonction avec une autre antenne ou
un autre émetteur.
L’émetteur/récepteur exempt de licence contenu
dans le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Innovation, Sciences et Développement
économique Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :
A
L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage;
B
L’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est
susceptible d’en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
Les connaissances scientifiques dont nous
disposons n’ont mis en évidence aucun
problème de santé associé à l’usage des
appareils sans fil à faible puissance. Nous ne
sommes cependant pas en mesure de prouver
que ces
appareils sans fil à faible puissance sont
entièrement sans danger. Les appareils sans fil
à faible puissance émettent une énergie
fréquence radioélectrique (RF) très faible dans
le spectre des micro-ondes lorsqu’ils sont
utilisés. Alors qu’une dose élevée de RF peut
avoir des effets sur la santé (en chauffant les
tissus), l’exposition à de faibles RF qui ne
produisent pas de chaleur n’a pas de mauvais
effets connus sur la santé. De nombreuses
études ont été menées sur les expositions aux
RF faibles et n’ont découvert aucun effet
biologique. Certaines études ont suggéré qu’il
pouvait y avoir certains effets biologiques, mais
ces résultats n’ont pas été confirmés par des
recherches supplémentaires.
Le module RF, W8997-M1216 a été testé et jugé
conforme aux limites d’exposition aux
rayonnements énoncées pour un
environnement non contrôlé et respecte les
règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes
directrices d'exposition et d’exposition aux
fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’
ISDE.
Safety Precautions
11
Introduction
.
IMPORTANT (for owners in the U.K.)
Connection to the mains supply in
the United Kingdom.
DO NOT cut off the mains plug from
this equipment.
If the plug fitted is not suitable for the
power points in your home or the cable is
too short to reach a power point, then
obtain an appropriate safety approved
extension lead or contact the local
dealers in your area.
BE SURE to replace the fuse only with
an identical approved type, as originally
fitted, and to replace the fuse cover.
If nonetheless the mains plug is cut off
be sure to remove the fuse and dispose
of the plug immediately, to avoid possible
shock hazard by inadvertent connection
to the mains supply.
If this product is not supplied fitted with a
mains plug then follow the instructions
given below:
DO NOT make any connection to the
Larger Terminal coded E or Green.
The wires in the mains lead are coloured
in accordance with the following code:
If these colours do not correspond with
the terminal identifications of your plug,
connect as follows:
Blue wire to terminal coded N (Neutral)
or coloured black.
Brown wire to terminal coded L (Live) or
coloured Red.
If in doubt consult a competent
electrician.
CAUTIONS:
To prevent shock, do not open the cabinet.
No user serviceable parts inside.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel.
Blue to N
(Neutral) or Black
Brown to L (Live)
or Red
.
WARNING
Operation of this equipment in a
residential environment could cause
radio interference.
.
CAUTION:
Where there are strong electromagnetic
waves or magnetism, for example near a
radio or TV transmitter, transformer,
motor, etc., the picture and the sound
may be disturbed. In such case, please
keep the apparatus away from the
sources of the disturbance.
.
The plastics packaging bags may cause
suffocation when they are covered over the
head. Tear them open, and keep them away
from the reach of infants and children by
ensuring that they are disposed of properly.
GY-HC550E
.
Wireless LAN
This device is a 2.4 GHz wideband
transmission system (transceiver),
intended for use in all EU member
states and EFTA countries, except in
France and Italy where restrictive use
applies.
In Italy the end-user should apply for a
license at the national spectrum
authorities in order to obtain
authorization to use the device for
setting up outdoor radio links and/or for
supplying public access to
telecommunications and/or network
services.
This device may not be used for setting
up outdoor radio links in France and in
some areas the RF output power may
be limited to 10 mW EIRP in the
frequency range of 2454 - 2483.5 MHz.
For detailed information the end-user
should contact the national spectrum
authority in France.
.
Frequency Range
Output Power
2.4GHz Band : 1 - 13ch
11 b/g/n : 14 dBm
(max)
.
Frequency Range
Output Power
5GHz Band : W52/W53/W56
11 n/a/ac : 11 dBm (max)
12
Safety Precautions
Introduction
GY-HC550E and GY-HC500E
.
The European representative of
JVCKENWOOD Corporation is:
Die europäische Vertretung für die
JVCKENWOOD Corporation ist:
JVCKENWOOD Deutschland GmbH
Konrad-Adenauer-Allee 1-11
61118 Bad Vilbel
GERMANY
GY-HC500E
.
Dear customer,
this apparatus is in compliance with the
valid European Directive and the
relevant standards regarding
electromagnetic compatibility.
Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr geehrte
Kundin,
dieses Gerät stimmt mit der gültigen
europäischen Richtlinie und den
relevanten Normen bezüglich
elektromagnetischer Verträglichkeit
überein.
GY-HC550E
.
Hereby, JVCKENWOOD Corporation
declares that the radio equipment type
GY-HC550E is in compliance with
Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of
conformity is available at the following
internet address:
Hiermit erklärt die , JVCKENWOOD
Corporation, dass der Funkanlagentyp
GY-HC550E der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU
entspricht.
Der vollständige Text der
EU-Konformitätserklärung ist unter der
folgenden Internetadresse verfügbar:
http://www3.jvckenwood.com/ecdoc/
.
Battery Pack
The supplied battery pack is a lithium-ion
battery. Before using the supplied battery
pack or an optional battery pack, be sure
to read the following cautions:
To avoid hazards
... do not burn.
When transporting, carry the battery in
a plastic bag.
... do not modify or disassemble.
... do not expose the battery to
temperatures exceeding 60°C (140°F),
as this may cause the battery to
overheat, explode or catch fire.
... use only specified chargers.
To prevent damage and prolong
service life
... do not subject to unnecessary shock.
... charge within the temperature range
of 10°C to 35°C (50°F to 95°F). Cooler
temperatures require longer charging
time, or in some cases stop charging
at all. Warmer temperatures prevent
complete charging, or in some cases
stop charging at all.
... store in a cool, dry place. Extended
exposure to high temperatures will
increase natural discharge and
shorten service life.
... keep a 30% battery level if the
battery pack is not to be used for a
long period of time.
... remove from charger or powered unit
when not in use, as some machines
use current even when switched off.
... do not drop or subject to strong
impact.
... do not short-circuit the
terminals. Keep it away
from metallic objects
when not in use.
Terminals
Safety Precautions
13
Introduction
.
Para Brasil
Informação sobre eliminação de
baterias
Este produto não deverá ser eliminado
como lixo doméstico em geral.
Devolva a bateria velha ao comerciante
ou para a rede autorizada, para que seja
devolvida ao fabricante ou importador.
A reciclagem e eliminação de lixo em
uma maneira adequada, ajudarão para
preservar recursos, prevenindo, ao
mesmo tempo, contra efeitos prejudiciais
sobre a nossa saúde e o meio ambiente.
o
.
Empurre
14
Safety Precautions
Introduction
Contents
Introduction
Safety Precautions
............................................
5
Contents .......................................................... 15
Main Features ................................................. 18
Precautions for Proper Use ............................. 20
Operation Modes ............................................. 24
Names of Parts ................................................ 26
Side Control Panel ....................................... 28
Rear Terminal .............................................. 30
LCD Monitor ................................................ 31
Lens Section ................................................ 31
Basic System Diagram .................................... 32
Preparations
Settings and Adjustments Before Use ............. 33
Adjusting the Grip Belt ................................. 33
Attaching the External Microphone (Sold
Separately) .................................................. 33
Opening/Closing the Lens Cover ................. 33
Attaching the Tripod (Sold Separately) ........ 33
Attaching the Wireless LAN Antennas
(Supplied) A ............................................ 34
Attaching/Detaching the Hood ..................... 34
Power Supply .................................................. 35
Using a Battery Pack .................................... 35
Using AC Power (DC IN Power) ................... 36
Power Status Display ...................................... 37
Turning On/Off the Power ................................ 38
Initial Settings .................................................. 39
Displays on the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder .. 41
Display Screen ............................................. 41
Status Screen .............................................. 42
Remote Edit Mode Screen ........................... 42
Warning Display ........................................... 42
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder ...... 43
Adjusting the LCD Monitor ........................... 43
Adjusting the Viewfinder .............................. 44
Assignment of Functions to User Buttons ........ 46
Tally Lamp and LED ........................................ 47
Recording Media ............................................. 48
Usable Cards ............................................... 48
Usable SSD Media ...................................... 48
Estimated Recordable Time of SD Cards .... 48
Estimated Recordable Time of SSD Media .. 49
Inserting an SD Card .................................... 50
Removing the SD Card ................................ 50
Switching the SD cards ................................ 51
Inserting the SSD Media Adapter ................. 51
Formatting (Initializing) of Recording Media . 51
Repairing the Recording Media ................... 52
Clips Recorded to Recording Media ............ 53
About the Operation Lock Feature (KEYLOCK)
.........................................................................
54
Shooting
Basic Shooting Procedures ............................. 55
Selecting System Definition, File Format and Video
Format ............................................................. 56
Zoom Operation .............................................. 59
Focus Operation .............................................. 60
Adjusting the Focusing by Face Detection ...... 62
Adjusting the Brightness .................................. 64
Adjusting the Iris .............................................. 65
Setting the Gain ............................................... 66
Setting the Electronic Shutter .......................... 67
Setting the ND Filter ........................................ 68
Adjusting the White Balance ............................ 69
Adjusting the Camera Image ........................... 73
Using the Image Stabilizer ............................... 73
Audio Recording .............................................. 74
Monitoring Audio Sound During Recording Using a
Headphone ...................................................... 76
Time Code and User’s Bit ................................ 76
Setting Time Code Generator .......................... 77
Setting the User’s Bit ....................................... 80
Synchronizing Time Code on Another Camera
......................................................................... 81
Setting Zebra Pattern ...................................... 82
Setting Spot Meter ........................................... 83
Acquiring Positioning Information by GPS A
L ................................................................. 85
Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately (Clip
Review) ........................................................... 86
Displaying the Histogram ................................ 87
Recording Simultaneously at Two Different
Definitions ....................................................... 87
Series Rec ....................................................... 87
Dual Rec .......................................................... 88
Backup Rec ..................................................... 89
Special Recording ........................................... 91
Pre Rec ........................................................ 91
Clip Continuous Rec .................................... 92
Frame Rec ................................................... 94
Interval Rec .................................................. 95
Splitting the Clips Freely (Clip Cutter Trig) ....... 96
Configuring Infrared Recording ....................... 96
Contents
15
Introduction
Playback
Playing Recorded Clips ...................................
97
Thumbnail Screen ........................................ 97
Actions ......................................................... 99
Playing back .............................................. 100
Deleting Clips ................................................ 102
Appending/Deleting OK Mark ........................ 103
Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple
Clips .............................................................. 104
Selecting Multiple Clips Randomly ............. 104
Selecting Multiple Clips Consecutively ...... 105
Trimming Recorded Clips .............................. 106
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Basic Operations in Menu Screen ................. 107
Display and Description of the Menu Screen
................................................................... 108
Text Input with Software Keyboard ............ 109
Menu Screen Hierarchical Chart ................... 110
Camera Function Menu ................................. 111
Zoom Function Settings ............................. 113
Focus Function Settings ............................ 114
Face Detection Function Settings .............. 115
User Switch Set Item .................................. 116
Camera Process Menu .................................. 118
White Balance Item .................................... 123
TC/UB Menu ................................................. 124
LCD/VF Menu ................................................ 125
Shooting Assist Item .................................. 126
Marker Settings Item .................................. 127
Display Type Item ...................................... 128
Display On/Off Item .................................... 129
A/V Set Menu ................................................ 130
Video Set Item ........................................... 130
Audio Set Item ........................................... 132
Network Menu ............................................... 135
Connection Setup Item .............................. 136
Live Streaming Item ................................... 137
Return over IP Item .................................... 139
Web Item ................................................... 141
Metadata Server Item ................................ 142
Upload Settings Item .................................. 142
Overlay Settings Menu A L .................. 144
Settings Item L (Sportzcast) .................. 146
System Menu ................................................ 147
Record Set Item ......................................... 149
Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items
(Favorites Menu) ........................................... 155
Adding Menu Items to Favorites Menu ...... 155
Editing Favorites Menu .............................. 156
Display/Status Screen
Display Screen in Camera Mode
................... 159
Display Screen in Media Mode ...................... 165
Status Screen ................................................ 167
Camera Features
Marker and Safety Zone Displays (Camera Mode
Only) .............................................................. 169
Color Bar Output ........................................... 169
Adjusting the Gamma .................................... 170
Adjusting Color Matrix ................................... 171
Configuring Setup Files ................................. 172
Saving Setup Files ..................................... 173
Loading a Setup File .................................. 174
Deleting Setup Files ................................... 174
Connecting External Devices
Connecting External Monitor ......................... 175
Connect the headphone. ............................... 176
Connecting Wired Remote Control ................ 176
Network
Functions of Network Connection .................. 177
Preparing Network Connection ...................... 178
Operating Environment .............................. 178
Camera Setup for Network Connection ..... 178
Connecting to the Network ............................ 179
Importing Metadata ....................................... 180
Preparing Metadata ................................... 180
Configuring the Server for Downloading .... 181
Importing Metadata .................................... 181
Uploading a Recorded Video Clip ................. 182
Configuring the FTP Server for Uploading . 182
Uploading Clips Automatically (Auto FTP) . 183
Uploading Clips Manually (Manual FTP) .... 183
FTP Resume Feature .................................... 186
Connecting from a Web Browser ................... 186
Editing Metadata ........................................... 187
Planning Metadata ..................................... 187
Clip Metadata ............................................ 188
Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser
....................................................................... 190
View Remote Feature .................................... 194
Operating Procedure ................................. 194
Registering/Deleting Preset Zoom ............. 195
Camera Control Function .............................. 196
Changing the Settings via a Web Browser .... 198
Changing View Remote Function Settings . 199
Changing Connection Setup ...................... 199
Changing Metadata Server Settings .......... 200
Changing Clip Server Settings ................... 200
Changing Streaming Settings .................... 200
Managing the Network Connection Settings File
....................................................................... 201
16
Contents
Introduction
Saving the Connection Settings File .......... 201
Reading the Connection Settings File ........
202
Deleting Connection Settings .................... 203
Performing Live Streaming ............................ 204
Setting Distribution ..................................... 206
Starting Distribution ................................... 208
Setting the FEC Matrix ............................... 209
Return Video/Audio from the Network (Return over
IP) .................................................................. 210
IFB (Return Audio) ......................................... 211
Tagging Feature L .................................... 212
Configuring to Exchange Format ............... 212
Configuring Camera Angle Information ...... 212
Entering Tag Information ............................ 212
Synchronizing GPS Time Code ................. 213
Overlay A L
Broadcast Overlay A L ......................... 214
Importing and Configuring Settings for SDP Files
for Broadcast ............................................. 214
Displaying Watermark Images ................... 216
Displaying Images on the Whole Screen (Full
Screen Graphic Function) .......................... 216
Protecting Overlay Settings with a Password
................................................................... 218
Specifying Text and Images ....................... 219
Scoreboard Overlay L .............................. 219
Configuring Scoreboard Display ................ 219
Configuring Scoreboard Display Position .. 220
Entering Scoreboard Data ......................... 221
Team Display Settings ............................... 228
Entering Scoreboard Data Automatically ... 229
Others
Error Messages and Actions ......................... 231
List of FTP Transfer Errors ......................... 232
List of Live Streaming Error Displays ......... 234
List of Layout Import Error Displays A L
................................................................... 235
List of Sportzcast Connection Error Displays
L ............................................................ 235
Blinking of the Tally Lamp .......................... 236
Warning Tone ............................................ 236
Troubleshooting ............................................ 237
Specifications ................................................ 239
Appendix ....................................................... 245
Index ............................................................. 246
Software License Agreement ........................ 248
Important Notice concerning the Software ..... 249
.
Contents
17
Introduction
Main Features
1" CMOS sensor and new 4K 20x lens
for high-quality recording
Comes with a 1" CMOS sensor that delivers high
resolution and an excellent S/N ratio. At the same
time, a new 4K 20x lens with a good balance in
viewing angle, image quality and magnification is
employed to
reduce the occurrence of aberrations,
thereby achieving premium-quality 4K recording
with high sensitivity and low noise.
“Apple ProRes 422” available as a
standard feature to achieve high-
resolution and high bit-rate recording
performance
By making use of the KA-MC100 SSD media
adapter (sold separately), it is possible to perform
4K 50p/60p
Apple ProRes 422 recording to a high-
speed SSD memory.
A variety of wired and wireless
interfaces to support various network
connections
In addition to the USB host terminal for wireless
LAN and LTE USB adapter connections, this
camera recorder is equipped with a variety of
interfaces such as wired LAN terminal and built-in
wireless LAN
with 2.4GHz/5GHz MIMO dual band
antennas A to support various network
connections.
Bidirectional live streaming feature
Enables live streaming broadcast from the camera,
while at the same time receives program images
from studio stations as IP return video or intercom
audio as IP return audio (IFB) over the same line.
High
quality
signal processing by 10-bit,
4:2:2 sampling
High quality signal processing that delivers rich
gradation expression and color reproduction of
video signals is possible by means of 10-bit, 4:2:2
sampling.
Various
usage-based recording formats
Recording codecs supported are MPEG-4 AVC/H.
264 and Apple ProRes 422, which is compatible
with 4:2:2 10-bit recording. Selectable ProRes
formats include Apple ProRes 422HQ, Apple
ProRes 422 and Apple ProRes 422LT. Selectable
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 formats include QuickTime
(MOV) and MP4.
It is also compatible with MPEG2 MXF, which is a
widely-used format at broadcasting stations. A
HDR and log gamma for high dynamic
range and wide color gamut
This camera recorder is equipped with HLG
(Hybrid Log-Gamma) that conforms to ITU-BT.
2100 and our in-house J-Log1 Gamma with 800%
dynamic range to cope with HDR (High Dynamic
Range). Capable of recording in 10-bit for high
dynamic range and wide color gamut.
High-frame-rate recording in Full HD
quality (1920x1080)
Videos with a maximum frame rate of 120 fps can
be recorded
in slow motion. It can be used to check
the style of the subject in fast-moving sports and in
video expression that leaves a deep impression.
Broadcast Overlay A L
Station name, program name, or news title
according to the recorded content can be entered
easily by using a smartphone or tablet, and this
information can
be superimposed on the recording
clip or streaming images.
Also, it comes with a full-screen graphic feature that
allows overlay of the entire screen with images
such as notifications and advertisements.
Score Board Overlay L
Allows display of scores for games such as football,
baseball, basketball and hockey over the video
image.
Scores can
be entered from a smartphone or tablet
while video-shooting is in progress, enabling easy
operation such as live broadcast by a small crew.
Auto focus/optical image stabilizer
(OIS)
The camera recorder is equipped with a face
detection auto
focus function that covers the entire
screen. Switching to manual focus is also possible.
A built-in optical image stabilizer feature is also
available.
Prevents camera shake with the OIS
hard lock feature
Helps to secure the OIS lens to prevent unnatural
video images due to sudden acceleration of
vehicles when
the camera is mounted on a vehicle.
18
Main Features
Introduction
Double SD card slots for series/dual
recordings
The most common SDHC/SDXC card recording
system is used for the memory card. This ensures
high reliability and operation at low running cost.
Various user friendly recording options are
available. These include series recording which
enables seamless long hour continuous
recordings over
the slots and dual recording of the
same file to two slots.
FTP feature that supports automatic
upload
Clips stored in the recording media can be
uploaded automatically to the FTP server while
recording is paused. When recording is in
progress, clips
stored in the slot that is not used for
recording can also be uploaded.
Large tricolor LED indicators that show
the camera and network status
The two large LED indicators light up in three
different colors
to allow identification of the camera
status and network status (including the return
video) at a glance.
Time code input/output terminals for
shooting using multiple cameras
This camera recorder supports the use of multiple
cameras as well as studio use.
Professional-style switch layout and
diverse video parameters
Switches for Gain and White Balance are available
on the side panel to enable quick switching
according to the shooting scene. Image quality
parameters such as gamma and color matrix are
also available in the menu for adjustment to the
preferred tones.
Built-in GPS A L
This camera recorder is built in with GPS function,
which enables the positional information obtained
from the GPS satellite during a shoot to be
recorded as metadata.
* Note that acquisition of the positional
information may fail depending on the weather
condition.
User buttons/switches assignable with
different functions for greater ease of
use
Menu items corresponding to each user button are
available to assign the buttons with different
functions.
Symbols used
Caution : Describes precautions concerning the
operation of this product.
Memo : Describes reference information, such
as functions and usage restrictions of
this product.
A
: Indicates the reference page numbers
and reference items.
A
: Feature available on GY-HC550U/
GY-HC550E only.
B
: Feature available on GY-HC500U/
GY-HC500E/GY-HC500SPCU only.
L
: Feature available on GY-HC500SPCU
only.
Content of this manual
0
All rights reserved by JVCKENWOOD
Corporation. Unauthorized duplication or
reprinting of this manual, in whole or in part, is
strictly prohibited.
0
Illustrated designs, specifications and other
contents of this manual are subject to change for
improvement without prior notice.
0
SDXC and SDHC logos are trademarks of
SD-3C, LLC.
0
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United States
and other countries.
0
QuickTime, Final Cut Pro, iPhone, iPad, iPod
touch, macOS and Safari are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
0
iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of
Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used
under license.
0
Android and Google Chrome are trademarks
and/or registered trademarks of Google LLC.
0
QR Code is a registered trademark of Denso
Wave Incorporated.
0
Microsoft, Windows, and Internet Explorer are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
0
The company name of Fontworks, Fontworks,
and the name of the fonts are registered
trademarks of Fontworks Inc.
0
Zixi and the Zixi logo are trademarks of Zixi LLC.
0
Other product and company names included in
this instruction manual are trademarks and/or
registered trademarks of their respective
companies. Marks such as and ® have been
omitted in this manual.
Main Features
19
Introduction
Precautions for Proper
Use
Storage and Usage Locations
o
Allowable ambient temperature and humidity
Be sure to use this unit within the allowable
temperature range of 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to
104°F) and a relative humidity of 30 % to 80 %.
Using this unit at a temperature or humidity
outside the allowable ranges could result not
only in malfunction but also serious impact on
the CMOS elements as small white spots may
be generated.
Please exercise care during use.
o
Strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism
Noise may appear in the picture or audio and/or
the colors may be incorrect if this unit is used
near a radio or television transmitting antenna,
in places where strong magnetic fields are
generated by transformers, motors, etc., or near
devices emitting radio waves, such as
transceivers or cellular phones.
o
Use of wireless microphone near this unit
When a wireless microphone or wireless
microphone tuner is used near this unit during
recording, the tuner could pick up noise.
o
Avoid using or placing this unit in the following
places.
0
Places subject to extreme heat or cold
0
Places with excessive dirt or dust
0
Places with high humidity or moisture
0
Places subject
to smoke or vapor such as near
a cooking stove
0
Places subject to strong vibrations or unstable
surfaces
0
In a parked car under direct sunlight or near a
heater for long hours
o
Do not place this unit at places that are subject
to radiation or X-rays, or where corrosive gases
occur.
o
Protect this unit from being splashed with water.
(Especially when shooting in the rain)
o
Protect this unit from getting wet when shooting
on a beach. In addition, salt and sand may
adhere to the body. Be sure to clean the unit after
use.
o
Protect this unit against penetration of dust
when using it in a place subject to sandy dust.
Carrying the Camera
o
Do
not
drop or hit this unit against a hard object
when transporting.
Power Saving
o
When this unit is not in use, be sure to set the
[POWER ON/OFF] switch to “OFF
” in order to
reduce power consumption.
Maintenance
o
Turn off the power before performing any
maintenance.
o
Wipe the external cabinet of the unit with a soft
cloth. Do not wipe the body with benzene or
thinner. Doing
so may cause the surface to melt
or turn cloudy. When it is extremely dirty, soak
the cloth in a solution of neutral detergent, wipe
the body with it, and then use a clean cloth to
remove the detergent.
Rechargeable Battery
o
Be sure to use only the specified batteries.
We do not guarantee the safety and
performance of this device if an unspecified
battery is used.
o
Store the battery in a cool and dry place when
not in use. Do not expose the battery to high
temperatures (such as in a car under direct
sunlight). Failure to do so not only shortens the
battery life but also damages the battery.
o
Charge the battery first before using.
o
If you are not using the battery for a prolonged
period of
time, remove and keep the battery at a
30 % to 40 % charge level to prevent
deterioration.
o
Recharge the battery to a level of 10 % to 20 %
once every
six months when storing the battery.
Storing the battery at a fully discharged state will
result in over discharging and inability to charge
the battery.
o
ATTENTION:
The product you have purchased
is powered by a rechargeable
battery that is recyclable.
Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for
information on how to recycle this
battery.
20
Precautions for Proper Use
Introduction
Regular Inspection (Maintenance)
o
Under normal environment, dust will
accumulate on the camera recorder when it is
used over a long period. Dust may enter the
camera recorder
especially if it is used outdoors.
This may affect the image and sound quality of
the camera recorder. Check and replace the fan
after every 9000 hours (suggested guideline).
You can check the usage time of the fan in
[System] B [System Information] B [Fan Hour].
(A P149 [ Fan Hour ] )
If the fan is used for more than 9000 hours
without replacement, “Fan Maintenance
Required” will be displayed every time you turn
on the power.
SDHC/SDXC Cards
o
SDHC/SDXC card
is referred to as “SD card” or
“recording media” in this manual.
o
This camera recorder saves the recorded
images and audio sound on the SD card (sold
separately) in the card slot.
o
If the SD card contains files recorded by devices
other than this camera recorder or files that are
saved from a PC, the recordable time may be
shorter or data may not be properly recorded. In
addition, the remaining space on the card may
not increase even when files are deleted using
a PC.
o
For details on the combinations of usable SD
card and format setting, refer to the following.
(A P48 [Format Setting and Usable SD Card
Combinations] )
* Using cards other than those from Panasonic,
TOSHIBA or SanDisk may result in recording
failure or data loss.
Handling of SD Cards
o
The status indicator lights up in red when data
on the SD card is being accessed.
Do not remove the SD card during data access
(such as
recording, playback, or formatting). Do
not turn off the power or remove the battery and
AC adapter during access either.
o
Do not use or store the SD card in a place that
is subject to static electricity or electrical noise.
o
Do not place the SD card near locations that are
exposed to strong magnetic fields or radio
waves.
o
Inserting the SD card incorrectly may result in
damage of this unit or the SD card.
o
We are not liable for any accidental loss of data
stored on the SD card. Please back up any
important data.
o
Make use of the SD card within the prescribed
conditions of use.
Do not use it at the following locations.
Places that are subject to direct sunlight, high
humidity or corrosion, places near thermal
equipment, sandy or dusty places, or in a car
under the sun with the doors and windows
closed.
o
Do not
bend or drop the SD card, or subject it to
strong impact or vibration.
o
Do not splash the SD card with water.
o
Do not dismantle or modify the SD card.
o
Do not touch the terminals with your hands or
with a metal object.
o
Do not allow dust, dirt, water, or foreign objects
to adhere to the terminals.
o
Do not remove the labels or stick other labels or
stickers on the SD cards.
o
Do not use pencils or ballpoint pens to write on
the SD cards. Always use oil-based pens.
o
If you format (initialize) the SD card, all data
recorded on the card, including video data and
setup files, will be deleted.
o
You are recommended to use cards that are
formatted (initialized) on this camera recorder.
0
The SD card may be damaged if the camera
recorder is not operated correctly. Formatting
(Initializing) the SD card may allow it to
operate correctly.
0
SD cards that have been formatted
(initialized) on other cameras, computers or
peripheral equipment may not operate
correctly. In this case, format (initialize) the SD
card on this camera recorder.
o
If you want to wipe out all information by
completely erasing the data, we recommend
either using commercially available software
that is specially designed for that purpose, or by
physically destroying the SD card with a
hammer, etc. When formatting or erasing data
using the camera recorder, only the file
administration information is changed. The data
is not completely erased from the SD card.
o
Some commercially available SD cards may be
harder to be removed from this unit. Remove
them by hooking onto the groove on the cards.
0
It will be easier to remove the cards after
several times.
0
Do not stick any stickers on the cards.
.
Groove
o
The SD card may pop out when it is being
removed. Be careful not to lose the card.
Precautions for Proper Use
21
Introduction
Encryption in Network Connection
o
Wireless LAN connections make use of an
encryption function.
This encryption is designed for commercially-
sold equipment, and it cannot be altered.
LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
o
The LCD monitor and viewfinder screen are
manufactured using high-precision technology.
Black or bright spots may appear on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen. This is not a
malfunction. These spots will not be recorded.
o
If you
use this unit continuously for a long period
of time, the characters displayed in the
viewfinder may temporarily remain on the
screen. This phenomenon will not be recorded
to the recording media. They will not appear
after you turn the power off and then on again.
o
If you use this unit in a cold place, the images
may appear to lag on the screen, but this is not
a malfunction. Retained images are not
recorded on the SD card.
o
Do not press against the surface with force or
subject it to strong impact. Doing so may
damage or break the screens.
o
Noise may appear in the viewfinder when
switching between the live video and playback
images.
o
Due to the characteristic of the viewfinder
display device, colors may appear on the
images when you blink your eyes. It does not
affect the recorded images, SDI output, or HDMI
output.
GPS A L
o
The GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites
are managed by the Department of State of the
U.S., and its precision may be altered
intentionally.
o
Perform positioning
at an unobstructed location
with a clear view that is not indoors or blocked
by trees.
o
The time needed for obtaining the position
information may be longer and variation may
also be larger depending on the surrounding
environment and time of day.
o
This camera recorder uses the WGS 84 World
Geodetic System.
o
Signal from GPS satellites may be interrupted by
communication signal from electronic devices
such as mobile phones.
o
Make use of it in accordance with the regulations
of the country, region or location of use.
Copyright
o
Any recordings made on this camera recorder
that are played back for profit or public preview
may infringe on the rights of the owner of the
recordings.
Do not use the recordings for purpose other than
personal enjoyment without prior consent from
the owner. And even for personal enjoyment,
you may not be able to record without
permission from the owner.
License Notices
o
MPEG LA AVC
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR
THE PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR
OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT
RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH
THE AVC
STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS
OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER
LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE
IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM
MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
o
MPEG LA MPEG-2 Patent
ANY USE OF THIS UNIT IN ANY MANNER
OTHER THAN PERSONAL USE THAT
COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-2 STANDARD
FOR ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR
PACKAGED MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY
PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, LLC, 6312 S.
WHICH LICENSE IS AVAILABLE FROM MPEG
LA, LLC, 6312 S. Fiddlers Green circle, Suite
400E, Greenwood Village, Colorado 80111
U.S.A.
22
Precautions for Proper Use
Introduction
Rebooting
o
The camera recorder is rebooted when the
following operations are performed.
0
[System]
B [Record Set] B [Record Format]
0
[System] B [Record Set] B
[Time Stamp]
0
[System]
B [Setup File] B[Load File] B [User
File]/[All File]
0
[System] B [Reset All
]
0
[Camera Process] B [Reverse Picture]
0
[Network]
B [Return over IP] B [Function]
0
[Overlay Settings]
B [Overlay Function] A
L
0
[Overlay Settings
] B [Output] A L
Others
o
Do not
insert objects other than the memory card
into the card slot.
o
Do not block the vent on the unit.
Blocking of the vent causes internal heating and
may lead to burns and fires.
o
Hot air may be discharged from the vents
depending on the condition of use. This is not a
malfunction.
o
Do not turn off the [POWER ON/OFF] switch or
remove the power cable during recording or
playback.
o
The camera recorder may not show stable
pictures for
a few seconds immediately after the
power is turned on, but this is not a malfunction.
o
When the video signal output terminals are not
in use, put on the covers to prevent damage to
the terminals.
o
Do not drop this unit or subject it to strong impact
or vibration as it is a precision equipment.
o
Optical performance of lens
Due to the optical performance of the lens, color
divergence phenomena (magnification
chromatic aberration) may occur at the
periphery of the image. This is not a camera
malfunction.
o
Noise may appear in the image when switching
modes.
o
If placed on its side, heat release efficiency will
deteriorate.
o
Use the supplied AC adapter as the power
supply. Do not use the supplied AC adapter on
other devices.
o
Use the
supplied power cord. And do not use the
supplied power cord for any other devices.
o
When the
connectors that come with connector
covers are not in use, put on the covers to
prevent damage to the connectors.
o
This camera recorder makes use of fonts by
Fontworks Inc.
o
This camera recorder makes use of M+FONTS.
o
Use the
built-in wireless LAN only in the country
and region where it was purchased.
And there are legal restrictions on the use and
outdoor use depending on the country and
region. Please be careful not to violate the law.
A
Precautions for Proper Use
23
Introduction
Operation Modes
This camera recorder has three operation modes - Camera mode, Media mode, and Remote Edit mode.
.
Trimming Playback
Normal Playback
Camera Input
(Actions)
Execute [Delete Clips]
File Deletion in Progress
Exit Trimming Operation
(Successful/Failed/Stopped)
Execute
[Trim This Clip]
Thumbnail
Display
Playback
Camera Mode
Media Mode
* Selecting a mode other than the Metadata Edit mode via the web
browser, or selecting [Exit] on the [Remote Edit Mode] screen
Upon access via a web browser and selecting [Change] on the
[Change to Remote Edit Mode?] screen on the camera or the web browser
*
Exit FTP
Operation
(Successful)
Remote Edit Mode
FTP in Progress
FTP in Progress
Trimming in Progress
Exit/Cancel File Delete Operation (Successful/Failed/Stopped)
Exit/Cancel FTP Operation (Successful/Failed/Stopped)
Execute [FTP Upload]
[CANCEL]/[MENU/THUMB] Button
Press and hold [MODE]
Set Button (
R
)
[ONLINE/3] Button
Press and hold [MODE]
[MODE] Button
[MODE]
Button
24
Operation Modes
Introduction
Operation Mode Description
Camera Mode
0
This
is
the camera shooting mode. The camera recorder starts up in Camera mode
when the power is turned on.
0
Camera images are output to the viewfinder and LCD monitor. When a recordable
media is inserted, the camera recorder enters the recording standby mode. “STBY”
appears on the operation mode display area of the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
0
Press the [REC] trigger button to start recording.
Memo :
0
Playback of recording media is not possible in the Camera mode. However, you
can check the most recently recorded video clip.
(A P86 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately (Clip Review)] )
Media Mode
0
This mode
allows you to play back or delete clips recorded on the recording media.
0
When a playable recording media is inserted, the thumbnail or playback screen is
displayed on the viewfinder and LCD monitor.
0
Press and hold the [MODE] selection button to enter the Media mode when you
are not shooting in the Camera mode. Once the camera recorder is in Media mode,
thumbnails of the selected media slot are displayed.
Remote Edit
Mode
0
This mode enables the list display and editing of the recorded clip data through
access to the clip list display page via a web browser on a smartphone, tablet
terminal, or PC.
0
When you access via a web browser on a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, “It
is necessary to change the camera mode to "Remote Edit Mode". Change the
mode.” appears on the web browser. Also,
“Change to Remote Edit Mode?” is
displayed on the display screen of the camera unit.
Selecting [Change] on the camera recorder and pressing the Set button switches
to the Remote Edit mode, and enables display of the clip list and editing of the clip
metadata.
(A P
188 [ Clip Metadata ] )
(
A P190 [Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser] )
Memo :
0
If you
access via a web browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet terminal,
or PC while recording is in progress, the message appears after recording stops.
0
If playback is in progress, the message appears once the files are closed
automatically, such as when playback stops.
Operation Modes
25
Introduction
Names of Parts
.
o
Bottom
A
B
C
D
G
H
F
E
A
Shoe
For mounting separately sold lights and
accessories.
B
Tally Lamp
(A P47 [Tally Lamp and LED] )
(
A P236 [Blinking of the Tally Lamp] )
C
Built-in Microphone
(A P74 [Audio Recording] )
D
Monitor Speaker
(A P100 [Audio Output during Playback] )
E
Cross-Shaped Button (JKHI)/Set Button (R)
0
For operating the menu and cursor and for
confirming
a
setting, as well as for configuring
the settings for time code and user’s bit.
0
When a function is assigned to the cross-
shaped button, it functions as a user button.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
F
Tripod Mounting Screw Hole
(A P33 [Attaching the Tripod (Sold
Separately)] )
G
[FIX/VAR/OFF] zoom speed switch
(A P59 [Zoom Operation] )
For switching the zoom speed of the zoom lever
X at the handle.
H
Accessory Mounting Screw Hole
.
K
L
J
R
X
V
T
W
I
M
O
N
S
Q
P
U
I
Wireless LAN Antenna Terminal A
(A P
34 [Attaching the Wireless LAN
Antennas (Supplied)
A] )
J
Viewfinder
(A P43 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
K
Eyecup
Prevents external light from entering the
viewfinder screen and cameraman’s vision.
L
Visibility Adjustment Lever
(A P43 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
M
[x] Headphone Jack (Φ3.5 mm)
(A P76 [Monitoring Audio Sound During
Recording Using a Headphone] )
N
[TC IN/OUT] switch
(A P81 [Synchronizing Time Code on
Another Camera] )
O
[TC] TC Input/Output Terminal
(A P76 [Time Code and User’s Bit] )
P
[REC] Record Trigger Button
Starts/stops recording.
Memo :
This switch is interlocked with the [REC/HOLD]
button W at the top of the handle.
Q
[EXP.FOCUS/9] Expanded Focus Assist/User
9 Button
0
For switching the expanded focus ON or
OFF.
(A P62 [Expanded Focus Function] )
0
You can also use it as a user button by
assigning a specific feature in the menu
setting to this button.
R
Zoom Lever at the Grip
(A
P59 [Using the Zoom Lever at the Grip] )
26
Names of Parts
Introduction
S
Hood Release Button
(A P34 [Attaching/Detaching the Hood] )
T
External Microphone Cable Clamp
(
A P33 [Attaching the External Microphone
(Sold Separately)] )
U
[INPUT1/INPUT2] Audio Input Terminal 1, 2
(XLR 3-pin x 2)
(A P33 [Attaching the External Microphone
(Sold Separately)] )
V
Shoulder Belt Mount (x2)
For mounting a shoulder belt (sold separately).
Caution :
0
Be sure to use a shoulder belt with the strength
to
withstand
the weight of this camera recorder.
0
If the shoulder belt is not properly attached, the
camera recorder may fall and cause injuries.
0
Check the [INSTRUCTIONS] provided with the
shoulder belt before using.
W
[REC/HOLD] Record Trigger Button/Lock
Switch
Starts/stops recording.
Set the switch to [HOLD] to lock the [REC]
Trigger button.
Memo :
0
This switch is interlocked with the [REC]
button
P on the grip.
0
[REC] button P on the grip is not locked.
X
Zoom Lever on Handle
(A P59 [Using the Zoom Lever at the
Handle] )
Names of Parts
27
Introduction
Side Control Panel
.
J
K
N
L
I
O
P
H
T
M
U
X
Z
V
b
Y
Q
R
S
W
a
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A
[FOCUS AUTO/MANU] Focus Switch
(
A P60 [Focus Operation] )
B
[ND FILTER] ND Filter Switch
Use the ND filter to keep the lens aperture in the
appropriate range.
OFF, 1/4, 1/16, 1/64
(A P68 [Setting the ND Filter] )
C
[PUSH AUTO/PUSH LOCK] Focus Push Auto/
Push Lock Button
(A P60 [One Push Auto Focus] )
(A P60 [Setting to Auto Focus Temporarily
(Push Auto Focus)] )
(A P60 [Locking the Focus] )
D
[USER7] Button
It can be assigned with a specific menu function.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
E
[USER8] Button
It can be assigned with a specific menu function.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
F
[IRIS] Iris Auto/Manual Selection Button
(A P65 [Adjusting the Iris] )
G
[PUSH AUTO] Iris Push Auto Button
(A P65 [Adjusting the Iris] )
H
[GAIN] Gain Auto/Manual Selection Button / [L/
M/H] Sensitivity Selection Switch
(A P66 [Setting the Gain] )
I
[WHT BAL]
White Balance Auto/Manual
Selection Button / [B/A/PRESET] Selection
Switch
(A P69 [Adjusting the White Balance] )
J
[y] One Push Auto White Balance Button
K
[SHUTTER] Shutter Speed Auto/Manual
Selection Button
(A P67 [Setting the Electronic Shutter] )
L
[FULL AUTO ON/OFF] Full Auto Switch
(A P64 [Adjusting the Brightness] )
(A P69 [Automatic White Balance Mode
(FAW: Fulltime Auto White balance)] )
M
[MARKER/6] Marker/User 6 Button
This button toggles ON/OFF the marker, safety
zone, and center mark displays.
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
N
[KEYLOCK ON/OFF] Key Lock Switch
(A P54 [About the Operation Lock Feature
(KEYLOCK)] )
O
[MODE] Camera/Media Mode Selection Button
(A P24 [Operation Modes] )
P
EXT.SLOT Lamp
Lights up in green when a media is inserted into
EXT.SLOT, and lights up in red when the media
is being accessed.
Q
[POWER ON/OFF] Lock Power ON/OFF Switch
Turns ON/OFF the power.
0
Hold
down
the lock button (blue) in the center
to toggle ON/OFF.
0
When the power is turning OFF, “P.OFF”
appears on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
0
Wait for 5 seconds or more to turn on the
power again.
(A P38 [Turning On/Off the Power] )
R
POWER/CHARGE LED
(
A P35 [Using a Battery Pack] )
S
STATUS LED
(A P148 [ STATUS LED ] )
T
NETWORK LED
(A P148 [ NETWORK LED ] )
28
Names of Parts
Introduction
U
[ZEBRA/5]
Zebra/User 5 Button
(A P82 [Setting Zebra Pattern] )
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
V
[AE LOCK/4] AE Lock/User 4 Button
When Gain, Iris, and Shutter are set to “AUTO”,
their respective values and the value of white
balance are locked when the [AE LOCK/4] button
is pressed.
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
W
Cross-Shaped Button (JKHI)/Set Button (R)
The function changes according to the
operation status of the camera recorder.
o
During menu operation (all modes)
(A P107 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
Set Button (
R) : Confirms menu items
and setting values
Cross-shaped Button
(JK)
: Selects menu items
and setting values
o
During Camera mode
Shutter operation:
Set Button (R) :
Shutter ON/OFF
Cross-shaped Button
(JK)
: Switches shutter
speed when shutter
is ON
Cross-Shaped Button
(HI)
: AE level operation
X
[ONLINE/3] Online/User 3 Button
0
Switches live streaming between ON/OFF.
(A P208 [Starting Distribution] )
0
You can also use it as a user button by
assigning a specific feature in the menu
setting to this button. Initial setting: Live
streaming
(
A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
Y
[OIS/2] Optical Image Stabilizer/User 2 Button
For switching the image stabilizer feature mode
ON or OFF.
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
Z
[FOCUS ASSIST/1]
Focus Assist/User 1 Button
For switching the focus assist function ON or
OFF.
(A P61 [Focus Assist Function] )
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
a
[MENU/THUMB] Menu/Thumbnail Button
0
Displays the menu screen during Camera
mode.
0
Switches between [Main Menu] and
[Favorites Menu] when the [MENU/THUMB]
button is pressed and held down while the
menu screen is displayed.
(
A P
107 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
0
Displays the
menu screen when the button is
pressed during thumbnail display in the
Media mode.
0
Stops playback and displays the thumbnail
screen when the button is pressed during
playback screen display in the Media mode.
b
[CANCEL] Cancel Button
Cancels various settings and stops playback.
Names of Parts
29
Introduction
Rear Terminal
.
OPEN
BATTERY
BATTERIE:
7.2V
N
L
M
I
J
K
C
D
E
B
A
O
G
H
F
A
SD Card Cover
B
Card Slot A
C
[SLOT SEL
] Button
For switching the active card slot during
shooting and playback.
D
[BATT.RELEASE] Button
(A P35 [Removing the Battery] )
E
Card Slot B
F
[EXT.SLOT]
SSD media adapters (sold separately) such as
KA-MC100 can be inserted into the slot.
(
A P51 [Inserting the SSD Media Adapter] )
G
Battery
(A P35 [Using a Battery Pack] )
H
[DC] Terminal
Input terminal for DC 12 V power supply. For
connecting with the supplied AC adapter.
(A P36 [Using AC Power (DC IN Power)] )
I
[SDI OUT] Terminal
(A P175 [Connecting External Monitor] )
J
[REMOTE] Terminal
(A P176 [Connecting Wired Remote Control] )
K
[LAN] Terminal
For connecting the LAN cable.
L
[HOST] USB Host Terminal
For connecting a USB adapter according to the
intended purpose when you are connecting the
unit to a network.
(A P178 [Camera Setup for Network
Connection] )
M
[HDMI] Terminal
(A P175 [Connecting External Monitor] )
N
[AUX] Terminal (Φ3.5 mm)
For connecting to receiver such as wireless
microphone.
O
Access Lamp A/B
30
Names of Parts
Introduction
LCD Monitor
.
CH1
INT
INPUT1
INPUT2
AUTO
MANUAL
CH2
INPUT2
MONITOR
DISPLAY STATUS
INPUT1
PEAKINGLCD BRIGHT
CH2CH1
LINE
MIC
MIC
+48V
CH1
BOTH
CH2
EFCD
B
GHIK J
A
A
LCD Monitor
(A P43 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
B
[CH1/CH2] CH1/CH2 Recording Level
Adjustment Knob
(
A P74 [Audio Recording] )
C
[LCD BRIGHT +/-] LCD Display Brightness
Adjustment Button
(A P44 [Adjusting the Brightness] )
D
[PEAKING +/-] LCD/VF Contour Adjustment
Button
(A P44 [Adjusting the Contour (LCD)] )
(A P45 [Adjusting the Contour (Viewfinder)] )
E
[DISPLAY] Display Button
0
Press the [DISPLAY]
button to switch to the
display screen during normal screen display
(when the menu screen is not displayed).
(A P41 [Display Screen] )
0
Switches between [Main Menu]
and
[Favorites Menu] when the [DISPLAY] button
is pressed while the menu screen is
displayed.
(A P
107 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
F
[STATUS
] Status Screen Display Button
Press the [STATUS] button to display the status
screen on the viewfinder and LCD monitor
during normal screen display (when the menu
screen is not displayed).
(A P42 [Status Screen] )
G
[MONITOR]/[+/-] Audio Monitor Selection
Switch/Volume Adjustment Button
Switches the audio monitor and adjusts the
monitor speaker/headphone.
(A P76 [Monitoring Audio Sound During
Recording Using a Headphone] )
H
[INPUT1/INPUT2] Audio Input Signal Selection
Switch
(
A P74 [Audio Recording] )
I
[CH2] CH2 Audio Input Signal Selection Switch
Select the audio input terminal to record to CH2.
(A P74 [Audio Recording] )
J
[CH1] CH1 Audio Input Signal Selection Switch
(A P74 [Audio Recording] )
K
[CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] CH1/CH2 Audio
Recording Mode Switch
(A P75 [Adjusting Audio Recording Level] )
Lens Section
.
FOCUS
USER7 USER8
I
OPTICAL ZOOM20x
ND FILTER
1/64
1/16
1/4
OFF
AUTO
MANU
PUSH AUTO
PUSH LOCK
A
D ECB
A
Filter Built-In Screw
0
Transparent or
UV filter for lens protection, or
filters for various effects can be installed.
0
Installable filter types: Φ82 mm
Memo :
0
Remove the lens hood when installing the filter.
(A P34 [Attaching/Detaching the Hood] )
B
Lens Cover Open/Close Switch
(A P33 [Opening/Closing the Lens Cover] )
C
Focus Ring
(A P60 [Focus Operation] )
D
Zoom Ring
(A P59 [Zoom Operation] )
E
Iris Ring
(A P65 [Adjusting the Iris] )
To operate auto iris, press the [IRIS] button on
the side control panel.
(a mark appears on the screen)
Names of Parts
31
Introduction
Basic System Diagram
.
[AUX]
[REMOTE]
[INPUT1]/
[INPUT2]
[HOST]
[EXT.SLOT]
[TC]
[HDMI]
[SDI OUT]
GY-HC550/GY-HC500
GY-HC550/GY-HC500
(AA-VC2)
(BN-VC296G)
(KA-MC100)
[x]
[DC]
Carrying
Case
Tr i p o d
AC Adapter
Shoulder
Belt
Wireless
Microphone
Receiver
Headphone
SDI Cable
BNC
Microphone
Monitor
Monitor
HDMI Cable
USB Network Adapter
Battery Charger
Remote Control Unit
Standard Package
SD Card SD Card Reader
A
Wireless LAN Antenna
SSD Media Adapter
Battery
32
Basic System Diagram
Introduction
Settings and Adjustments
Before Use
.
Adjusting the Grip Belt
Open the pad and adjust the position of the grip belt
accordingly.
.
Caution :
0
If the
grip is loose, the camera recorder may fall
off resulting in injuries or malfunction.
Attaching the External Microphone
(Sold Separately)
You can attach a separately sold microphone to the
microphone holder.
.
4
5
25
1, 3
1
Turn the knob on the microphone holder
counterclockwise to loosen and open the
microphone holder.
2
Place the microphone in the microphone
holder.
3
Turn the knob on the microphone holder
clockwise to secure the microphone.
4
Connect the microphone cable to the
[INPUT1]
or [
INPUT2] terminal.
5
Pin the microphone cable to the clamp.
6
Perform the settings for the microphone
correctly.
(A P74 [Audio Recording] )
Opening/Closing the Lens Cover
Use the lens cover open/close switch to open or
close the lens cover.
Before shooting, open the lens cover.
When this
camera recorder is not in use, close the
lens cover to protect the lens.
.
Lens cover switch
Caution :
0
Do not press against the lens cover with force.
Doing so may damage the lens or the cover.
Attaching the Tripod (Sold Separately)
Use the screw hole at the bottom of this camera
recorder.
(3/8×16UNC, 1/4×20UNC)
Use the screw hole that suits the tripod.
To prevent the camera recorder from falling off,
which may result in injuries or damages, read the
“INSTRUCTIONS” of the tripod to be used and
make sure that it is securely attached.
.
o Bottom
Caution :
0
If the camera recorder exceeds the weight limit
of the tripod, do not mount it on the tripod.
0
Use the tripod on a stable surface.
0
To prevent the camera recorder from falling,
attach securely using the rotation prevention
hole.
0
Use screws
with screw length 5 mm and below.
Settings and Adjustments Before Use
33
Preparations
Attaching the Wireless LAN Antennas
(Supplied) A
Attach the wireless LAN antenna by turning it in the
clockwise direction. Hold the base while attaching
the antenna.
.
Caution :
0
Applying force to the wireless LAN antenna or
yanking it may damage the antenna so please
use caution when using the antenna.
If it
is damaged, replacement is chargeable even
during the warranty period.
(Part number: T9A-0095-00)
0
Use the antenna holders without removing
them.
Attaching/Detaching the Hood
Attaching the Hood
Align the markings on the camera recorder and
hood; turn
the hood in the direction of the arrow until
it is locked.
.
Detaching the Hood
While pressing the hood release button, turn the
hood in the direction of the arrow (anti-clockwise)
to remove it.
.
Caution :
0
Remove the hood when attaching a filter,
teleconverter or
wide converter to the front of the
lens.
34
Settings and Adjustments Before Use
Preparations
Power Supply
To use this camera recorder, you can attach a
battery pack or connect an AC adapter to it.
(A P35 [Using a Battery Pack] )
(A P36 [Using AC Power (DC IN Power)] )
Caution :
0
Set the [
POWER ON/OFF] switch to “OFF”
before changing the power supply that operates
this camera recorder.
0
To charge the battery using a battery charger,
purchase a
genuine charger that can charge the
recommended battery.
Using a Battery Pack
Charging the Battery
Charge the battery immediately after purchase or
when the battery power is running low.
* The battery is not charged when purchased.
.
3
2
1
4
ON
OFF
POWER/
CHARGE
1
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set
to “OFF”.
2
Attach the supplied battery.
Slide it in until you hear a click.
3
Connect the supplied AC adapter to the
[DC]
terminal.
Open
the cover of the [DC] terminal
and connect
as shown in the diagram.
4
Connect the AC adapter to a power outlet.
0
The [POWER/CHARGE] lamp blinks during
charging and will go out after charging is
complete.
0
Remove the AC adapter after charging is
complete.
Memo :
0
Blinking of
the [POWER/CHARGE] lamp during
charging indicates the charge level.
[POWER/CHARGE] Lamp
during “POWER.OFF”
Charge Level
Alternates between a blinking
orange light (4 times) and
light off (1 second)
Less than 25 %
Alternates between a blinking
orange light (3 times) and
light off (1 second)
Less than 50 %
Alternates between a blinking
orange light (2 times) and
light off (1 second)
Less than 75 %
Alternates between a blinking
orange
light
(blinks once) and
light off (1 second)
Less than 100 %
Light goes out Fully charged
0
You can
charge the battery even when operating
the camera recorder using the AC adapter. The
lamp lights up in green during “POWER.ON”.
Removing the Battery
.
2
1
ON
OFF
1
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set
to “OFF”.
2
While pressing and holding the [BATT.
RELEASE]
button, push up and remove the
battery in the direction of the arrow.
Caution :
0
Do not remove the battery when the [POWER
ON/OFF] switch is “ON”.
0
Leaving the camera recorder unused with the battery
attached will deplete the battery power even when
you set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “OFF”.
Remove the battery if you are not using the camera
recorder.
Power Supply
35
Preparations
Estimated Charging and Continuous
Operating Times
o
Charging time
BN-VC296G (accessory)
:
Approx. 5 hours
*
When the [POWER ON/OFF] switch is set to “OFF”
Memo :
0
If
you
charge the battery immediately after using
while the battery is still warm, it may not be fully
charged.
0
It is recommended that you charge the battery
in an environment between 10 °C and 30 °C (50
°F and 86 °F). The battery may not be fully
charged or the charging time may be prolonged
if charged under low temperatures (below 10 °C/
50 °F). In addition, charging the battery under
high temperature (above 30 °C/86 °F) condition
may shorten the battery life.
o
Continuous operating time
BN-VC296G (accessory)
:
Approx. 2 hrs 40 mins
(*1)
Approx. 2 hrs 50 mins
(*2)
*1 When [System] is set to
“4K” and all other
settings are in factory default
*2 When [System] is set to “HD” and all other
settings are in factory default
Memo :
0
Actual operating
times may differ depending on
the age of the battery, charging condition, and
operating environment.
0
Operating time is shortened in cold
environment.
0
The operating time may shorten when power
zoom is used, accessories are connected, or
when the LCD monitor is frequently used.
0
For purchase of spare batteries and battery
charger, please contact the local dealers in your
area.
Precautions for Batteries
0
Store the battery in a cool and dry place when
not in use. Do not expose the battery to high
temperatures (such as in a car under direct
sunlight). Failure to do so not only shortens the
battery life but also damages the battery.
0
If the operating time shortens drastically even
after charging, the battery may be reaching the
end of its life. Replace the battery with a new
one.
Using AC Power (DC IN Power)
Use the supplied AC adapter to operate the camera
recorder with AC power.
.
ON
OFF
POWER/
CHARGE
2
1
1
Connect the DC cable of the AC adapter to
the [DC] terminal of the camera recorder.
0
Check that the power switch of the camera
recorder is set to “OFF”.
0
Open the cover of the [DC] terminal and
connect as shown in the diagram.
2
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set
to “ON”.
Power will be supplied to the camera recorder.
Caution :
0
Do not insert or remove the DC cable during
recording.
0
Do not use power supply of high voltage
fluctuation, containing noise such as ripple, or
with insufficient capacity.
Charging the Built-In Battery
0
The date/time and time code data are stored
using the built-in rechargeable battery.
0
When power is connected to the camera
recorder, the built-in battery always gets
charged. When the power is disconnected, the
battery gradually discharges.
0
The battery will be totally discharged if left
unused for
3 months and the date/time and time
code data will be reset. When this happens, set
the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “ON” to display
the [Initial Setting] screen, then set the date/
time.
(A P39
[Initial Settings] )
36
Power Supply
Preparations
Power Status Display
Viewfinder Screen and LCD Monitor
The power status is displayed on the display and
menu screens.
Display Description
B 7.4V
B 100min
C 30%
4 RES
Currently powered by a battery.
When the battery power runs out,
the battery mark appears hollow,
and “RES” (yellow) is displayed.
Memo :
0
You can set the display using
[LCD/VF] B [Display Type]
B
[Battery].
(A
P128 [ Battery ] )
F
Acquisition of battery information
may fail if a genuine battery is not
used.
T
Appears when an error occurs
during battery charging.
G
Currently powered by an AC
adapter.
P
Q
R
S
Camera recorder battery charging
in progress.
(A
P128
[Details on charging
condition] )
(A P128 [ Battery ] )
Memo :
0
If the
supplied battery (or equivalent battery sold
separately) is not used, the battery mark which
indicates the battery level may not appear.
Display Screen
(A P159 [Display Screen in Camera Mode] )
(
A P165 [Display Screen in Media Mode] )
.
282min
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
4030 20 10 0
Menu Screen
(A P108 [Display and Description of the Menu
Screen] )
.
Display Settings
Warnings by Lamp and Warning Tone
Warning status is indicated by tally lamp and
warning tone.
0
The tally lamp blinks.
0
The warning tone is output from the monitor
speaker or [x] terminal.
Memo :
0
You can specify whether to turn on the warning
tone as
well as setting the volume in [A/V Set] B
[Audio Set] B [Alarm Level].
(A P134
[ Alarm Level ] )
0
In the
event that the battery level runs low while
it is being used, the camera recorder will stop
operating automatically.
Caution :
0
The remaining battery power and time are
displayed as they are from the battery
information.
Accurate
data may not be displayed
depending on the battery condition. Replace the
battery as soon as possible when the remaining
battery power and time are low.
Power Status Display
37
Preparations
Turning On/Off the Power
Turning On the Power
.
1
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set
to “ON”.
The camera recorder starts up in Camera mode
and is ready for shooting.
Memo :
0
The camera recorder always start up in Camera
mode when the [POWER ON/OFF] switch is set to
“ON”. Use the [MODE] button at the side of the
camera recorder to switch mode.
(A P24 [Operation Modes] )
0
The camera recorder behaves as follows when an
AC adapter is connected.
0
If the battery is not fully charged, the battery will
be charged at the same time.
0
Even when a fully charged battery is used,
charge the battery briefly to confirm the
remaining battery power.
(A P35 [Power Supply] )
(A P37 [Power Status Display] )
Turning Off the Power
Sets the camera recorder to the recording standby or
stop mode.
1
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set
to “OFF”.
2
Remove the battery and the power to the [DC]
terminal (when not in use for a long time).
Caution :
0
Do not set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “OFF”
during recording. Check that the operation mode
display is “STBY” or “STOP” before you turn off the
power.
0
If you have mistakenly set the [POWER ON/OFF]
switch to “OFF” during recording, wait for 5
seconds or more before you turn on the power
again.
0
When turning off the power, first set the [POWER
ON/OFF] switch of the camera recorder to “OFF”.
Do not remove the battery or turn off the AC power
while the [POWER ON/OFF] switch is set to “ON”.
38
Turning On/Off the Power
Preparations
Initial Settings
When the
power is first turned on, the Initial Setting
screen for performing the initial settings in the
camera recorder appears.
Set the date/time of the built-in clock in the [Date/
Time] screen.
All operations are disabled until initial settings are
complete.
.
Memo :
0
It
is
recommended to use the AC adapter as the
power supply.
0
Be sure to close the lens cover.
1
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set
to “ON”.
A language selection screen appears.
0
For U models
.
0
For E models
.
Pусский
Español
Italiano
Deutsch
Français
English
Language
Memo :
0
The menus and messages on the screen of the
LCD monitor or viewfinder are displayed in the
selected language.
2
Select a language using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
A self-diagnosis screen appears.
.
3
Ensure that the lens cover is closed, and
press the Set button (R).
0
Self-diagnosis starts.
0
A progress bar appears, and “Complete
Diagnosis” appears when the diagnosis is
complete.
.
Memo :
0
It takes about 6 minutes to complete the
diagnosis. During
the diagnosis, do not operate
or turn off the camera recorder.
Initial Settings
39
Preparations
4
Press the Set button (R) after confirming
the exit screen.
The [Date/Time] screen appears.
0
For U models
.
0
For E models
.
5
Set the time zone and date/time.
A
Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button
(HI) and select the setting item.
B
Change the values with the cross-shaped
button (JK).
6
Press the Set button (R) after setting is
complete.
The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/
time.
Memo :
0
The configured
date/time data can be displayed
on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen and
be recorded to a recording media.
0
The value of the year can be set in the range of
“2000” to “2099”.
0
The configured date/time data is saved in the
built-in battery even if the power is turned off.
Changing the Time after Initial Setting
Setting the Date/Time
(A P148 [ Date/Time ] )
1
Select [System]
B [Date/Time
]
.
The [Date/Time] screen appears.
2
Set the date and time.
A
Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button
(HI) and select the setting item.
B
Change the values with the cross-shaped
button (JK).
3
Press the Set button (R) after setting is
complete.
The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/
time.
Changing the Display Style
You can change the display style of the date/time
on the menu.
Setting the Date Display (Date Style)
(A P
148 [ Date Style ] )
The date display can be changed in
[System] B
[Date Style].
Setting the Time Display (Time Style)
(A P
149 [ Time Style ] )
The time display can be changed in
[System] B
[Time Style].
Date/Time Display in Each Operation
Mode
During Camera mode:
Time of the built-in clock is displayed.
During Media mode:
Shooting date/time of the clip being played back is
displayed.
40
Initial Settings
Preparations
Displays on the LCD
Monitor and Viewfinder
You can display the camera status, recording
media information, zebra pattern, and various
markers in
the video image on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screen during shooting.
Memo :
0
When [A/V Set]
B [Video Set] B [SDI OUT] B
[Character] is set to “On”, the display screen and
menu screen are also displayed in the video
image of the video signal output terminal.
(A
P130 [ Character ] )
Display Screen
Display Screen (VF/LCD) in Camera Mode
(A P159 [Display Screen in Camera Mode] )
0
The display switches with every press of the
[DISPLAY] button.
(Display off B Display on B Display off)
0
Press the [STATUS
] button to switch to the
status screen.
(A P167 [Status Screen] )
.
282min
1
/60
F2. 8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 : 34:56
ISO
102400
00: 00: 00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
4030 20
10
0
Display Off
Display On
Display Screen (VF/LCD) in Media Mode
(A P165 [Display Screen in Media Mode] )
0
This is
the screen display during clip playback in
Media Mode.
0
The display switches with every press of the
[DISPLAY] button.
(Display off B Display on B Display off)
.
Jan 24, 2019
3840x2160
30p 140M
282min
12 : 34: 56
00: 00: 00.00
1000/2000
4030 20 10 0
Display Off
Display On
Displays on the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
41
Preparations
Status Screen
0
This screen allows you to check the current
settings.
0
To display the status screen, press the
[STATUS]
button in the normal screen.
0
Press the
[STATUS] button again to return to the
normal screen.
0
Press the
[MENU/THUMB] button at each status
screen (other than the [Camera] screen) to enter
the setting screen.
0
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to switch
between the screens.
.
USER Switch Set
Streaming
Camera
LCD/VF
Record Format
Audio
Video
Planning Metadata
Network
Connection Setup
* These are screen examples. The contents
displayed
are
different depending on the model
and settings.
Remote Edit Mode Screen
This is a mode for accessing the page for editing
the metadata that is recorded in a clip via a web
browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet
terminal, or PC.
(A P188 [ Clip Metadata ] )
.
Exit
Remote Edit Mode
Warning Display
Warning display is displayed in the display screen
(Camera mode, Media mode).
(A P231 [Error Messages and Actions] )
.
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
4030 20 10 0
Warning Display Area
42
Displays on the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
Preparations
Adjusting the LCD Monitor
and Viewfinder
You can monitor video images on this camera
recorder using the viewfinder, LCD monitor, or
both.
.
DISPLAY
Normal LCD
Inverted
LCD
Displays on the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder Screen (VF)
LCD Monitor Status LCD Display VF Display
LCD closed Normal LCD OFF ON
Inverted LCD ON OFF
LCD opened Normal LCD ON OFF
Inverted LCD ON OFF
Memo :
0
Press and hold the [DISPLAY] button for 2 seconds
to turn ON/OFF the LCD monitor.
0
The function to switch between LCD monitor and
viewfinder displays by pressing the [DISPLAY]
button can be canceled by opening/closing or
rotating the LCD monitor.
Adjusting the LCD Monitor
.
2
1
PEAKINGLCD BRIGHT
3
Tilt 90 degrees downward
Tilt 180 degrees
upward
1
Open the LCD cover.
2
Incline the LCD monitor to a position that
enables easy viewing.
Rotate the LCD monitor to adjust the angle.
0
While the LCD monitor is open, you can
rotate it 180 degrees upward or 90 degrees
downward.
0
Rotating the LCD monitor 180 degrees
upward enables you to see the screen from
the
lens
side. To display the image when it is
viewed from the opposite direction (mirror
image), perform setting as follows.
Set [LCD/VF] B [LCD Mirror] to “Mirror” B Set
button (R)
(A P125 [ LCD Mirror ] )
3
Adjust the brightness, contour, and
contrast of the LCD monitor.
You
can change the angle and brightness of the
LCD monitor
according to your usage condition.
Changing the brightness of the screen will not
affect the recorded images.
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
43
Preparations
Adjusting the Brightness
Use the [LCD BRIGHT +/-] button to adjust the
brightness of the LCD monitor.
0
The [+] button brightens the monitor and the
[-]
button darkens it.
0
Press the
[+]
and [-] buttons simultaneously
to return to standard settings.
0
During adjustment, the brightness level is
displayed on the LCD monitor.
.
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
ISO
102400
B 5600
K
   

Adjusting the Contour
Use the [PEAKING +/-] button to adjust the
contour of the LCD monitor.
(The contour of the viewfinder screen will also
be adjusted.)
0
The [+] button increases contour correction
and the [-]
button decreases contour
correction.
0
Press the
[+]
and [-] buttons simultaneously to
return to standard settings.
0
During adjustment, the contour level is
displayed on the LCD monitor.
.
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
ISO
102400
B 5600
K
   

Adjusting the Contrast
Use the [LCD Contrast] menu to adjust the
contrast of the LCD monitor.
0
Adjust using [LCD/VF
]
B [LCD Contrast].
(A P125 [ LCD Contrast ] )
0
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values:
+10 to -10] (Default value: 0)
Adjusting the Viewfinder
You can change the brightness and peaking of the
viewfinder screen according to your usage
conditions.
Changing the brightness of the screen will not
affect the recorded images.
.
PEAKING
1
2
Caution :
0
A high-definition viewfinder is used on this
camera recorder
in order to provide an accurate
focusing environment. Due to the characteristic
of the display device, colors may appear on the
images when you blink your eyes. This is not a
malfunction. It does not affect the recorded
images, SDI output, or HDMI output.
1
Incline the viewfinder vertically to a
position that enables easy viewing.
2
Turn the visibility adjustment lever to
adjust the visibility.
Turn the visibility adjustment lever to sharpen
the image on the viewfinder screen.
3
Adjust the brightness, contour, and
contrast of the viewfinder screen.
44
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
Preparations
Adjusting the Brightness
Use the [VF Bright] menu to adjust the
brightness of the viewfinder screen.
0
Adjust using [LCD/VF]
B[VF Bright].
(A P125 [ VF Bright ] )
0
Increasing the value increases the
brightness. [Setting Values: +10 to -10]
(Default value: 0)
Adjusting the Contour
Use the [
PEAKING +/-] button to adjust the
contour of the viewfinder screen.
The contour of the LCD monitor will also be
adjusted.
(A P44 [Adjusting the Contour] )
Memo :
0
When [LCD/VF]
B [LCD + VF] is set to “Off”,
operate after switching to the viewfinder display
by pressing the [DISPLAY] button for 2 seconds
or longer.
Adjusting the Contrast
Use the [VF Contrast] menu to adjust the
contrast of the viewfinder screen.
0
Adjust using [LCD/VF] B [VF Contrast].
(
A P125 [ VF Contrast ] )
0
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values:
+10 to -10] (Default value: 0)
Displaying in Black and White
You can display the viewfinder screen in black
and white.
0
[LCD/VF] B [VF Color] item B
Press Set
button (R) B “Off” Select B Press Set button
(R).
(A P
125 [ VF Color ] )
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
45
Preparations
Assignment of Functions
to User Buttons
You can assign functions to the following buttons
and use them as user buttons.
By assigning
functions to the buttons, the usability
of the camera recorder can be enhanced.
Perform settings in the menu items corresponding
to each button.
Button Menu Item
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] Button USER1
[OIS/2] Button USER2
[ONLINE/3] Button USER3
[AE LOCK/4] Button USER4
[ZEBRA/5] Button USER5
[MARKER/6] Button USER6
[USER7] Button USER7
[USER8] Button USER8
[EXP.FOCUS/9] Button USER9
Front Cross-Shaped Button
([J])
USER10 ▲
Front Cross-Shaped Button
([K])
USER11 ▼
Front Cross-Shaped Button
([H])
USER12 ◀
Front Cross-Shaped Button
([I])
USER13 ▶
.
USER7 USER8
ONLINE/3
OIS/2
FOCUS ASSIST/1
EXP.FOCUS/9
AE LOCK/4
ZEBRA/5
MARKER/6
1
Assign functions to the buttons from the
menu.
Configure each item to the user buttons in
[Camera Function] B [User Switch Set].
(A P
116 [User Switch Set Item] )
Memo :
0
Operations of the user buttons are interlocked
with the menu settings.
0
When the menu screen is displayed, these
buttons function
as the menu operation buttons.
(A P107 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
46
Assignment of Functions to User Buttons
Preparations
Tally Lamp and LED
This is the indicator lamp for recording, warning
and network.
The operation changes according to the menu
settings.
*
Set using
[System] B [Tally Lamp]/[NETWORK
LED]/[STATUS LED].
(A P147 [ Tally Lamp ] )
(A P148 [ NETWORK LED ] )
(A P148 [ STATUS LED ] )
.
NETWORK LED
STATUS LED
Tally lamp
0
Tally Lamp Behavior
[Tally Lamp] Setting
Rec/Live
Streaming
Live
Streaming
Rec
External
Off
Camera
Recorder
Status
Warning
J
-
Alarm
o
-
Recording
R
-
R
- -
During live
streaming
R
- - -
Input from
Remote
Control Unit
PROGRAM - - -
R
-
PREVIEW - - -
R
-
0
NETWORK LED Behavior
[NETWORK LED] Setting
On Off
Activating
o
(Green)
-
Warning
J
(Red)
-
During live streaming
R
(Red)
-
Waiting for live streaming
connection
R
(Orange)
-
Error during live streaming
R
(Orange)
-
0
STATUS LED Behavior
[STATUS LED] Setting
REC/
Pre Rec
External
Return
over IP
Off
Activating
o
(Green)
-
Warning
J
(Red)
-
On Pre Rec standby
R
(Green)
- - -
Recording
R
(Red)
- - -
Remaining space in media
running low
(Only during recording)
R
(Orange)
- - -
Input from
Remote
Control Unit
PROGRAM -
R
(Red)
- -
PREVIEW -
R
(Green)
- -
Return over IP in Progress - -
R
(Green)
-
Error during Return over IP - -
R
(Orange)
-
R
:
Lights up
J
:
Flashes rapidly
o
:
Blinks slowly
Tally Lamp and LED
47
Preparations
Recording Media
This camera
recorder saves recorded audio sound
and videos except those in “4K EXT (SSD)” quality
to the SD card (sold separately) in the card slot.
Audio sound and videos in “4K EXT (SSD)” will be
recorded to the SSD media (sold separately) in the
KA-MC100 SSD Media Adapter (sold separately)
that is inserted into the [EXT.SLOT].
Usable Cards
Format Setting and Usable SD Card
Combinations
System
Format Bit Rate
Usable SD
Card
High-
Speed
QuickTime
(H.264)
70M (XHQ),
50M (XHQ),
50M (XHQ),
35M (UHQ)
UHS-I U3 or
higher
4K
150M,
150M
70M
UHS-I U1 or
higher, or Class
10 or higher
HD
70M (XHQ),
50M (XHQ),
50M (XHQ)
35M (UHQ)
UHS-I U1 or
higher, or Class
6 or higher
QuickTime
(MPEG2),
MXF (MPEG2)
A
35M (HQ), 25M
(SP)
Exchange
(U model)
12M (LP),
8M (LP)
MP4
(H.264)
(E model)
12M (LP),
8M (LP)
SD - -
UHS-I U1 or
higher, or Class
4 or higher
Web
- -
Caution :
0
Using cards other than those from Panasonic,
TOSHIBA or SanDisk may result in recording
failure or data loss.
Usable SSD Media
Refer to the “Instruction Manual
of the SSD Media
Adapter that is inserted into [EXT.SLOT] for steps
to mount the SSD media.
Caution :
0
Please refer to the product information page on
our website for a list of SSD media that have
been tested for compatibility.
Estimated Recordable Time of SD Cards
The estimated recordable time is only a guide.
Differences may occur depending on the SD card
in use and the battery condition.
0
The recordable time varies according to the
settings in [System], [WFormat], [WResolution],
[WBit Rate] and [YResolution].
(A P150 [WResolution/ G
Resolution] )
(A P151 [WBit Rate/ GBit Rate] )
(A P152 [ Y Resolution ] )
System 4K
Format QuickTime (H.264)
Resolution 3840x2160
Bit Rate
150M
150M 70M
8 GB 6 6 13
16 GB 12 12 26
32 GB 25 25 53
64 GB* 50 50 106
128 GB* 100 100 212
256 GB* 199 200 424
512 GB* 399 401 848
* SDXC (Unit: minute)
System
HD,
HD+Web (HD)
SD,
HD
+Web
(Web)
HD+Web
(Web)
Format QuickTime (H.264)
Resolution
1920x
1080
1920x1080,
1280x720
720x
480,
720x
576
960x
540
480x
270
Bit Rate
XHQ
(70M)
XHQ
(50M)
UHQ HQ HQ LP
8 GB 13 18 25 96 274 588
16 GB 26 36 51 194 556 1190
32 GB 52 73 103 391 1119 2396
64 GB* 105 147 207 785 2243 4804
128 GB* 210 295 415 1572 4495 9626
256 GB* 420 590 832 3147 8998 19270
512 GB* 839 1180 1664 6297 18004 38557
* SDXC (Unit: minute)
48
Recording Media
Preparations
System HD
Format
QuickTime
(MPEG2)
A
,
MXF
(MPEG2)
A
Exchange,
MP4 (H.264)
Resolution
1920x1080,
1440x1080,
1280x720
1440x1080 1920x1080
1280x720
Bit Rate HQ SP LP (12M) LP (8M)
8 GB 25 35 68 97
16 GB 51 70 139 197
32 GB 103 141 279 396
64 GB* 206 283 580 794
128 GB* 412 566 1121 1592
256 GB* 825 1133 2245 3186
512 GB* 1651 2267 4482 6376
* SDXC (Unit: minute)
Memo :
0
If the
SD card contains files recorded by devices
other than this camera recorder or files that are
saved from a PC, the recordable time may be
shorter or data may not be properly recorded.
0
For each file format, up to 600 clips can be
recorded to one SD card on this camera
recorder. When 600 clips are recorded to one
card, the remaining space is displayed as 0 min
regardless of the estimated recordable time,
and no further recording can be performed.
0
When [System] is configured to “High-Speed”,
the remaining time display for recording to the
SD card will run out faster than usual.
Write-Protect Switch on the SD Card
A
Slide the write-protect switch upward to enable
writing or deleting.
B
Slide the write-protect switch downward to
prevent writing or deleting. (Images in the card
are protected.)
.
AB
Write/Delete Enabled Write/Delete Disabled
Write-Protect Switch
Estimated Recordable Time of SSD
Media
The estimated recordable time is only a guide.
Differences may occur depending on the SSD
media in use and condition of the battery.
0
The recordable time varies according to the
settings in [System]
, [GFrame Rate], and
[GBit Rate].
System 4K EXT (SSD)
Format ProRes
Resolution 3840x2160
Frame Rate 60p 50p
Bit Rate
422HQ
422 422LT
422HQ
422 422LT
500 GB 34 50 72 40 60 86
1 TB 67 101 144 80 121 173
2 TB 134 201 289 161 241 346
Frame Rate 30p 25p
Bit Rate 422HQ 422 422LT 422HQ 422 422LT
500 GB 67 100 144 80 120 172
1TB 134 201 288 161 240 345
2TB 268 402 576 321 481 690
Frame Rate 24p
Bit Rate 422HQ 422 422LT
500 GB 84 125 180
1 TB 167 251 359
2 TB 335 502 719
(Unit: minute)
Memo :
0
The maximum
continuous recording time of “4K
EXT (SSD)” is 4 hours. Recording stops upon
exceeding 4 hours.
Recording Media
49
Preparations
Inserting an SD Card
This camera recorder comes with two card slots
(Slot A and B) for video/audio recording and
playback.
.
1
Open the SD card cover.
2
Insert an SD card into the slot with the
notched corner of the card on the right.
The status indicator of the card slot to which the
card was inserted lights up in red.
3
Close the SD card cover.
Card Slot Status Indicator
The following table shows the respective states of
slot A and B.
Lamp Slot Status
Lights up in
red
The inserted SD card is being
accessed. (writing/reading data)
Do not turn off the power of the
camera
recorder
or remove the SD
card.
Lights up in
green
On standby. The inserted SD card
can be used for recording or
playback.
Light goes out
0
SD card is not inserted.
0
An unusable card is inserted.
0
An SD card is inserted but a
different slot is selected.
Removing the SD Card
1
Check that the SD card to be removed is not
being accessed (status indicator of the
card slot lights up in red).
2
Open the SD card cover.
3
Push the SD card and remove it from the
slot.
4
Close the SD card cover.
Memo :
0
When both slots are inserted with usable SD
cards, the previously selected slot is used.
Caution :
0
Data may be lost if you turn off the power of the
camera recorder
or remove the SD card when it
is being accessed. All data recorded on the
card, including the file that is being accessed,
may be corrupted. Be sure to check whether the
status indicator is lit in green or turned off before
you turn off the power or remove the SD card.
0
If you mistakenly remove the card when it is
being accessed, reinsert the card only after the
status indicator goes off.
0
The SD card may not be recognized if you insert
and remove the card within a short time. When
this happens, remove the card and wait for a few
seconds before you reinsert.
50
Recording Media
Preparations
Switching the SD cards
When both card slots are inserted with SD cards,
you can use the [
SLOT SEL] button to switch the
card to use.
When the memory on an SD card is full during
recording, data recording automatically switches to
the other card.
Memo :
0
The [SLOT SEL
] button is disabled during
recording or playback. Cards will not be
switched even if you press the button.
Inserting the SSD Media Adapter
This camera recorder comes with an [EXT.SLOT]
for recording and playing audio sound and videos
in “4K EXT (SSD)” quality.
.
1
Turn off the camera recorder.
2
Detaching the Battery
3
Open the EXT.SLOT cover.
4
With the USB terminal of the SSD Media
Adapter facing down, insert it into
[EXT.SLOT].
Insert it all the way until the tab locks into place.
5
Close the EXT.SLOT cover.
6
Attach the battery.
7
Turn on the camera recorder.
Formatting (Initializing) of Recording
Media
When any of the following recording media (SD
card or SSD media) is inserted, [!FORMAT]
appears in the remaining level display area.
Format the card using the camera recorder menu.
0
Unformatted recording media
0
Recording media formatted under different
specifications
*
For details of the menu operation, refer to
“[Basic Operations in Menu Screen]
(A P 107)”.
Caution :
0
Be sure to format the recording media on this
camera recorder. Recording media formatted
on a PC or other peripheral equipment cannot
be used on this camera recorder.
0
[!RESTORE
] appears in the remaining level
display area when a recording media that
requires repair is inserted.
1
Select [System] B [Media] B [Format
Media]
.
(
A P
147 [ Format Media ] )
2
Select the slot of the card to be formatted
and press the Set button (R
).
.
2
3
The status of the selected recording media
is displayed.
4
Select [Format] and press the Set button
(R).
.
4
Set
Cancel
Format
Format Media
Recording Media
51
Preparations
5
Formatting starts.
.
Formatting...
6
Formatting is complete.
When formatting is complete, “Complete”
appears
and the camera recorder returns to the [Format
Media] screen.
Memo :
0
The menu cannot be operated while formatting
is in progress, but recording is possible to the
slot where formatting is not executed.
0
Formatting cannot
be performed in the following
cases.
0
When recording to the recording media to be
formatted is in progress.
0
SD card is not inserted.
0
Write-protect switch of the SD card is set (z
is displayed).
Caution :
0
If you format a recording media, all data
recorded to it, including video data and setup
files, will be deleted.
Repairing the Recording Media
It is necessary to restore the recording media if an
abnormality occurs to the data in the recording
media due to some reasons.
Memo :
0
[!RESTORE] appears in the remaining level
display area when a recording media that
requires repair is inserted.
1
Select [System] B [Media] B [Restore
Media].
(A P
147 [ Restore Media ] )
2
Select the recording media to be restored
and press the Set button (R
).
.
2
3
Restoring starts.
.
Restoring...
4
Restoring is complete.
0
When restoring is complete, “Complete”
appears
and the camera recorder returns to the
[Restore Media] screen.
0
When no media that requires restoring is
inserted, the camera recorder returns to the
[
Media
] menu screen.
Caution :
0
[Restore Media] can only be selected in Camera
mode. However, it cannot be selected while the
camera recorder is recording. Select [Restore
Media] in Camera mode when the camera
recorder is not recording.
0
[Restore
Media]
does not restore the SD card to
its original states completely. If restoring fails,
replace or format the recording media. Take
note that formatting erases all the information
inside the SD card.
0
Restoring cannot be performed in the following
cases.
0
Camera recorder is recording in progress.
0
SD card is not inserted.
0
Write-protect switch of the SD card is set (z
is displayed).
52
Recording Media
Preparations
Clips Recorded to Recording Media
Folders Created in the Recording Media
The captured image is recorded into different
folders according to the [Format] settings.
0
Other than MXF (MPEG2): [DCIM]
0
MXF (MPEG2):
[PRIVATE]
A
Memo :
0
By formatting (initializing) the recording media
from the [Format Media
] menu on the camera
recorder, folders required for recording in the
current [System] settings will be generated.
0
When the [System
]
settings and [WFormat]/
[YFormat] settings are changed, folders
required for recording in those settings will be
automatically generated.
Caution :
0
When a
clip inside the folder is moved or deleted
using the Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Mac),
recording to the recording media may fail if
formatting (initializing) of the media is not
performed.
Clip (Recorded Data) and Clip Name
0
When recording is stopped, the images, audio
and accompanying data which are recorded
from start to stop are recorded as one “clip” on
the recording media.
0
An 8-character clip name is automatically
generated for the recorded clip.
(“Clip Name Prefix”
+ “Clip Number”)
Example: QuickTime
.
ABCG0001
This is set to “xxxG” (“xxx” denotes the last 3
digits of the serial number) by default.
Clip Name Prefix (any four alphanumeric characters)
The Clip Number can be reset in
the menu.*
A number in automatic
ascending order is assigned in
the recording order.
Clip Number
* [Clip Set] B [Reset Clip Number]
(A P154 [ Reset Clip Number ] )
Memo :
0
Before recording starts, you can set any
characters for the clip name prefix by using
[System] B [Record Set] B [Clip Set] B [Clip
Name Prefix].
(A P
154 [ Clip Name Prefix ] )
0
Changes cannot be made after recording.
Recorded Clips
0
The recorded
materials may be split into several
files but they can be played back continuously
on the camera recorder.
0
Clips may be recorded across the two SD cards
in card slots A and B depending on the recording
time of the clip.
Caution :
0
A clip
recorded across several SD cards cannot
be played back continuously. Continuous
playback is only possible when the recording is
made on one card.
Recording Media
53
Preparations
About the Operation Lock
Feature (KEYLOCK)
You can use this feature to prevent erroneous
camera operation.
.
1
Set the [KEYLOCK] switch to “ON”.
0
The operation
lock turns on, and an operation
lock icon (r) appears on the display
screen.
0
The operation lock function is turned off when
the [KEYLOCK] switch is set to “OFF”.
Memo :
0
The operation lock feature is only valid in the
Camera mode.
(A P24 [Operation Modes] )
0
The following remote operations are possible
even when the operation lock feature is turned
on (“On”).
0
Remote operation from the wired remote
control connected
to the [REMOTE] terminal.
0
Remote operation of the camera through
access via a browser on devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
Operation lock does not apply to the following
buttons and switches.
0
[POWER ON/OFF]
switch
0
[ND FILTER
] switch
0
[TC IN/OUT]
switch
0
Focus Ring
0
Zoom Ring
0
Iris Ring
0
Zoom Lever at the Grip
0
Zoom Lever on Handle
0
[FIX/VAR/OFF] switch
Memo :
0
Operation lock
does not apply to the REC button
if “Keylock Except Rec” is selected in [Camera
Function] B [KEYLOCK].
(A P113
[ KEYLOCK ] )
54
About the Operation Lock Feature (KEYLOCK)
Preparations
Basic Shooting
Procedures
Setting up
.
2
1
3
2
4
4
1
Supply battery or AC adapter power to the
camera recorder.
(A P
35 [Power Supply] )
2
Insert the recording media
(
A P48 [Recording Media] )
3
Turn on the power of the camera recorder.
Setting the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “ON”
starts up the camera recorder in the Camera
mode to enable shooting.
4
Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor and
viewfinder.
(A P43 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
5
Set [System]
, [Format], [Resolution],
[Frame Rate] and [
Bit Rate] in [System] B
[Record Set] B [Record Format].
0
You can select the definition of the recorded
videos, file format for recording/playback,
and the video recording format on this
camera recorder.
0
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button to display
the menu screen on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder.
Shooting
1
Configure the video and audio input
settings.
You have to configure video settings such as
brightness adjustment (iris, gain, shutter) and
white balance adjustment in order to start
shooting. You also have to adjust the audio
input settings and audio recording level for
audio recording.
0
Adjusting the Brightness
(A P64 [Adjusting the Brightness] )
0
Adjusting the White Balance
(
A P69 [Adjusting the White Balance] )
0
Adjusting Audio Input Settings and
Recording Level
(A P74 [Audio Recording] )
2
Press the [REC] button
to start recording to
the recording media
The tally lamp lights up in red during recording.
0
Zoom Operation
(A P59 [Zoom Operation] )
0
Adjusting the Focus
(
A P60 [Focus Operation] )
Memo :
0
If both SD card slots A and B are loaded with
recordable SD
cards in the factory default state,
pressing the [REC] button starts recording only
to the media in the selected slot.
Configuring [System] B [Record Set] B [Slot
Mode] to “Dual” enables recording to be
performed simultaneously to the SD cards in
both slots A and B.
(A P
88 [Dual Rec] )
0
The tally lamp can be turned off in [
System] B
[Tally Lamp].
3
Check the most recently captured images.
0
Press the user button that is assigned with
the Clip Review function. Doing so activates
the function
and plays back the most recently
captured images on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screen.
0
After playback, the camera recorder returns
to standby mode (STBY).
(A P86 [Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately (Clip Review)] )
Basic Shooting Procedures
55
Shooting
Selecting System
Definition, File
Format and
Video Format
You can select the definition of the recorded
videos, file format for recording/playback, and the
video recording format on this camera recorder.
Setting the Record Format Menu
1
Set [System], [Format], [Resolution],
[Frame Rate]
and [Bit Rate] in [System] B
[Record Set] B [Record Format].
2
Set each of the items.
A
[Selecting a System Definition] (A P 56)
B
[Selecting a File Format] (
A P 56)
C
[Selecting a Video Format] (A P 57)
D
[Selecting the Aspect Ratio of SD Videos]
(A P 58)
3
After setting is complete for all items, press
the
[
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
0
The recording format is switched.
0
A “Please Wait...” message appears on the
screen during switching.
Selecting a System Definition
The following definitions are available for selection.
0
4K EXT:
Records in 4K resolution (3840x2160)
0
4K:
Records in 4K resolution (3840x2160)
0
HD:
Records in HD (High Definition) resolution
(1920x1080, 1440x1080 or 1280x720)
0
SD:
Records in SD (Standard Definition) resolution
(720x480 or 720x576)
0
Web:
Records in resolution (960x540, 720x480,
720x576, or 480x270) suitable for web
distribution
0
High-Speed:
Records in HD resolution (1920×1080)
You can select a definition for the recorded images
from the following items under
[
System].
0
4K EXT (SSD):
Performs 4K EXT recording in EXT.SLOT.
0
4K:
Records in 4K quality for both slots A and B.
0
HD:
Records in HD quality for both slots A and B.
0
SD:
Records in SD quality for both slots A and B.
0
HD+Web:
Records in
HD quality for slot A, and Web quality
for slot B.
(A P87 [Recording Simultaneously at Two
Different Definitions] )
0
High-Speed:
Records in HD quality for both slots A and B.
Selecting a File Format
Select a file format in [WFormat]/[YFormat].
The following file formats are available for
selection.
0
QuickTime (MPEG2):
QuickTime file format (.MOV)
0
MXF (MPEG2):
MXF file format
0
QuickTime (H.264):
QuickTime file format (.MOV)
0
Exchange: (U model only)
Sports Video Interop Group format (.MP4)
0
MP4 (H.264): (E model only)
MP4 file format
Memo :
0
When [System] is set to “4K EXT (SSD)
”, this
item is fixed at “ProRes”.
0
Exchange (U model) and MP4 (E model) are
selectable only when
[
System] is configured to
“HD”.
0
When
Exchange
(U model) or MP4 (E model) is
selected, backup recording and clip cutter
function cannot be used.
56
Selecting System Definition, File Format and Video Format
Shooting
Selecting a Video Format
The selectable [Frame Rate]/[Bit Rate] changes
according to the settings of [System]/[Format]/
[Resolution].
List of Formats
The following is a list of file formats and video
formats that can be selected on this camera
recorder.
o
When [System] is set to
“4K EXT (SSD)
Record Format
G
Format
G
Resolution
G
Frame
Rate
G
Bit Rate
ProRes 3840x2160 60p, 50p,
30p, 25p,
24p
422HQ,
422,
422LT
Memo :
0
[Rec Mode] is fixed at “Normal”.
0
[Slot Mode] is fixed at
“----”.
0
The following
functions cannot be used when 4K
EXT (SSD) is selected.
View Remote, Live Streaming, Return over IP or
Overlay Function
o
When [System] is set to “4K”
Record Format
W
Format
W
Resolution
W
Frame
Rate
W
Bit Rate
QuickTime
(H.264)
3840x2160 30p,
25p,
24p
150M,
150M, 70M
Memo :
0
The following
functions cannot be used when 4K
is selected.
View Remote, Live Streaming, Return over IP or
Overlay Function
0
Each item for slot B is fixed at the same setting
as slot A.
o
When
[
System] is set to “HD” or “HD+Web”, the
options for slot A are:
Record Format
W
Format
W
Resolution
W
Frame
Rate
W
Bit Rate
QuickTime
(MPEG2),
MXF
(MPEG2)
A
1920x1080 60i, 50i,
30p, 25p
35M (HQ)
1440x1080 60i, 50i 35M (HQ),
25M (SP)
1280x720 60p, 50p 35M (HQ)
QuickTime
(H.264)
1920x1080 60p, 50p
70M (XHQ),
50M (XHQ),
50M (XHQ)
60i, 50i,
30p, 25p,
24p
50M (XHQ),
50M (XHQ),
35M (UHQ)
1280x720 60p, 50p
50M (XHQ),
35M (UHQ)
Exchange
(U model)
1920x1080 60p 12M (LP)
1280x720 8M (LP)
MP4
(H.264)
(E model)
1920x1080 50p 12M (LP)
1280x720 8M (LP)
Memo :
0
When [System]
is set to “HD”, each item for slot
B is fixed at the same setting as slot A.
0
When [System] is set to “HD+Web”, [Format]
is
fixed at “QuickTime(H.264)”.
0
When
[
WFormat] is configured to “Exchange” or
“MP4(H.264)”, selection is possible only when
[System] is configured to “HD”.
0
The following functions cannot be used when
HD+Web is selected.
View
Remote,
Live Streaming or Return over IP
Selecting System Definition, File Format and Video Format
57
Shooting
o
When [System] is set to “High-Speed”
Record Format
W
Format
W
Resolution
W
Frame
Rate
W
Bit Rate
QuickTime
(H.264)
1920x1080 120/60p,
100/50p
70M (XHQ),
50M (XHQ),
50M (XHQ)
120/30p,
100/25p,
120/24p
50M (XHQ),
50M (XHQ),
35M (UHQ)
Memo :
0
[Rec Mode] is fixed at “Normal”.
0
[Slot Mode] is fixed at
“Series”.
0
The following functions cannot be used when
High-Speed is selected.
View Remote, Live Streaming, Return over IP,
Upload of recorded clip, time stamp recording,
Face Detection or Overlay Function
0
The settings for slot B are fixed at the same as
slot A.
0
Only “Rec Run” and “Regen” are the only TC
generator settings available.
0
It is not possible to set a shutter speed that is
slower than the frame rate.
0
The angle of view shifts to telephoto.
(35 mm conversion:
[Normal
] 28.0 mm to 560.0
mm B [High-Speed] 56.1 mm to 1122 mm)
0
The sensitivity of high speed shooting is lower
than normal shooting. In order to capture more
beautiful images, it is recommended to perform
shooting in a lighted environment.
0
The remaining space on the media (recordable
time
to
the recording media) runs out faster than
usual.
(Example: For 120/60p, as the recording speed
is twice as fast as usual, the remaining space on
the media is reduced by approximately double
the speed.)
o
When [System] is set to “SD”
Record Format
W
Format
W
Resolution
W
Frame
Rate
W
Bit Rate
QuickTime
(H.264)
720x480 60i
(U model)
8M (HQ)
720x576 50i
(E model)
Memo :
0
The following
function cannot be used when SD
is selected.
Overlay Function
0
Each item for slot B is fixed at the same setting
as slot A.
o
When [System
] is set to “HD+Web”, the options
for slot B are:
Record Format
Y
Format
Y
Resolution
Y
Frame
Rate
Y
Bit Rate
QuickTime
(H.264)
960x540 30p, 25p, 24p 3M (HQ)
720x480 60i
8M (HQ)
720x576 50i
480x270 30p, 25p, 24p 1.2M (LP)
Memo :
0
The following functions cannot be used when
HD+Web is selected.
View Remote,
Live Streaming or Return over IP
Selecting the Aspect Ratio of SD Videos
For setting the aspect ratio of the SD recording
image when [
System] is set to “SD”.
You can select “16:9” or “4:3”.
(A P152 [ SD Aspect ] )
Memo :
0
For conditions
other than those above, this item
is fixed at “16:9”.
58
Selecting System Definition, File Format and Video Format
Shooting
Zoom Operation
Adjusts the angle of view.
Optical zoom ratio: 1x to 20x
Dynamic zoom ratio: 1x to 40x
Set using
[Camera Function] B [Zoom] B [Dynamic
Zoom].
(A P113 [ Dynamic Zoom ] )
Zooming can be operated using the following.
0
Zoom Lever at the Grip
0
Zoom Lever on Handle
0
Zoom Ring at the Lens Section
During the zoom operation, the zoom bar or
number will
appear on the upper right corner of the
screen.
(A P162 [Zoom Display] )
Caution :
0
Depending on the zoom speed, the zoom drive
noise of the power zoom may be recorded.
Using the Zoom Lever at the Grip
1
Press the zoom lever to zoom.
0
The zoom speed changes according to the
extent the zoom lever is being pushed.
0
Zooms into wide angle and increases the
angle of view when “W”
is pressed.
0
Zooms into telephoto and decreases the
angle of view when “T
” is pressed.
Using the Zoom Lever at the Handle
1
Set the [FIX/VAR/OFF] zoom speed switch
to “FIX” or
“VAR”.
Memo :
0
Setting to “FIX” will allow the zoom operation to
move at
the speed set in [Handle Zoom Speed].
0
Set the zoom speed using
[
Camera
Function] B [Zoom] B [Handle Zoom Speed].
(A
P113 [ Handle Zoom Speed ] )
2
Press the zoom lever at the handle to zoom.
Memo :
0
When the
[FIX/VAR/OFF] zoom speed switch is
set to “OFF”, the zoom lever at the handle
section cannot be used.
Using Zoom Ring at the Lens Section
You can adjust the preferred angle of view by
turning the zoom ring.
Saving/Recalling Current Zoom
Position (Preset Zoom)
This allows you to register up to three zoom
positions.
1
Assign the “Preset Zoom1”, “Preset
Zoom2”,
or
“Preset Zoom3” function to any
of the user buttons.
(A P
46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
(
A P116 [USER1 to USER9, USER10 ▲,
USER11 ▼, USER12 ◀, USER13 ▶] )
2
Save the current zoom position.
0
Press any of the user buttons assigned with
the “Preset Zoom1”, “Preset Zoom2
”, or
“Preset Zoom3” function for more than 1
second.
0
The current zoom position will be stored.
3
Recall the stored zoom position.
0
Press any of the user buttons assigned with
the “Preset Zoom1”, “Preset Zoom2
”, or
“Preset Zoom3” function and release within 1
second.
0
The camera recorder zooms to the stored
zoom position.
Memo :
0
Set the speed for shifting to the preset zoom
position and the rate of change for starting and
stopping the preset zoom operation in [
Camera
Function] B [Zoom] B [Preset Zoom] B [Speed]/
[Ease In]/[Ease Out].
(A
P114 [ Preset Zoom ] )
0
Operating other zoom maneuvers during a
zoom position recall will cancel the recall.
Zoom Operation
59
Shooting
Focus Operation
Adjusting Focus Automatically
1
Set the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU] switch to
“AUTO”.
The auto focus icon e
appears on the screen.
Memo :
0
When [Camera Function]
B [Focus] B [AF
Assist] is configured to “Direction”, it is possible
to move the auto focus point by turning the focus
ring.
(A P
114 [ AF Assist ] )
0
The AF area can be configured in [Camera
Function
] B [Focus] B [AF Area]. Selecting
“Multi” displays a “Multi” icon, while selecting
“Wide” shows a “Wide” icon.
(A P
114 [ AF Area ] )
One Push Auto Focus
While in the Manual Focus mode, pressing the
[PUSH AUTO] button (within 1 minute) makes the
camera recorder focus on the center of the frame
automatically.
Memo :
0
Face detection does not work during One Push
Auto Focus.
0
AF Assist does not function.
0
When the operation is complete, the camera
recorder returns to the Manual Focus mode
automatically.
0
One Push Auto Focus functions with emphasis
on the focusing speed. This function is not
suitable during recording.
Setting to Auto Focus Temporarily
(Push Auto Focus)
0
The camera recorder will shift to Auto Focus
mode temporarily and automatically adjusts
focus
when
the [PUSH AUTO] button is pressed
during shooting in Manual Focus mode.
0
Release the [PUSH AUTO
] button to return to
Manual Focus mode.
Memo :
0
Face detection
does not work during Push Auto
Focus.
Locking the Focus
While in
the Auto Focus mode, pressing the [PUSH
LOCK] button locks the focus on the corresponding
point.
An
icon appears when the focus is locked.
Memo :
0
Performing any focusing operation when the
focus is locked disengages the focus lock.
Adjusting Focus Manually
1
Set the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU] switch to
“MANU”.
The manual focus icon d appears on the
screen.
.
12 :34 :56
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
   
2
Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.
Memo :
0
Using the Focus Assist or Expanded Focus
function makes it easier to focus.
(A P61
[Focus Assist Function] )
(
A P62 [Expanded Focus Function] )
0
Pressing the [PUSH AUTO] button in the Manual
Focus mode activates the One-push Auto Focus
mode, while holding down the [PUSH AUTO]
button activates the Push Auto Focus mode.
(A
P60 [One Push Auto Focus] )
(
A P60 [Setting to Auto Focus Temporarily
(Push Auto Focus)] )
60
Focus Operation
Shooting
AF Assist Function
Configure this function to move the auto focus point
closer to
or away from the camera or to activate MF
temporarily by turning the focus ring.
0
Set [Camera Function] B [Focus] B [AF Assist].
0
Direction:
This option allows you to shift the auto focus
point to
near and far directions by turning the
focus ring during AF.
Focus is automatically adjusted to a focus
point near the position where the focus ring
stops turning.
0
Manual:
Temporarily activates MF when the focus ring
is turned during AF. The camera recorder
returns to the AF mode when the focus ring is
not operated for a some time.
MF Assist Function
This function activates AF operation for a short
interval when the focus ring is turned during MF.
0
Set [Camera Function] B
[Focus] B [MF Assist].
0
On:
Turning the
focus ring during MF activates AF
for a short interval after the operation, after
which the camera recorder returns to the MF
mode.
Focus Assist Function
0
When the
[F.ASSIST/1] button is pressed during
shooting, the focused area is displayed in color.
This enables easy and accurate focusing.
0
Select the
color (blue, red or green) in the menu.
Memo :
0
When [LCD/VF]
B [Shooting Assist] B [Focus
Assist] B [Type] is set to “ACCU-Focus”, the
depth of field becomes shallower to enable
easier focusing.
(A P126
[ Focus Assist ] )
0
The “ACCU-Focus
” function switches
automatically to “Off” after about 10 seconds.
0
Select
the
display color in [LCD/VF] B [Shooting
Assist] B [Focus Assist]B[Color].
(A
P126 [ Color ] )
0
If you use the zebra function and the Focus
Assist function at the same time, it may be
difficult to see the effect of the Focus Assist. In
this case, turn off the zebra function.
Setting Focus Assist Function to a User Button
You can assign the “Focus Assist
function to a user
button.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
Focus Assist + Function
0
You can operate the Focus Assist and
Expanded Focus functions simultaneously by
pressing the user button assigned with “Focus
Assist +”.
Memo :
0
“Expanded Focus” is displayed during the
“Focus Assist +
” operation regardless of the
setting in [Camera Function] B [User Switch
Set] B [Expanded Focus].
Focus Operation
61
Shooting
Expanded Focus Function
You can magnify the preferred area by pressing the
[EXP.FOCUS/9] button; doing so enables precise
focus to be established easily.
* You can also use the user button assigned with
the “Expanded Focus
” function instead of the
[EXP.FOCUS/9] button.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
(A P116 [USER1 to USER9, USER10 ▲,
USER11 ▼, USER12 ◀, USER13 ▶] )
1
Press the [EXP.FOCUS/9] button.
0
The center
area of the screen is enlarged for
the first time.
0
For subsequent operation of the button, the
area at which the operation was last
performed will be enlarged.
.
2
Use the cross-shaped button (JKH I) to
magnify the preferred area.
0
The portion that is being magnified is
displayed at the lower right corner of the
screen.
3
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel the
setting.
Memo :
0
The display
of the enlarged screen is dot by dot
equivalent.
0
To set the operation when the button is pressed,
go to [Camera Function] B [User Switch Set] B
[Expanded Focus].
(A P
117 [ Expanded Focus ] )
0
Pressing and holding the Set button (
R) resets
the position of magnification.
0
This function can be used together with the
Focus Assist function.
0
Magnifying an image does not alter the size of
the recorded image.
0
The cross-shaped button cannot be used as
user button while the area is being magnified.
0
This function is unavailable when [System] B
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [System] is
set to “SD”.
0
When the display screen is turned off, the
magnified
area at the bottom right of the screen
will not be displayed.
Adjusting the Focusing by
Face Detection
This function detects human faces and
automatically adjusts focus during Auto Focus.
It can also track moving objects.
When several faces are detected, you can select
one to focus on.
Memo :
0
This function can also adjust the brightness
automatically according
to the brightness of the
face detected.
(A P115 [Face Detection Function Settings] )
.
62
Focus Operation
Shooting
1
Assign the “Face Detection
function to any
of the user buttons.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
2
Focus
the camera recorder on a person and
press the
user button that is assigned with
“Face Detection”.
0
When Face detection is enabled, the face
detection icon (q) appears.
0
An orange frame will appear on the face of
the person nearest to the center of the
screen. Blue
frames will appear on the faces
of others.
0
Focus will be automatically adjusted for the
selected person.
Memo :
0
When the button assigned with “Face Only AF”
or the [
Camera Function] B [Face Detection] B
[Face Only AF] item is configured to “On”,
“ONLY” appears to the right of the face detection
icon, and auto focus functions only when a face
is detected. When a face cannot be detected,
the camera recorder switches manual focusing.
.
Detection Frame (Orange)
Memo :
0
If the detection frame does not appear, make
sure that Auto Focus mode is selected. Also, if
[Face Detection] is set to “AF&AE
”, set at least
one of the iris, gain, and electronic shutter
control items to the automatic adjustment mode.
(A P64 [Adjusting the Brightness
Automatically:
Automatic Brightness Adjustment
(AE) Mode] )
(A P65 [Auto Iris (Automatic Adjustment)
Mode] )
(A P66 [Automatic Gain Mode (Automatic
Gain Adjustment)] )
(A P67 [Automatic Shutter Mode (Automatic
Shutter Adjustment)] )
Selecting Specific Person from Several
Persons
1
Hold down the user button that is assigned
with
“Face Detection
”.
0
The camera
recorder will enter face selection
mode and the face detection icon (q) will
blink.
0
An orange frame will appear on the face of
the person nearest to the center of the
screen. Blue frames will appear on the faces
of others.
.
Detection Frame (Blue)
Detection Frame (Orange)
Blinking
2
Select a specific person.
0
Use the cross-shaped button (HIJK) to
select a person.
0
An orange frame will appear on the face of
the selected person and focus will be
automatically adjusted.
.
Detection Frame (Blue)
Detection Frame (Orange)
3
Press the Set button (R) to confirm the
person for face detection.
Memo :
0
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel the
selection.
0
A face
can be selected by turning the focus ring
without entering the face selection mode.
0
The detection sensitivity and duration for
maintaining the current focus after losing sight
of the face can be configured in [Camera
Function] B [Face Detection] B [Sensitivity]/
[Holding Duration].
(A P115
[ Sensitivity ] )
(
A P115 [ Holding Duration ] )
Adjusting the Focusing by Face Detection
63
Shooting
Adjusting the Brightness
Adjust the brightness using Iris, Gain, Shutter
speed and ND filter according to the brightness of
the object.
Adjusting
the
Brightness Automatically:
Automatic Brightness Adjustment (AE)
Mode
Iris, Gain, Shutter speed and ND filter are
automatically adjusted
according to the brightness
of the object to maintain optimum brightness.
To set only the Iris, Gain and Shutter to Auto mode,
set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF” before setting
each item to the automatic adjustment mode.
1
Set Gain, Iris and Shutter to Auto mode.
0
[Adjusting the Iris] (A P 65)
0
[Setting the Gain] (
A P 66)
0
[Setting the Electronic Shutter] (A P 67)
2
Set the target level (brighter/darker) to
maintain optimum brightness during
automatic adjustment.
0
This can be configured using the cross-
shaped button
(HI) on the side of the camera
recorder unit.
0
This can be configured in [Camera
Function] B [AE Level].
.
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
   
Memo :
0
Setting the
[FULL AUTO] switch to “ON” to enter
the Full Auto mode also activates the automatic
brightness adjustment (AE) mode. In this case,
white balance is also switched forcibly to auto
mode.
0
The convergence speed of the automatic
adjustment for
automatic brightness adjustment
(AE) can be set in the menu.
(A P111 [ AE Speed ] )
0
If one or more of the items (Gain, Iris and
Shutter) have been set to Auto mode, the value
of the corresponding items when the user button
that is assigned “AE Lock” is pressed can be
fixed.
(A P117 [ AE Lock ] )
0
If one or more of the items (Gain, Iris and
Shutter) have been set to Auto mode, the
automatic brightness adjustment (AE) mode is
enabled.
Adjusting the Brightness Manually
When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to “OFF”,
some or
all of the items (Iris, Gain and Shutter) can
be manually adjusted.
1
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.
2
Adjust the Iris, Gain and Shutter speed.
0
[Adjusting the Iris] (A P 65
)
0
[Setting the Gain] (
A P 66)
0
[Setting the Electronic Shutter] (A P 67)
Memo :
0
The brightness cannot be manually adjusted in
the Full Auto mode.
0
If Iris, Gain and Shutter Speed are manually
adjusted, the [AE Level] setting is temporarily
disabled.
64
Adjusting the Brightness
Shooting
Adjusting the Iris
Adjust the
aperture of the lens iris according to the
brightness of the subject.
Auto Iris (Automatic Adjustment) Mode
1
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.
2
Press the [IRIS]
button to set to the Auto Iris
mode.
The iris is automatically adjusted according to
the brightness of the object.
A a icon appears on the left side of the lens
aperture value (F-number) during Auto Iris
mode.
Memo :
0
Setting the
[FULL AUTO] switch to “ON” to enter
Full Auto mode also activates the Auto Iris
mode. In this case, the Gain, Shutter and White
Balance also enter into Auto mode forcibly.
0
The iris open/close limit can be set in [Camera
Function
] B [Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)][Auto Iris
Limit (CLOSE)] during Auto Iris.
(A
P112 [ Auto Iris Limit (OPEN) ] )
(A P112 [ Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE) ] )
0
The control target level (brighter/darker) of the
auto iris can be configured using the cross-
shaped button (HI) on the side of the camera
recorder unit or in [Camera Function] B [AE
Level].
0
The convergence speed of the auto iris can be
set in the menu.
(A
P111 [ AE Speed ] )
0
While in the Auto Iris mode, and [AE/FAW
Lock] is set to
“AE” or “AE/FAW”, a
icon
appears on the left side of the lens aperture
value (F-number) during lock operation.
Manual Iris (Manual Adjustment) Mode
The aperture value (F-number) of the lens can be
set manually.
1
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.
2
Press the [IRIS]
button to set to the Manual
Iris mode.
The lens aperture value (F-number) is
displayed.
.
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
   
3
Turn the iris ring on the lens to adjust the
iris manually.
The open F-number of the aperture varies
according to the zoom position.
Wide [W] end :
F2.8
Tele [T] end : F4.5
F-number Description
Decrease The subject appears brighter.
The focused range becomes
sharper, while the background is
blurred to produce a soft image.
Increase The subject appears darker.
Background of image becomes
focused as well.
Memo :
0
Pressing the
[PUSH AUTO] button in the Manual
Iris mode activates the One-push Auto Iris
mode, while holding down the [PUSH AUTO]
button activates the Push Auto Iris mode.
One Push Auto Iris
When the camera recorder is in Manual Iris mode,
press the [PUSH AUTO]
button to adjust the iris
according to the brightness of the object.
Push Auto Iris
When the camera recorder is in the Manual Iris
mode, press and hold the [PUSH AUTO
] button to
change to the Auto Iris mode temporarily. The iris
will be automatically adjusted according to the
brightness of the subject.
About the Iris F-number
Blurry effects due to “small aperture diffraction”
may occur when the diameter of the iris becomes
too small. When this phenomenon occurs, the F-
number on the screen turns gray to warn you that
the diffraction F-number of the iris has been
exceeded.
You are
recommended to make appropriate use of
ND filters to prevent the F-number from turning
gray.
Adjusting the Iris
65
Shooting
Setting the Gain
This function
electrically boosts the light sensitivity
when there is insufficient illumination on the object.
You can set the gain of the video amplifier
according to the brightness of the object. Select the
setting mode according to your shooting
conditions.
.
Automatic Gain Mode (Automatic Gain
Adjustment)
1
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.
2
Press the [GAIN] button to set to the AGC
mode.
The gain of the video amplifier is automatically
set according to the brightness of the subject.
A a icon appears on the left side of the gain
value in the AGC mode.
Memo :
0
Setting the
[FULL AUTO] switch to “ON” to enter
the Full Auto mode also activates the Auto Gain
mode. In this case, the Iris, Shutter and White
Balance also enter into Auto mode forcibly.
0
The switching operation of the [GAIN L/M/H]
switch is disabled in the Full Auto mode.
0
The upper limit of the gain setting value during
AGC operation can be set in [Camera
Function
] B [AGC Limit].
(A P
111 [ AGC Limit ] )
0
While in the Auto Gain mode, and [
AE Lock] is
set to “AE” or “AE/FAW”, a icon appears on
the left side of the gain value during lock
operation.
Manual Gain Mode (Manual Gain
Switching)
1
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.
2
Press the [GAIN]
button
to set to the manual
gain mode, followed by selecting the [GAIN
L/M/H] switch
0
Use the [GAIN L/M/H
] switch to display the
gain of the selected video amplifier.
0
The gain level appears on the screen.
0
The a
icon on the screen disappears.
.
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
   
0
The default positions of the switch are as
follows.
[L] : 0 dB
[M] :
6dB
[H] : 12dB
Memo :
0
You can
change the gain value of each position
in the menu. Increasing the sensitivity causes
the screen to appear grainier.
(A P112 [GAIN L, GAIN M, GAIN H] )
66
Setting the Gain
Shooting
Setting the Electronic
Shutter
You can change the shutter speed (time for each
shooting frame) using the electronic shutter
function. Electronic shutter can be adjusted
manually or automatically.
Automatic Shutter Mode (Automatic
Shutter Adjustment)
1
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.
2
Press the [SHUTTER] button to set to the
Automatic Shutter mode.
0
The a icon appears on the screen.
0
Automatic Shutter mode adjusts the shutter
speed automatically according to the
brightness of the object.
3
Set the controllable range for the Automatic
Shutter in [Camera Function
] B [EEI Limit].
(A P112 [ EEI Limit ] )
Memo :
0
Setting the
[FULL AUTO] switch to “ON” to enter
the Full Auto mode also activates the Automatic
Shutter mode. In this case, the Iris, Gain and
White Balance also enter into Auto mode
forcibly.
0
In the Automatic Shutter mode, switching of
shutter speed with the cross-shaped button (J
K) at the side of the camera recorder and
switching of
shutter mode with the Set button (R)
are disabled.
0
While in the Automatic Shutter mode, and
[AE/FAW Lock]
is set to “AE” or “AE/FAW”, a
icon appears on the left side of the shutter speed
during lock operation.
Manual Shutter Mode (Manual Shutter
Switching)
1
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.
2
Press the [SHUTTER] button to set to the
Manual Shutter mode.
0
The a icon on the screen disappears.
0
Use
the
Set button (R) to switch between the
shutter modes and the cross-shaped button
(JK) to switch between the speeds.
.
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
   
Switching Shutter Mode
Press the Set button (R) to turn ON/OFF the
shutter.
Memo :
0
When the shutter is ON, configure the [Camera
Function]B[Shutter] item to “Step” or “Variable”.
“Step” is the factory default.
(A P
111 [ Shutter ] )
Switching Shutter Speed
When the shutter is ON, use the cross-shaped
button (JK) to configure the shutter speed. The
settable shutter speed range differs according to
the video format setting.
Memo :
0
To display Shutter in angle (DEG), set [WFrame
Rate] to “25p” or “24p” and set [LCD/VF] B
[Display Type] B [Shutter] to “DEG”.
(A P151
[WFrame Rate/ GFrame Rate] )
(
A P111 [ Shutter ] )
Setting the Electronic Shutter
67
Shooting
After the shutter speed indication turns white, the
setting value can be changed using the cross-
shaped button (JK).
o
For “Step”
Shutter
Speed
Frame Rate
60p,
60i,
30p
50p,
50i,
25p
24p
120/60p,
120/30p,
120/24p
100/50p,
100/25p
1/10000
c c c c c
1/4000
c c c c c
1/2000
c c c c c
1/1000
c c c c c
1/500
c c c c c
1/250
c c c c c
1/120
c c c
c
*
c
1/100
c c c
-
c
*
1/60
c
*
c c
- -
1/50 -
c
*
c
- -
1/48 - -
c
*
- -
1/30
c
- - - -
1/25 -
c
- - -
1/24 - -
c
- -
1/15
c
- - - -
1/12.5 -
c
- - -
1/12 - -
c
- -
1/7.5
c
- - - -
1/6.25 -
c
- - -
1/6 - -
c
- -
* When the shutter is set to OFF
o
For “Variable”
Shutter Speed
Frame Rate
60p,
60i,
30p
50p,
50i,
25p
24p
Upper limit 1/9860 1/10118 1/9860
(Default value) 1/60.00 1/50.00 1/48.00
Lower limit 1/30.00 1/25.00 1/24.00
Shutter Speed
Frame Rate
120/60p,
120/30p,
120/24p
100/50p,
100/25p
Upper limit 1/9860 1/10118
(Default value) 1/120.0 1/100.0
Lower limit 1/120.0 1/100.0
Memo :
0
The operations of the cross-shaped button
(JK) and Set button (R) are disabled in the
following cases.
0
During clip preview
0
During display of the formatting confirmation
screen
0
When selecting a face using face detection
0
When selecting a photometry area with [Spot
Meter] set to “Manual”
0
During expanded focus
Setting the ND Filter
Use the ND filter to keep the lens aperture in the
appropriate range.
.
Switch according to the brightness of the object.
When the position on the switch is changed, the
selected
position
of the ND filter is displayed on the
LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
.
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1/16
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
   
ND 1/16
Memo :
0
It is
recommended to use the ND filter to set the
lens aperture to less than F11.
ND Filter Warning Display
In order to adjust the amount of light when you are
shooting at
a relatively bright location, the diameter
of the iris may become extremely small, causing
blurry effects to occur as a result.
This phenomenon is known as “small aperture
diffraction”. You can make appropriate use of ND
filters to prevent it from occurring.
This unit displays an ND filter warning when
necessary to prompt you to select an appropriate
ND filter.
1
Set [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [ND
Filter]
to “Normal + Assist”.
(A
P129 [ ND Filter ] )
2
When the iris diameter becomes too small
while adjusting the light intensity, or when
an ND filter is used in a dimly-lit location,
the ND filter display starts blinking.
68
Setting the Electronic Shutter
Shooting
Adjusting the White
Balance
Adjust the white balance according to the color
temperature of the lighting. You can select the
adjustment mode according to the shooting
conditions.
As the color of the light (color temperature) varies
according to the light source, it is necessary to
readjust the white balance when the main light
source illuminating the subject changes.
.
SHUTTERWHT BALGAIN
PRESET
A
B
M
L
H
Automatic White Balance Mode (FAW:
Fulltime Auto White balance)
1
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.
2
Press the [WHT BAL] button to set to
Automatic White Balance mode.
0
“FAW” appears on the screen.
0
White balance switching with the
[WHT BAL
B/A/PRESET] selection switch is disabled.
Caution :
0
The accuracy of [FAW] is inferior to that of [AWB]
(Auto White Balance).
0
When the power of the camera recorder is
turned on
with the [FAW] mode selected, it takes
about 15 seconds for the colors to stabilize.
Memo :
0
Setting the
[FULL AUTO] switch to “ON” to enter
the Full Auto mode also activates the Automatic
White Balance mode. In this case, the Iris, Gain
and Shutter also enter into Auto mode forcibly.
0
When [Camera Function]
B [User Switch Set] B
[AE Lock] is set to “AE/FAW” or “FAW”, the white
balance when the user button that is assigned
with [AE Lock] is pressed can be fixed while in
the Automatic White Balance mode.
(A P117
[ AE Lock ] )
0
If
[White Balance] is assigned to the user button,
pressing the assigned user button will display
the FAW Paint Adjustment screen.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
FAW Paint Adjustment
You can fine-adjust the white balance that was
automatically adjusted.
1
Select [Camera Process] B [White
Balance]
B [FAW Paint] and press the Set
button (R).
The FAW Paint Adjustment screen appears.
.
1
FAW Paint
White Balance
2
Adjust the R and B values.
Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to adjust R
value and (HI) to adjust B value.
.
B
R
Adjusting the White Balance
69
Shooting
3
Press the Set button (R).
Returns to the [White Balance] screen.
.
B Value
R Value
FAW Paint
White Balance
Manual White Balance Mode (Manual
Switching)
1
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.
2
Press the [WHT BAL] button to set to
Manual White Balance mode.
0
Use the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection
switch
to select “PRESET” (preset mode), “A”
(memory A mode), or “B” (memory B mode).
Memo :
0
This is fixed at “FAW” when the [FULL AUTO]
switch of the camera recorder is set to “ON”.
0
The
FAW
(Full Time Auto White Balance) mode
makes automatic adjustments by sampling the
color temperature of the video to obtain the most
appropriate white balance level.
Preset Mode (PRESET)
0
Two different color temperature settings are
registered on this camera recorder. You can
switch between them using the [y] button or
the user button assigned with the “AWB”
function.
Default setting:
[Preset Temp.]
: 3200K
[Alternative Temp.] : 5600K
1
Set the [WHT BAL] switch to “PRESET”.
2
Press the [y] button or the user button
assigned with the “AWB
” function
0
The color temperature switches.
(“Preset Temp.”
1“Alternative Temp.”)
Setting the [Preset Temp.] or [Alternative
Temp.] Values
You can change both the color temperature
settings in the Preset mode in the menu.
1
Open the [Preset Temp.
] or [Alternative
Temp.] menu.
0
Select [Camera Process
]
B [White Balance]
B [Preset Temp.] and [Alternative Temp.],
and press the Set button (R).
0
The Color Temperature setting screen
appears.
.
Color Temperature
Detailed Selection
Screen
Color Temperature Selection Screen
2
Select the color temperature.
0
When selecting from a setting value (Color
Temperature Selection screen), use the
cross-shaped button
(JK) to select the color
temperature.
[Setting Values: 7500K, 6500K, 5600K,
5200K, 4800K, 4200K, 3200K, 3000K,
2800K]
0
To select detailed values (Color
Temperature Detailed Selection screen)
0
Press the cross-shaped button (I) to
display the Color Temperature Detailed
Selection screen.
0
Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to
select a color temperature.
[Setting Values: 2300K to 15000K (in
100K increments)]
Memo :
0
Use the cross-shaped button (I) to switch
between the Color Temperature Selection
screen and the Color Temperature Detailed
Selection screen.
0
If [White Balance]
is assigned to the user button,
pressing the assigned user button will display
the Color Temperature Selection screen.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
70
Adjusting the White Balance
Shooting
Preset Paint Adjustment
The white balance for [Preset Temp.] and
[Alternative Temp.]
can be fine adjusted
individually or collectively.
1
Select [Camera Process] B [White
Balance
] B [Preset Paint Memory].
0
“Common
” configures the settings for the
entire color temperature range collectively.
0
“Individual” configures the settings for the 9
types of color temperature individually.
2
Select
[Camera Process] B [White
Balance] B [Preset Paint].
0
The
adjustment
screen appears if “Common”
is selected.
0
The lower
color temperature limit of the color
temperature range is displayed if “Individual”
is selected. Select the color temperature to
adjust.
In the case of 2300K for example, the target
range is 2300K to 2900K (less than 3000K)
3
Adjust the R and B values.
0
Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to adjust
R value and (HI) to adjust B value.
4
Press the Set button (R).
0
In the
case of “Common”, the display returns
to the [White Balance] screen.
0
As for “Individual
”, repeat steps 1 to 4 as
necessary to configure each color
temperature individually.
Memory A Mode (A), Memory B Mode
(B)
0
Set to the white balance saved in Memory A or
Memory B.
0
When the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET
] selection
switch is set to
“A” or “B”, pressing the [y]
button or the user button assigned with the
“AWB” function executes Auto White Balance.
White balance will be automatically adjusted
and the adjusted value will be saved in Memory
A or Memory B.
1
Prepare the camera recorder.
A
Set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “ON”.
B
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.
C
Press the [IRIS] button to set to the Auto mode.
2
Set the [ND FILTER] switch according to the
lighting.
(A P68 [Setting the ND Filter] )
3
Set the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection
switch to “A” or “B”.
4
Locate a place with similar lighting conditions
as the object to be shot, place a white object
near the center of the screen and zoom in to
fill the screen with white.
5
Press the [
y
] button or the user button
assigned with the “AWB” function
0
The white detection frame appears when Auto
White Balance is activated. Fill the frame with
white completely.
0
While Auto White Balance is starting up, “A
y
or “B
y
” appears on the screen. (
y
mark
appears blinking)
0
After the correct white balance is obtained, an
estimated value of the current color
temperature is displayed.
.
100min
50min
282min
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00: 00.00
1080 /30p
120/60fps
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
4030 20 10 0
100min
50min
282min
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00: 00.00
1080 /30p
120/60fps
5 . 6 f t
B
4030 20 10 0
Result Display
[AWB] Activating
White Detection
Frame
Blinking
Caution :
0
Do not use highly reflective objects, such as
metals. Doing so may result in improper white
balance adjustment.
0
The Auto White Balance function cannot provide
optimum white balance with an object outside the
adjustment range, for example when it contains
only a single color or not enough white color.
Adjusting the White Balance
71
Shooting
Error Message
If the Auto White Balance adjustment is not
correctly completed, one of the following
messages will appear for about 3 seconds.
Message Status
Auto White * NG:
Object
(*A or B)
Displayed when there is not
enough white color on the
object, or when the color
temperature is not suitable.
Use
another white object and
adjust the white balance
again.
Auto White * Error:
Low Light
(*A or B)
Displayed when the lighting is
dark. Increase the lighting
and adjust the white balance
again.
Auto White * Error:
Over Light
(*A or B)
Excessive illumination.
Displayed
when
the lighting is
too bright. Decrease the
lighting and adjust the white
balance again.
White Paint Adjustment
You can fine-tune the white balance saved in
Memory A or Memory B.
1
Select [Camera Process] B [White
Balance
]
B [AWB Paint] and press the Set
button (R).
The White Paint Adjustment screen appears.
.
1
AWB Paint
White Balance
2
Adjust the R and B values.
Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to adjust R
value and (HI) to adjust B value.
.
B
R
3
Press the Set button (R).
Returns to the [White Balance] screen.
.
B Value
R Value
AWB Paint
White Balance
Memo :
0
Executing Auto
White Balance will usually clear
the White Paint Adjustment value. But when
[Camera Process] B [White Balance] B [Clear
Paint After AWB] is set to “Off”, values will not
be cleared even when Auto White Balance is
executed.
(A P
123 [ Clear Paint After AWB ] )
0
If
[White Balance] is assigned to the user button,
pressing the assigned user button will display
the AWB Paint Adjustment screen.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
72
Adjusting the White Balance
Shooting
Adjusting the Camera
Image
The picture quality of the camera can be set using
the [Camera Process] menu.
As the adjustments are shown on the screen, you
can adjust the values while checking the picture
quality on the camera.
0
[Color Space
]
0
[Gamma]
0
[Detail
]
0
[Master Black]
0
[Black Toe
]
0
[Knee]
0
[White Clip
]
0
[White Balance]
0
[Color Matrix]
0
[Color Gain]
0
[Reverse Picture]
Memo :
0
For details of the respective items, see the
[Camera Process]
menu.
(A P118 [Camera Process Menu] )
Using the Image Stabilizer
Reduces blurring of images due to camera shake.
1
Check whether the image stabilizer feature
is turned ON or OFF.
If the image stabilizer icon (i/j) does not
appear on the screen display, the image
stabilizer function is OFF.
.
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00: 00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
4030 20
10 0
2
Press the [OIS/2] button to turn ON the
image stabilizer feature (when image
stabilizer feature is OFF).
The image stabilizer feature switches between
ON and OFF with every press of the [OIS/2]
button.
0
OFF:
Use this
setting when the camera recorder is
secured, such as when using a tripod.
0
ON:
Reduces blurring of images due to camera
shake.
Memo :
0
Select [Camera Function] B [OIS]
B [Level] to
set the correction level.
(A P111 [ Level ] )
0
Correction by this feature may not be sufficient
when camera shake is too strong.
0
“OIS” is
assigned to the [OIS/2] button in factory
default.
0
“OIS” can also be assigned to other user
buttons.
(A P
46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
About the Hard Lock Feature
Use this feature when blurry image caused by
camera shake tends to occur due to strong
acceleration.
It can be used to lock the IS (image stabilization)
lens in place.
1
Press the [OIS/2] button to turn off the
Image Stabilizer function
2
Set [Camera Function] B [
OIS
] B [Hard
Lock] to “On”.
(A P111
[ Hard Lock ] )
Memo :
0
Camera shake that causes image blur occurs
when switching between On and Off.
Adjusting the Camera Image
73
Shooting
Audio Recording
You can
record audio from the two channels (CH1/
CH2) in synchronization with video images on this
camera recorder.
Select from the options below to record the audio.
0
Built-in Microphone
0
Microphone connected to [AUX
] terminal
0
Microphone connected to [INPUT1
] terminal
0
Microphone connected to [INPUT2
] terminal
.
CH1
INT
INPUT1
INPUT2
AUTO
MANUAL
CH2
INPUT2INPUT1
PEAKINGLCD BRIGHT
CH2CH1
LINE
MIC
MIC
+48V
Selecting Audio to Be Recorded in Each
Channel
Select the audio to be recorded in CH1/CH2.
- Switch Setting Connected Devices
CH1 INT
0
Built-in Microphone
0
Microphone connected to
[AUX] terminal
INPUT1 Microphone connected to
[INPUT1]
terminal
CH2 INT
0
Built-in Microphone
0
Microphone connected to
[AUX] terminal
INPUT1 Microphone connected to
[INPUT1
]
terminal
INPUT2 Microphone connected to
[INPUT2]
terminal
Memo :
0
When “INT” is set, the built-in microphone is
disabled if a microphone is connected to the
[AUX] terminal; audio from the microphone
connected to the
[AUX] is recorded.
0
When “INT” is selected, set the reference input
level in
[Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Audio Set]
B [Int. Mic Gain]/[AUX Gain].
(A P
132 [ Int. Mic Gain ] )
(
A P132 [ AUX Gain ] )
Setting Input Channel to [INPUT1]/[INPUT2]
Select the
audio to input to [INPUT1] and [INPUT2]
terminals with the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] mode
switch.
Setting Description
[LINE] Use this setting when connecting to
an audio device or other equipment.
The reference input level is +4 dBu.
[MIC] Use this setting when connecting to
a dynamic microphone.
[MIC+48V] Use this setting when connecting to
a microphone (phantom
microphone) that requires a +48 V
power supply.
Memo :
0
When “MIC” or “MIC+48V” is selected, set the
reference input level in [A/V Set] B [Audio Set]
B [Input1 Mic Ref.
]/[
Input2 Mic Ref.].
(A P132 [ Input1 Mic Ref. ] )
(
A P132 [ Input2 Mic Ref. ] )
Caution :
0
When connecting
a device that does not require
a +48 V power supply, make sure that it is not
set to the “MIC+48V” position.
0
When the [INPUT1
]/[INPUT2] mode switch is
set to “MIC”, make sure that a microphone is
connected to the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] terminal. If
you increase the recording level when a
microphone is not connected, noise from the
input terminal may be recorded.
0
When a microphone is not connected to the
[INPUT1]/[INPUT2] terminal, set the
[INPUT1]/
[INPUT2] mode switch to “LINE” or adjust the
volume with the [CH1
]/[CH2] recording level
adjustment knob.
74
Audio Recording
Shooting
Adjusting Audio Recording Level
You can select to adjust the audio recording levels
for the two channels (CH1/CH2) manually or
automatically.
.
CH1
INT
INPUT1
INPUT2
AUTO
MANUAL
CH2
INPUT2INPUT1
PEAKINGLCD BRIGHT
CH2CH1
LINE
MIC
MIC
+48V
Manual Adjustment Mode (Manual
Adjustment)
0
Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] switch on
the camera recorder to “MANUAL” to enter the
manual adjustment mode, and use the
[CH1]/
[CH2] recording level adjustment knob to set the
recording level.
0
You can adjust the level manually during the
recording, recording standby, and stop modes.
o
When the input channel is set to “INPUT1”/
“INPUT2”
1
Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL]
selection switch to
“MANUAL
” for the
channel to be adjusted manually.
2
Turn the corresponding [CH1]/[CH2]
recording level adjustment knob to adjust
the level.
When [Audio Set] B [Limiter
]
is set to “Off”,
adjust such that the audio level meter does not
light up at -2 dB even for loud sounds.
(A P132 [ Limiter ] )
.
1
/60
F2. 8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00: 00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
4030 20 10 0
4030 20 10
0
-2dB
o
When the input channel is set to “INT
” for
both [CH1] and [CH2]
1
Set the [CH1 AUTO/MANUAL] selection
switch to “
MANUAL”.
2
Turn the [CH1] recording level adjustment
knob to adjust the level.
When the built-in microphone and the [AUX]
input terminal are used, the recording levels of
[CH1] and [CH2] are interlocked.
This is also effective when the
[CH1 AUTO/
MANUAL] selection switch is set to
[CH2].
Memo :
0
Select [Limiter], [AGC Response], [AGC Mode],
or [Int. Mic Separation] in the menu to set the
recording audio.
0
If [Limiter] is set to other than “Off”, the limiter
operates according to the value set.
(A P
132 [ Limiter ] )
0
For the reference level to be recorded to an SD
card, set [A/V Set]
B [Audio Set] B [Ref. Level]
to “-20dB”, “-18dB”, or “-12dB”. (common for
CH1/CH2)
(A P
132 [ Ref. Level ] )
0
The operations of the [CH2]
recording level
adjustment knob and [CH2 AUTO/MANUAL]
selection switch are disabled.
Automatic Adjustment Mode
0
Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] selection
switch to “AUTO
” or the [FULL AUTO] switch to
“ON” to enter Automatic Adjustment mode. The
audio recording level is set automatically
according to the input level.
0
When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to “ON”,
mode switching with the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/
MANUAL] selection switch is disabled.
Memo :
0
When [A/V Set]
B [Audio Set] B [Limiter] is set
to “Off” while in the automatic adjustment mode,
the limiter operates at -6dBFS.
(A
P132 [ Limiter ] )
0
When
[A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [Audio On FULL
AUTO] is set to “SW Set”, you can switch the
audio recording mode with the [CH1/CH2
AUTO/MANUAL] selection switch on the
camera recorder even when the [FULL AUTO]
switch is set to “ON”.
(A P
134 [ Audio On FULL AUTO ] )
Audio Recording
75
Shooting
Monitoring Audio Sound
During Recording Using a
Headphone
You can check the recorded audio using
headphone.
.
MONITOR
CH1
BOTH
CH2
32
1
1
Connect the headphone.
2
Select the channel to monitor with the
[MONITOR
]
selection switch.
Setting Description
[CH1] Outputs the audio recorded in [CH1].
[BOTH] Outputs the audio recorded in
[CH1/CH2].
[CH2] Outputs the audio recorded in [CH2].
3
Use the [MONITOR +/-] button to adjust the
monitor volume.
Memo :
0
Audio during recording is not output from the
monitor speaker.
0
Warning tone is output when there is an
abnormality in
the camera recorder or when the
battery is low.
(A P236 [Warning Tone] )
Selecting Audio Output Method When the
[MONITOR]
Selection Switch Is Set to “BOTH”
When a stereo type earphone jack is connected,
perform the following setting to output stereo
sound.
1
Set the [MONITOR] selection switch to
“BOTH”.
2
Set [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [Monitor] to
“Stereo”.
(
A P
134 [ Monitor ] )
Memo :
0
You can set the volume of the warning tone in
[A/V Set]
B[Audio Set]B[Alarm Level]. (“Off”/
“Low”/“Middle”/“High”)
(A P134
[ Alarm Level ] )
Time Code and User’s Bit
Time code
and user’s bit data are recorded with the
video in this camera recorder.
The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the
viewfinder and LCD monitor during playback or
recording. (Display screen)
Displaying Time Code and User’s Bit
The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the
viewfinder and LCD monitor during playback or
recording.
The display
differs according to the menu settings.
1
Set [LCD/VF] B [Display On/Off] B [TC/UB]
to “
On
”.
(A P
129 [Display On/Off Item] )
2
Set [LCD/VF
] B [Display Type] B [TC/UB].
When “TC” or “UB” is selected, time code or
user’s bit data is displayed respectively on the
display screen.
(A P128 [ TC/UB ] )
.
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00: 00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
4030 20 10 0
00H 00M 00S 00F
AB CD EF 89
76
Monitoring Audio Sound During Recording Using a Headphone
Shooting
Time Code Operation Mode
Set the time code operation in [TC/UB] B [TC
Generator].
(A
P124 [ TC Generator ] )
Setting Description
Free
Run(GPS)
L
Time code information can be
synchronized with the date/time
information acquired from the
GPS.
Free Run(Ext) This mode synchronizes another
camera recorder connected to the
[TC
]
terminal. The time code
operates in the run mode at all
times regardless of the recording
status.
It continues to run even when the
power of the camera recorder is
turned off.
Free Run The time code operates in the run
mode at
all times regardless of the
recording status.
It continues to run even when the
power of the camera recorder is
turned off.
Rec Run The time code operates in the run
mode during recording. It
continues
to
run in the order of the
recorded clips as long as the SD
card is not replaced. If the SD card
is removed and recording is made
on another card, time code will be
recorded on the new card from
where it was left off in the previous
card.
Regen The time code operates in the run
mode during recording. When the
SD card is replaced, the last time
code recorded on the card is read
and
recorded
on a new card so that
the time code continues in running
order.
(A P78 [Setting Time Code] )
Memo :
0
When [System] B [Record Set
] B [Rec Mode] is
set to “Interval Rec” or “Frame Rec”, and [TC
Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free
Run(Ext)”, “Rec Run” is activated.
0
When [
System
] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [System] is set to “High-Speed”, and
[TC Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free
Run(Ext)”, “Rec Run” is activated.
Setting Time Code
Generator
Presetting the Time Code
Time code and user’s bit data generated from the
internal time code generator are recorded.
This section describes how to set
[TC/UB]
B [TC
Preset].
(A P124 [ TC Preset ] )
Memo :
0
When [System]
B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [WFrame Rate] is set to “50p”, “50i”,
“25p” or “24p”, setting for “Drop” will be disabled.
(A P
151 [WFrame Rate/ G
Frame Rate] )
0
You can configure the setting without accessing
the [TC/UB] menu screen.
(A P79 [Setting Time Code without Opening
the Menu] )
Required Settings Before Preset
1
Set [TC/UB] B [TC Generator]
to “Rec
Run
” or “Free Run”.
(A
P124 [ TC Generator ] )
0
[Rec Run]:
Preset data in the time code generator
operates
in run mode during recording mode.
Set this when recording continuous time
code in connecting frames.
0
[Free Run]:
Time
code starts to operate in run mode from
the preset time in the time code generator.
Time Code and User’s Bit
77
Shooting
2
Select the framing mode for the time code
generator (only
when the frame rate setting
is “60” or “30”).
To configure the setting, go to [TC/UB] B [Drop
Frame].
(A P
124 [ Drop Frame ] )
0
[Drop]:
Sets the
run mode of the time code generator
to drop frame mode. Use this setting when
placing emphasis on the recording time.
0
[Non Drop]:
Sets
the run mode of the time code generator
to non-drop frame mode. Use this setting
when placing emphasis on the number of
frames.
Memo :
Drop frame/non-drop frame mode
0
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [Frame Rate]
is set to “60p”, “60i”, or
“30p”, the actual number of frames per second
is approximately 59.94 (29.97). However, the
time code processing standard is “60p”, “60i”, or
“30p” frames. To make up for the frame number
discrepancy, the drop frame mode (Drop) drops
the 00 frame and 01 frame every minute except
for minutes that are multiples of 10. However, in
the case of “60p”, the 00, 01, 02 and 03 frame
are dropped.
0
The
non-drop
frame mode (Non Drop) does not
drop frames and ignores the discrepancy with
the actual time.
Setting Time Code
1
Select [TC/UB] B [TC Preset
]
and press the
Set button (R).
(A P124 [ TC Preset ] )
The
[TC Preset] screen appears.
.
1
TC Preset
00:00:00:00
TC/UB
Memo :
0
When [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] is set to
“Regen”, the parameter is displayed as
“<Regen>” and cannot be selected.
(A P
124 [ TC Generator ] )
2
Set the time code (hour, minute, second,
frame).
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to place the
cursor at the item to set, then use the cross-
shaped button (JK) to change the values.
.
During drop frame
During non-drop
frame
Cursor
TC Preset
00:00:00:00
TC/UB
Memo :
0
Press the [OIS/2] button to reset each digit to “0”.
The cursor moves to the time digit (left).
3
Check the values and press the Set button
(R).
0
The time code is set and the screen returns
to [TC/UB].
0
To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL]
button.
4
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button.
Returns to the normal screen.
78
Setting Time Code Generator
Shooting
Setting Time Code without Opening the
Menu
.
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
FOCUS ASSIST/1 OIS / 2
TIME CODE
Memo :
0
Settings cannot
be made in the following cases.
0
[TC/UB] B [TC Generator] has been set to
“Regen”.
0
Menu screen is displayed.
0
The camera recorder is not in the Camera
mode.
Setting Time Code
1
Set [TC/UB] B [
TC Generator
] to a value
other than “Regen”.
(A P
124 [ TC Generator ] )
2
Hold down the
[MENU/THUMB] button and
press the [
FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
The [TC Preset] setting screen appears.
.
During drop frame
During non-drop frame
Cursor
3
Set the time code (hour, minute, second,
frame).
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to place the
cursor at the item to set, then use the cross-
shaped button (JK) to change the values.
Memo :
0
Press the [OIS/2] button to reset each digit to “0”.
The cursor moves to the time digit (left).
4
Check the values and press the Set button
(R).
0
The time code is set and the screen returns
to the normal screen.
0
To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL]
button.
Caution :
0
When the
camera recorder is switched to Media
mode during editing, editing will be canceled
and the screen will close.
0
When editing the time code, operation of the
buttons that are set in [Camera Function] B
[User Switch Set] is disabled. [OIS/2] functions
as the number reset button.
(A
P116 [User Switch Set Item] )
Recording Time Code in Continuation of
the Recorded Time Code on SD Card
This camera recorder is equipped with the time
code reader.
1
Set [TC/UB] B [
TC Generator
] to “Regen”.
0
When the camera recorder enters from
recording standby mode to recording mode,
it reads the time code already recorded on
the SD card and records the new time code
in continuation of that value.
0
The same data as the user’s bit already
recorded on the SD card is recorded.
Memo :
0
When [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] is set to
“Regen”, the framing mode of the time code
follows the settings in
[TC/UB] B [Drop Frame]
instead of the clip settings.
(A P124
[ Drop Frame ] )
Setting Time Code Generator
79
Shooting
Setting the User’s Bit
You can add the date, time or an 8-digit
hexadecimal number as the user’s bit to the
recorded image.
Selecting a Recording Mode
Recording date/time information to the user’s
bit
1
Set [TC/UB] B [UB Mode]
to “Date” or
“Time”, and press the Set button (R).
(A P124
[ UB Mode ] )
The date or time information is recorded to the
user’s bit.
Memo :
0
When “Date” or “Time”
is set, [Preset] appears
as “-” and cannot be set.
0
“Time”
is displayed in the 24-hour format.
Presetting the User’s Bit
Recording arbitrary information (8-digit
hexadecimal) to the user’s bit
1
Set [TC/UB] B [UB Mode
] to “Preset”, and
press the Set button (R).
(A P124 [ UB Mode ] )
.
1
TC/UB
UB Mode
Preset
Time
Preset
Date
Memo :
0
When [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] is set to
“Regen”, the parameter is displayed as
“<Regen>” and cannot be selected.
(A P
124 [ TC Generator ] )
2
Select [TC/UB] B
“Preset” and press the Set
button (R).
The [Preset] setting screen appears.
3
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to
place
the cursor at the item to set, then use the
cross-shaped button (JK) to change the
values.
Numbers between 0 and 9 or alphabets
between A and F can be specified for the user’s
bit.
.
TC/UB
Cursor
Memo :
0
Press the [OIS/2] button to reset each digit to
“0”. The cursor moves to the left.
4
Check the values and press the Set button
(R).
0
The user’s bit is set and the screen returns to
[TC/UB].
0
To cancel the setting, press the [
CANCEL]
button.
5
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button.
Returns to the normal screen.
80
Setting the User’s Bit
Shooting
Synchronizing Time Code
on Another Camera
This camera
recorder is equipped with a time code
input/output terminal ([TC] terminal).
Connect another camera recorder to the [TC]
terminal and synchronize to the time code.
1
Connect the [TC] terminal of the master
device with the
[TC]
terminal of the slave
device.
Set the [TC
IN/OUT] switch of the master device
to “OUT”, and the [TC IN/OUT] switch of the
slave device to
“IN”.
.
[IN]
Slave Device (This Camera Recorder)
[OUT]
Master Device
Settings and Operation of the Camera
Recorder
1
Set to Camera mode.
(A P
24 [Operation Modes] )
2
Set [TC/UB]
B [TC Generator]
as follows.
0
Slave device:
Select “Free Run(Ext)”.
0
Master device:
Select “Free Run”.
3
Set LCD monitor or viewfinder to Display
screen.
4
Set the master device and run the time
code.
0
When the built-in time code generator is
synchronized with the external time code
data input,
the Z icon on Display screen lights
up.
0
When time code is not synchronized or time
code input is not available, the Z icon goes
out.
.
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
4030 20 10 0
Memo :
0
The built-in time code generator will continue
operation even when the master device is
disconnected after synchronization.
0
User’s bit
will become data in the master device.
Synchronizing Time Code on Another Camera
81
Shooting
Setting Zebra Pattern
When the luminance level range for displaying
zebra patterns is specified, diagonal lines (zebra
pattern) are displayed at areas with the specified
luminance levels during shooting.
1
Set [LCD/VF] B [Shooting Assist
]
B [Zebra]
to “On”.
(A P
126 [ Zebra ] )
2
Specify the brightness (luminance) level
range for displaying zebra pattern.
Specify the upper and lower limits of the
luminance level in [
LCD/VF] B [Shooting
Assist] B [Zebra] B [Top] and [Bottom].
Item Settings Options
Top Upper luminance
limit for displaying
[Zebra]
5%, 10% to 95%,
98%, 100%, Over
Bottom Lower luminance
limit for displaying
[Zebra]
0%, 5% to 95%,
98%, 100%
Memo :
0
The timing to detect the zebra pattern display
can be
configured only when “J-Log1” or “HLG”
is selected in [Color Space] and “Cam” or “Cam
+ Return” is selected in [Convert to ITU709].
(A P118
[ Color Space ] )
(
A P125 [ Convert to ITU709 ] )
(A P126 [ Detect ] )
3
Display the zebra pattern.
Press the [ZEBRA/5] button
to display the zebra
pattern in the specified range.
.
During zebra pattern display, (zebra icon)
is displayed on the display screen in Camera
mode.
Memo :
0
“Zebra” is assigned to [ZEBRA/5]
button in
factory default.
0
“Zebra” can also be assigned to other user
buttons.
(A P46
[Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
82
Setting Zebra Pattern
Shooting
Setting Spot Meter
The brightness of the object during shooting is
displayed.
This function is useful when setting video or stage
lighting or when specifying camera exposure.
A cursor
indicating the location and the brightness
(%) of that location are displayed in the images
shown on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
0
Zebra patterns display the brightness of output
video signals.
(A P82 [Setting Zebra Pattern] )
0
This function
allows you to check the brightness
of input images from the lens without depending
on image processing such as gamma curve.
0
When [Color Space] is set to a value other than
“HLG” and “J-Log1”, the dynamic range of the
camera recorder is max. 400% and a brightness
range of 0% to 400% is displayed.
0
The value of the spot meter changes according
to the setting of [LCD/VF
]
B [Convert to
ITU709]/[White Level] when [Color Space] is set
to “HLG”.
When [Color Space] is set to “HLG” and
[LCD/VF] B [Convert to ITU709]/[White Level] is
set to “72.5%”, the dynamic range of the camera
recorder is max. 458% and a brightness range
of 0% to 458% is displayed.
0
When [Color Space] is set to
“J-Log1”, the
dynamic range of the camera recorder is max.
800% and a brightness range of 0% to 800% is
displayed.
Memo :
0
Spot meter may not be consistent with the zebra
display range.
1
Select one of the following from [Camera
Function]
B [User Switch Set] B [Spot
Meter].
(A P
116 [ Spot Meter ] )
Item Settings
Color of Frame
Indicating the
Position
Max & Min
Displays the
brightness (%)
and positions of
the brightest and
darkest areas in
the screen.
Frames may also
be stopped at the
current positions.
0
Max: Green
0
Min: Yellow
Max Displays the
brightness (%)
and
position
of the
brightest area in
the screen.
Frames may also
be stopped at the
current positions.
Green
Min Displays the
brightness (%)
and position
of the
darkest area in the
screen. Frame
may also be
stopped at the
current positions.
Yellow
Manual Displays the
brightness (%) of
the specified
position.
Green
(Blinks in green
when
specifying
the position)
2
Assign the “Spot Meter” function to any of
the user buttons.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
3
Press
the user button that is assigned with
“Spot Meter”.
The operation switches as below when the
button is pressed.
Setting Spot Meter
83
Shooting
When [Max & Min]/[Max]/[Min] is selected
A
The cursors appear according to the setting
when the button is pressed.
Green and yellow frames appear, and the
brightness levels of these areas are displayed.
.
Cursor
Cursor
Brightness
Indication
(Yellow)
(Green)
B
Hold down the button in the state in A, the
positions of the brightest (Max) and darkest
(Min) areas in the screen are automatically
detected with regard to the changes of the
object, and the brightness level of these areas
are displayed.
.
(Min: Yellow)
Cursor
(Max: Green)
Cursor
Brightness
Indication
C
Pressing the button in the state in B stops the
automatic position detection. The frames are
fixed at the stopped positions and the
brightness levels are displayed.
D
By pressing the button, the cursors and
brightness indication disappear.
.
When [Manual] is selected
A
The brightness of the cursor position is
displayed when the button is pressed.
.
Cursor
(Green)
Brightness
Indication
B
By pressing the button, the cursors and
brightness indication disappear.
.
C
Hold down
the button in the state in A or B, the
cursor blinks in green.
Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button
(JKHI) to specify the position to display the
brightness.
When you decide on the position, press the Set
button (R) to confirm.
.
(Blinks in
green)
Cursor
Brightness
Indication
D
Frames are fixed at the stopped positions and
the brightness is displayed.
Memo :
0
When moving the cursor position,
[Shutter]
/[AE
Level] control is disabled.
0
When
the
brightness is 0 % in the entire screen,
the frame is fixed in the center.
84
Setting Spot Meter
Shooting
Acquiring Positioning
Information by GPS A
L
This camera recorder comes with a built-in GPS
function. The GPS function is able to record the
positioning information.
During playback,
you can also display the recorded
information on the playback screen.
(A P101 [Playing back] )
1
Set [System] B [
GPS]
to “On”.
(A P148 [ GPS A
L ] )
0
Positioning starts when the H icon on the
display screen starts blinking.
0
After positioning is complete, the H icon
switches to a solid light and records the
positioning information during shooting.
0
The icon
that appears on the screen changes
according to the condition of signal reception
from the GPS satellite.
.
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
4030 20 10 0
Display
Reception
Status
Positioning Status
.
(Yellow)
[GPS] is set to
“On”, but signal
cannot be
received
GPS signal cannot
be received. UTC
and positioning
information cannot
be obtained.
.
(Blink)
GPS search in
progress
UTC information
can be obtained,
but not positioning
information.
.
GPS reception
in progress
(signal strength:
weak)
Receiving weak
GPS signal. UTC
and positioning
information can be
obtained and
recorded.
.
GPS reception
in progress
(signal strength:
medium)
Receiving GPS
signal. UTC and
positioning
information can be
obtained and
recorded.
Display
Reception
Status
Positioning Status
.
GPS reception
in progress
(signal strength:
strong)
Receiving strong
GPS signal. UTC
and positioning
information can be
obtained and
recorded.
(No
display)
GPS function is
turned off
The [GPS] item is
set to “Off”.
Memo :
0
If positioning cannot be performed after waiting
for several minutes, this means GPS reception
is poor, and there is difficulty in receiving data.
Move to an open place with no obstructions.
Otherwise, GPS
information will not be recorded
when shooting is performed.
0
Signal may not be received depending on
circumstances such as locations that are
indoors or surrounded by tall buildings, or the
geographical conditions.
Precision error may occur in the position
information depending on the conditions of
reception.
0
Even when positioning is in progress,
information may be disrupted depending on the
condition of signal reception.
0
When [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [SDI OUT] B
[Resolution] is set to “1080p”, configuring
[System] B [GPS] to “On” changes the setting to
“1080i”.
Acquiring Positioning Information by GPS A L
85
Shooting
Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately (Clip
Review)
You can check (review) the last recorded video clip
on the screen.
However, the video clip cannot be played back if
the settings of the camera recorder are different
from the video format (Resolution/Frame Rate/Bit
Rate/SD Aspect) of the clip.
(A P150 [WResolution/ GResolution] )
(A P151 [WFrame Rate/ GFrame Rate] )
(A P151 [WBit Rate/ GBit Rate] )
(A P152 [ SD Aspect ] )
Memo :
0
To use
this function, assign “Clip Review” to any
of the user buttons.
1
Press the user button assigned with the
“Clip Review”
function during standby
(“STBY” is displayed).
Playback of the configured section starts.
Memo :
0
The video clip is played back according to the
setting in [Camera Function] B [User Switch
Set] B [Clip Review]. By default setting (Last
5sec), the last 5 seconds of the clip is played
back.
(
A P116
[ Clip Review ] )
0
When playback is complete, the camera
recorder exits Clip Review and returns to
“STBY” (recording standby) mode.
Caution :
0
During Clip Review, only the [CANCEL] and
[REC
] buttons are enabled.
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel clip review
and return to “STBY” (recording standby) mode.
Press the [REC] button to cancel clip review and
enter recording mode. It will take some time to
start recording after the button is pressed.
0
When the last clip is less than 5 seconds, the
whole clip is played back.
0
Only
video
clips in the currently selected slot can
be reviewed.
0
When there are no clips in the selected slot, Clip
Review function is disabled.
0
Clip Review is unavailable when Clip
Continuous Rec is paused (“STBYL”, yellow
text). To operate Clip Review, use the
[CANCEL] button to set to “STBYL” (white text)
first.
(A P
92 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
0
Clip Review is unavailable when the camera
recorder is
connected to an external equipment
and the equipment is in recording state.
0
Clip Review is unavailable when operating View
Remote via network connection.
(A P196 [Camera Control Function] )
0
Clip Review does not function during live
streaming.
0
Clip Review does not function while the record
trigger is in the REC state.
86
Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately (Clip Review)
Shooting
Displaying the Histogram
The histogram shows the brightness distribution,
and is
employed mainly for checking the exposure
of the image.
1
Set the histogram feature to ON.
0
Set
[LCD/VF
] B [Display Type] B
[Histogram] to “On”.
0
You can also press the user button that is
assigned with “Histogram
”.
(
A P116 [User Switch Set Item] )
2
Set the upper and lower limits of the
histogram display.
After
setting, the brightness level is displayed in
red color.
Item Settings Options
Top Sets the maximum
brightness limit for
changing the
histogram display
color
5% to 110% (in 5 %
increments)
Bottom Sets the minimum
brightness limit for
changing the
histogram display
color
0% to 105% (in 5 %
increments)
o When the upper limit is set to 110% and the lower
limit to 0%
.
* The area in red is not displayed.
o When
the
upper limit is set to 90% and the lower
limit to 10%
.
To p
Bottom
How to read the histogram
0
The vertical
axis denotes the number of pixels.
0
The horizontal axis denotes the pixel
brightness.
Recording
Simultaneously at Two
Different Definitions
By setting [System]
to “HD+Web”, you can record
simultaneously at two different definitions.
0
When HD+Web is selected:
Records a high-definition (HD) file to slot A and
a web file to slot B at the same time.
Web files
can be used as a proxy file for the HD
file.
Memo :
0
If
a
recordable SD card is inserted into only one
of the slots, files will only be recorded to that slot.
0
The [Rec Mode] is fixed at “Normal”.
0
Clip Cutter Trig is disabled.
0
[Slot Mode] cannot be selected.
0
Clip Review can only be performed for slot A.
(“No Media”
appears if there is no card in slot A
while a card is inserted into slot B.)
0
Playback of web files is only possible from slot
B when “HD+Web” is selected.
Series Rec
0
Series Rec mode is specified in the factory
default.
([System
] B [Record Set] B [Slot Mode] is set to
“Series”.)
(A
P153 [ Slot Mode ] )
0
If both the slots are loaded with recordable
cards, pressing the [REC]
button starts
recording only to the media in the selected slot.
When the remaining space in the selected
media runs out, recording continues by
automatically activating the media in the other
slot.
0
The slot mode can be identified on the status
screen.
Displaying the Histogram
87
Shooting
Dual Rec
0
If
both
the slots are loaded with recordable cards
in the Dual Rec mode ([Slot Mode] is set to
“Dual”), pressing the [REC] button starts
recording simultaneously to the media in both
the slots.
0
The
clips
recorded to the media in both the slots
are identical, and two clips of the same content
can be created only on this camera recorder.
(A P153 [ Slot Mode ] )
.
Setting to Dual Rec Mode
1
Set [System] B [
Record Set]
B [Slot Mode]
to “Dual”.
(A
P153 [ Slot Mode ] )
2
Start recording.
0
Insert recordable media in both slots, and
press the [REC] button.
0
In the
Dual Rec mode, recording to the media
in both slots starts at the same time.
0
Both the card slot marks turn red, and the
status indicators of both the card slots also
light up in red.
.
100min
50min
282min
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
4030 20 10 0
Lit in red
3
Stop recording.
0
Press the [REC] button again.
0
Recording to both slots stops, and both the
card slot marks turn white.
0
The same clips are recorded to both cards.
.
100min
50min
282min
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
4030 20 10 0
White
Memo :
0
During
recording
in the Dual Rec mode, both the
card slot marks light up in red.
0
During recording in the Dual Rec mode to two
cards with a different amount of remaining
space, if the space of one card runs out,
recording to both slots will stop automatically.
After recording stops, recording automatically
resumes for the card with remaining space.
Although the clips are separated in this case, the
clips can be seamlessly joined by arranging
them on the timeline of the editing software since
they are recorded seamlessly.
0
If the last clip on the cards that are inserted in the
two slots are different from each other, and the
time code operating mode is set to “Regen”, the
Regen mode for the selected card slot will be
enabled in the next recording.
0
When [WFormat] is set to “High-Speed”, “Dual”
cannot be selected.
88
Dual Rec
Shooting
Caution :
0
To perform
recording in the Dual Rec mode, it is
recommended that you start recording by
making use of two cards with the same capacity
and from the formatted state.
0
You can combine the use of the Dual Rec mode
with a special recording mode. While in the Dual
Rec mode, you can also set [Rec Mode] to
“Normal”, “Pre Rec”, “Clip Continuous”, “Interval
Rec”, or “Frame Rec”.
(A P
91 [Special Recording] )
(
A P153 [ Rec Mode ] )
0
When both slots are inserted with recordable
cards, the Dual Rec (simultaneous recording)
operation can be performed. If a recordable
media is only inserted in one of the slots, you can
also start recording with one card.
0
In the Dual Rec mode, continuous recording by
switching from one slot to another cannot be
performed. Continuous recording will not be
performed if a recordable media is inserted in a
slot after recording to the other slot has started.
0
When recording to one slot is in progress with
the recorder set to the Dual Rec mode, inserting
a recordable media to the other slot does not
enable the Dual Rec operation. To perform the
Dual Rec operation, stop recording temporarily
(excluding pausing recording in the Clip
Continuous Rec mode), and start again.
0
When one of the cards is accidentally removed
while recording is in progress in the Dual Rec
mode, recording to the card in the other slot will
continue. However, repair of the accidentally
removed card by the recovery function may fail.
0
If an error occurs on one of the cards while
recording is in progress in the Dual Rec mode,
recording of the erroneous card stops, while that
of the other card continues.
0
Operations on clips recorded in the Dual Rec
mode, such as clip deletion in the Media mode
or appending of OK marks, can only be
performed on the card in the selected slot.
Backup Rec
0
The Backup Rec mode allows you to make use
of the media in slot B for backup recording by
controlling
the
starting and stopping of recording
in slot B without using the [REC] button.
0
Start or stop the recording using [System]
B
[Record Set] B [Slot Mode] B [Backup Rec] or
press the user button that is assigned with
“Backup Trig”.
(A P153
[ Slot Mode ] )
(
A P116 [User Switch Set Item] )
.
Slot B
Slot A
Clip 3
Clip 2
Clip 1
Clip 2
Slot B stops
recording
Slot A stops
recording
Slot A starts
recording
Slot B starts
recording
Memo :
0
During the Backup Rec mode (when [Slot
Mode] is set to “Backup”), you can control
recording to the 2 slots at different timings, and
backup
recording can only be performed on this
camera recorder.
(A P
153 [ Slot Mode ] )
0
You can record without worrying about missing
the important scenes by setting slot B to be
always recording (backup recording) and using
the [REC] button to start/stop recording of only
the required scenes in slot A.
0
It is recommended to use a media with high
capacity in slot B.
0
Backup cannot be selected when [W
Format] is
configured to “High-Speed”, “Exchange” (U
model) or “MP4
” (E model).
Dual Rec
89
Shooting
1
Set [System] B [Record Set] B [Slot Mode]
to “
Backup”.
(A P
153 [ Slot Mode ] )
0
The slot
mode can be identified on the status
screen.
2
Start backup recording. (Backup recording
into slot B)
0
Select “REC” in [System]
B [Record Set] B
[Slot Mode] B [Backup Rec] and press the
Set button (R).
(A P153
[ Slot Mode ] )
0
You can also press the user button that is
assigned with “Backup Trig”.
(
A P116 [User Switch Set Item] )
0
Backup recording into slot B starts.
0
The card slot mark of slot B turns red
(selected state), and the status indicator of
slot B also blinks in red.
.
100min
50min
282min
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
4030 20 10 0
50min
100min
Red (selected)
3
Start normal recording (normal recording
into slot A)
0
Press any of the [REC] buttons.
0
Recording into the media in slot A starts.
(The characters “
RREC” appear in red.)
0
The
card
icon of slot A turns red (unselected
state), and the status indicator of slot A blinks
in red.
.
100min
50min
282min
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
4030 20 10 0
50min
100min
Red (not selected)
4
Stop normal recording.
0
Press any of the [REC]
buttons again.
0
Recording to slot A stops, and the card slot
mark of
slot A turns white (unselected state).
0
The characters “RREC” (red) changes back
to “STBY” (white).
0
The status indicator of slot A goes out.
.
100min
50min
282min
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
4030 20 10 0
50min
100min
White (not selected)
90
Backup Rec
Shooting
5
Stop backup recording.
0
Select [STBY] in [System] B [Record Set] B
[Slot Mode
] B [Backup Rec] and press the
Set button (R).
(A P153
[ Slot Mode ] )
0
You can also press the user button that is
assigned with “Backup Trig”.
(
A P116 [User Switch Set Item] )
0
Recording to slot B stops, and the card slot
mark of
slot B turns white (unselected state).
0
The status indicator of slot B lights up in
green.
.
100min
50min
282min
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
4030 20 10 0
50min
100min
White
Memo :
0
During backup recording, if the space of one
card runs out, recording stops only for the card
that is full.
0
When recording to both slots is stopped,
recording in
the Regen mode will be enabled for
the card slot in which recording started.
0
When recording is started in the other slot while
recording to one slot, the clip being recorded is
split and simultaneous recording to the other
card starts.
0
When recording is stopped for either slot A or B
while recording to both slots, the clip on the slot
which is still recording is split.
0
Although the clips are separated during
recording the clips can be seamlessly joined by
arranging them on the timeline of the editing
software since they are recorded seamlessly.
0
Clip Cutter Trig cannot be performed during
backup recording.
(A P96 [Splitting the Clips Freely (Clip Cutter
Trig)] )
0
When [Slot Mode] is set to “Backup”, [Rec
Mode] can only be set to “Normal”.
(A P153
[ Rec Mode ] )
Special Recording
Besides the normal recording mode, four special
recording methods are available in this camera
recorder. They are Pre Rec, Clip Continuous,
Frame Rec and Interval Rec.
Select a mode from [System]
B [Record Set] B
[Rec Mode].
(A P153 [ Rec Mode ] )
Memo :
0
Special recording cannot be selected when
[System]
B
[Record Set]
B
[Record Format]
B
[System] is set to “4K EXT (SSD)”, “HD+Web” or
“High-Speed”.
Pre Rec
0
By setting the number of seconds in the [Pre Rec
Time], you can start recording video and audio
before actual recording starts based on the [Pre
Rec Time] setting.
0
When
starting
actual recording while the camera
recorder is in Recording Standby (STBYO)
mode, you can start recording a few seconds
earlier based on the [Pre Rec Time] setting.
0
Using Pre Rec allows you to record a complete
event without missing the initial scenes even if
you start the recording late.
Memo :
0
Pre
Rec
Time can be set in [System] B [Record
Set] B [Rec Mode] B [Pre Rec Time].
0
When [System] is set to “4K
”:
Fixed at “5sec”
0
When [System
]
is set to “HD” or “SD”:
“5sec”, “10sec” or “15sec”
(A P
153 [ Pre Rec Time ] )
Backup Rec
91
Shooting
.
(Recording stops)
Press [REC]
(Recording starts)
Press [REC]
Recording starts a
number of seconds
earlier based on the
[Pre Rec Time] setting
(Recorded video and audio)
Completed Clip
1
Set [Rec Mode] to “Pre Rec”.
(A P153 [ Rec Mode ] )
0
Set [System]
B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode]
to “Pre Rec”.
0
The display changes (
“STBY”
B “STBYO”).
2
Press the [REC] button to start recording in
Pre Rec mode.
0
The display
changes (“STBYO B RRECO”)
and the card slot status indicator lights up in
red.
0
Press the [REC
] button again to pause
recording. The display changes (“RRECO B
“STBYO”) and the card slot status indicator
lights up in green.
Caution :
0
When the interval between start and stop
recording is short, “STBY
O” may not be
displayed immediately after recording is
complete.
RRECO B “STBYO” (“STBY” blinks in red) B
“STBYO” is displayed.
0
When the SD card becomes full during
recording, recording stops and
“STOP” is
displayed.
0
In the following cases, video and audio before
the specified
Pre Rec time may not be recorded
even if recording starts.
0
Immediately after power on
0
Immediately after recording stops
0
Immediately after switching from Media
mode to Camera mode
0
Immediately after setting [
Rec Mode]
0
Immediately after the end of Clip Review
0
Immediately after changing file format
0
Immediately after changing video format
Clip Continuous Rec
0
In normal recording, when the recording stops,
the image,
audio, and accompanying data from
the start till the end of the recording are recorded
as one “clip” on the SD card.
0
This mode allows you to consolidate several
rounds of “startstop recording
” into one clip.
Example:
In normal recording, three clips are generated as
Recording 1, Recording 2, and Recording 3.
However, recording in this mode generates only
one clip.
.
(Recorded video and audio)
Completed Clip
Recording 3
Recording 2
Recording 1
Recording 3
Recording 2
Recording 1
(Recording stops)
Press and hold [REC]
(Recording pauses)
Press [REC]
(Recording pauses)
Press [REC]
(Recording resumes)
Press [REC]
(Recording resumes)
Press [REC]
(Recording starts)
Press [REC]
1
Set “Rec Mode” to “Clip Continuous”.
(A P153 [ Rec Mode ] )
0
Set [System]
B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode]
to “Clip Continuous”.
0
The display changes (
“STBY”
B “STBYL”).
2
Start recording. (Recording 1)
0
Press the [REC] button to start recording in
Clip Continuous mode.
0
The display
changes (“STBYL B RRECL”)
and the card slot status indicator lights up in
red.
92
Special Recording
Shooting
3
Pause recording.
0
Press the [REC]
button again to pause
recording. The display changes (“RRECL B
“STBYL” (yellow text)).
0
The
card
slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
Memo :
0
When the
[CANCEL] button is pressed while the
camera recorder is paused (STBYL), the
display changes (“STBYL” (yellow text) B
“STBYL” (blinking yellow text) B “STBYL
(white text)), and a “clip” is generated. The card
slot status indicator lights up in green.
4
Resume recording. (Recording 2)
0
Press the [REC] button again to resume
recording. The display changes (“STBYL
(yellow text) B RRECL”).
0
The
card
slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
5
Pause recording.
0
Press the [REC] button again to pause
recording.
The display changes (“RRECL B
“STBYL” (yellow text)).
0
The
card
slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
6
Resume recording. (Recording 3)
0
Press the [REC] button again to resume
recording. The display changes (“STBYL
(yellow text) B RRECL”).
0
The
card
slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
7
Press and hold the [REC] button.
0
Recording stops and the display changes
(“RRECL B “STBYL”). A “clip” is generated.
0
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
8
Press the [REC] button again.
0
The display
changes (“STBYL B RRECL”)
and the card slot status indicator lights up in
red.
0
A new “clip” is generated from here.
Memo :
0
The following operations cannot be performed
while recording
is paused (STBYL, yellow text).
0
Clip Review operation
(A P86 [Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately (Clip Review)] )
0
Switching SD card slots
0
Switching operation mode
(A P24 [Operation Modes] )
0
Files are split into sizes of 4 GB (or 30 minutes)
regardless of the menu settings.
Caution :
0
Do not remove the SD card during recording
(RRECL, red
text) or recording pause (STBYL,
yellow text).
0
To remove the SD card in the “Clip
Continuous” mode, press the [CANCEL] button,
check that “STBYL(white text) is displayed and
the card slot status indicator lights up in green
before you remove the card.
0
To remove the SD card in the
“Clip
Continuous”
mode, press the [CANCEL] button,
check that “STBYL(white text) is displayed and
the card slot status indicator lights up in green
before you remove the card.
0
When the SD card becomes full during
recording, recording stops and
“STOP
” is
displayed.
0
When the
[POWER ON/OFF] switch is turned off
during recording or recording pause, recording
stops and power is cut off after a clip is
generated.
0
If the power is cut off due to low battery power,
a proper clip may not be generated.
Special Recording
93
Shooting
Frame Rec
In normal recording, when the recording stops, the
image and
accompanying data from the start till the
end of the recording are recorded as one “clip” on
the SD card.
In this mode, recording starts with every press of
the [REC] button, and only the specified number of
frames is recorded.
The recording can be written to the media as a
single clip until it is stopped.
Memo :
0
Audio will not be recorded.
0
Until a specified amount of recordings is
accumulated, the file cannot be written to the
media.
0
If the specified amount is not reached when
recording is stopped, normal recording is
performed and frames are added to the ending
of
the
clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)
0
After the specified number of frames is recorded
and written to the media, recording will be
performed until the same number is
accumulated again.
.
Specific amount of data
Actual clips recorded to the media
Records number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]
(Padding data)
Normal recording
PausePausePause
Recording resumes
Recording resumes
Press [REC]Press [REC]
(Frame Rec stops)(Frame Rec starts)
Press and hold [REC]Press [REC]
1
Set [Rec Mode] to “Frame Rec”.
0
Set [System] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode
]
to “Frame Rec”.
(A P
153 [ Rec Mode ] )
0
The display changes (“STBY
B “STBYM”).
2
Set the number of frames to record in [Rec
Frames].
0
To configure the setting, go to
[System]
B
[Record Set] B [Rec Mode] B [Rec Frames].
(A P
153 [ Rec Frames ] )
3
Start recording.
0
Press the [REC] button to record only the
number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]
and pause.
0
The display changes (“STBYM
B RRECM
B “STBYM” (yellow text)).
0
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
4
Repeat Frame Rec.
0
Press the [REC]
button again to record only
the number of frames specified in [Rec
Frames] and pause.
0
The display changes (
“STBYM
B RRECM
B “STBYM” (yellow text)).
0
Frame Rec continues until the recording is
stopped (step 5).
5
Press and hold the [REC] button.
0
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
Caution :
0
Do not remove the SD card during recording
(“RRECM”, red text) or recording pause
(“STBYM”, yellow text).
0
To
remove
the SD card during Frame Rec, press
the [CANCEL] button, check that “STBYM
(white text) is displayed and the card slot status
indicator lights up in green before you remove
the card.
0
When [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] is set to “Free
Run” or “Free Run(Ext)
”, the time code will be
recorded in “Rec Run”.
0
Audio cannot be recorded. The audio level
meter is grayed out.
(A P
160 [Audio Level Meter] )
94
Special Recording
Shooting
Interval Rec
In normal recording, when the recording stops, the
image and
accompanying data from the start till the
end of the recording are recorded as one “clip” on
the SD card.
In this mode, recording and pause are performed
repeatedly at the specified time interval. Only the
specified number of frames is recorded.
The recording can be written to the media as a
single clip until it is stopped.
Memo :
0
Audio will not be recorded.
0
Until a specified amount of recordings is
accumulated, the file will not be written to the
media.
0
After the
specified number of frames is recorded
and written to the media, recording will be
performed until the same number is
accumulated again.
0
If the specified amount is not reached when
recording is stopped, normal recording is
performed and frames are added to the ending
of the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)
.
Specific amount of data
Actual clips recorded to the media
Records number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]
(Padding data)
Normal recording
PausePausePause
[Rec Interval][Rec Interval]
Recording resumes
Recording resumes
(Interval Rec stops)(Interval Rec starts)
Press [REC]Press [REC]
1
Set [Rec Mode] to “Interval Rec”.
0
Set [System] B [Record Set] B [
Rec Mode]
to “Interval Rec”.
(
A P
153 [ Rec Mode ] )
0
The display changes (“STBY”
B “STBYN”).
2
Set the number of frames to record in [Rec
Frames].
To configure the setting, go to [System] B
[Record Set
]
B [Rec Mode] B [Rec Frames].
(A P153 [ Rec Frames ] )
3
Set the time interval to start recording in
[Interval Rec
].
To configure the setting, go to [System] B
[Record Set]
B [Rec Mode] B [Rec Interval].
(A P153 [ Rec Interval ] )
4
Start recording.
0
Press the [REC
] button to record only the
number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]
and pause.
0
After the specified time in [Rec Interval] has
passed,
recording
starts again to record only
the number of frames specified in [Rec
Frames] and pause.
0
Interval Rec continues until the recording is
stopped.
The display changes (
“STBY
N B RRECN
B “STBYN” (red text) B RRECN B
“STBYN” (red text)).
0
The
card slot status indicator lights up in red.
5
Press the [REC] button.
0
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
0
The display becomes “STBYN
”.
Caution :
0
Do not remove the SD card during recording
(RRECN, red
text) or recording pause (STBYN,
yellow text).
0
To remove the SD card during Interval Rec,
press the [CANCEL] button, check that “STBYN
(white text) is displayed and the card slot status
indicator lights up in green before you remove
the card.
0
When [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] is set to “Free
Run” or “Free Run(Ext)
”, the time code will be
recorded in “Rec Run”.
0
Audio cannot be recorded. The audio level
meter is grayed out.
(A P
160 [Audio Level Meter] )
Special Recording
95
Shooting
Splitting the Clips Freely
(Clip Cutter Trig)
You can
split the clips freely without having to stop
recording during shooting.
1
Assign the “Clip Cutter Trig” function to
any of the user buttons.
(A P
46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
2
Press
the user button that is assigned with
“Clip Cutter Trig”
during shooting.
A clip cut icon (Q) appears on the display
screen for 3 seconds, and the clip is split.
.
100min
50min
282min
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
4030 20
10
0
Memo :
0
Clips cannot be split again for a few seconds
after the operation is performed.
0
This item cannot be used when [
Slot Mode] is
set to “Backup”.
0
This item cannot be used when
[
Rec Mode] is
set to a value other than “Normal” or “Pre Rec”.
(A P153
[ Rec Mode ] )
0
The split clips are recorded seamlessly without
interruptions in the video.
0
When “4K EXT (SSD)
”, Exchange (U model) or
MP4 (E model) is selected, the clip cutter
function cannot be used.
Configuring Infrared
Recording
This camera recorder comes with a infrared
recording mode
that is suitable for night recording.
Using infrared illumination allows images to be
captured naturally in a pitch-dark environment. It is
recommended for observation of animals without
alerting them or for natural facial expressions
without firing glaring flash light at the subject.
1
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.
2
Set [Camera
Function]
B [Infrared] to “On”.
A “I” icon appears.
Caution :
0
Do not use infrared recording for capturing
strong light sources or heat sources. Doing so
may damage the camera recorder.
Memo :
0
The settings are fixed as followed when it is
configured to “On”.
0
Manual focus
0
ND Filter“OFF”
0
[Camera Function]
B [Focus] B [AF Assist]
and [MF Assist] appear as “---”.
0
All items other than
[Color Space] and
[Reverse Picture
] under [Camera Process]
appear as “---”.
0
The zoom and focus positions will be initialized
after the settings are changed.
0
When
[
Infrared] is configured to “On”, if the type
of light source changes after focus is
established, the image may go out of focus.
96
Splitting the Clips Freely (Clip Cutter Trig)
Shooting
Playing Recorded Clips
To play back clips recorded in a recording media,
switch to the Media mode.
Press and
hold the [MODE] selection button in the
Camera mode to enter the Media mode. A
thumbnail screen of the clips recorded on the
recording media is displayed.
You can play back the selected clip on the
thumbnail screen.
Memo :
0
When a recording media without any clips is
inserted, “No Clips
” is displayed.
Operation Buttons
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel
or front side of the camera recorder to operate the
thumbnail screen.
.
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
ONLINE/3
OIS/2
FOCUS ASSIST/1
TIME CODE
DISPLAY STATUS
H
I
AD B C
EFG
A
[MENU/THUMB]
Button
0
Displays the menu.
0
Press this button to close the menu screen
during menu display and return to the
thumbnail screen.
B
Cross-Shaped Button (JKHI)
Moves the cursor.
C
Set (Play) Button
0
Sets the values and items. (Confirm)
0
Plays back the selected clip.
D
[CANCEL] (Stop) Button
Cancels settings and returns to the previous
screen.
E
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] Button
0
Switches the
OK mark of the clip selected by
the cursor.
0
If an OK mark has been appended, it will be
deleted. Otherwise, an OK mark will be
appended.
F
[OIS/2] Button
0
Switches the selection status of the clip
selected by the cursor.
0
Clips being selected are displayed with
check mark.
G
[ONLINE/3] Button
Enters the action selection screen.
H
[DISPLAY] Button
Switches between the “Standard Screen” and
“Detailed Screen
”.
I
[STATUS] Button
Displays the media information screen.
Thumbnail Screen
0
“Standard Screen” and “Detailed Screen
” are
available.
Use the [DISPLAY] button to switch between the
screens.
0
Thumbnails are displayed in order of recording
from the oldest to most recent.
Standard screen
.
A
J
H
C
B
G
E
D
F
I
K
A
Recording Media Information
0
Displays the
status when repair is required for
the selected recording media or the status of
the write-protect switch for the SD card.
0
The inserted recording media will not be
displayed if [System] is different.
0
Use the [SLOT SEL] button to switch
between slots A and B. Clips from different
slots cannot be displayed at the same time.
W
z
:
Write-protect switch of the SD card
in slot A is set.
S
:
SD card in slot B needs to be
restored or formatted, or is an
unsupported SD card.
G
:
SSD media in [EXT.SLOT
]
Playing Recorded Clips
97
Playback
B
Clip Mark
Displays the clip information (properties).
.
A
B
D
E
C
A
OK Mark
Clip is appended with OK mark.
Memo :
0
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
deleted on the camera recorder.
B
Continued From Mark
This mark indicates that the current clip is
continued from another SD card when
recording is divided and made on several SD
cards.
C
Uneditable Mark
0
This mark indicates that an OK mark cannot
be
appended
to or deleted from the clip, and
the clip cannot be deleted.
D
Continue Mark
This mark
indicates that recording of the current
clip is continued to another SD card when
recording is divided and made on several SD
cards.
E
Check Mark
0
A green check mark is displayed when the
clip is selected.
0
Magenta and gray check marks are
displayed in multiple selection mode.
(A
P104 [Selecting and Performing
Operations on Multiple Clips] )
C
Cursor
Clip to be worked on. Use the cross-shaped
button (
JKHI) to move the cursor.
D
Thumbnail Substitution Display
.
A B
A
A clip with corrupted management information.
It cannot be played back even if you press the
Set (Play) button.
B
A
clip
that cannot be played back nor displayed
in thumbnail with the current video format
settings.
It cannot be played back even if you press the
Set (Play) button.
Memo :
0
This is dependent on the [System], [Format],
[Resolution], [Frame Rate
] and [Bit Rate]
settings in the [System] B Record Set B [Record
Format] menu.
(A
P149 [ System ] )
E
Clip Name
The file
name (clip number) of the selected clip
is displayed.
F
Operation Guide
0
Displays a guide for the current operation
buttons.
0
The action selection screen is displayed
when the [ONLINE/3] button is pressed.
(
A P99 [Actions] )
G
Recording Start Time
Displays the recording start time of the clip.
Memo :
0
The date/time display is dependent on the
settings in [System] B [Date Style]/[Time Style].
(A P148 [ Date Style ] )
(
A P149 [ Time Style ] )
H
Scroll Bar
0
Indicates the scroll position.
0
Black space below the scroll bar (white)
indicates that there are more pages.
0
When the scroll bar (white) is at the bottom,
this indicates the last page.
I
Remaining Battery Power
(A P37 [Power Status Display] )
J
Number of Clips
0
If none
of the clips are selected, the “running
number/total number of clips” of the clip to be
displayed appears.
0
Even if only one clip is selected, the number
of selected clips in the current slot is
displayed.
K
Network Connection Icon
0
The network connection status is displayed.
98
Playing Recorded Clips
Playback
Detailed screen
* Items that
are common with the Standard screen
will not be described. Refer to “[Standard
screen] (A P 97)”.
.
C
B
A
A
Thumbnail
Thumbnail of the clip selected by the cursor.
Use the
cross-shaped button (HI) to move the
cursor.
B
Scroll Mark (DE)
0
If there are previous clips, D appears on the
left.
0
If there
are more clips, E appears on the right.
0
The marks will not be displayed if there are
no clips before and after the current clip.
C
Metadata
Metadata of the clip pointed by the cursor.
You can use the cross-shaped button (JK) to
scroll.
Actions
The action selection screen is displayed when the
[ONLINE/3] button is pressed.
The following operations can be performed.
Item Description
Select All Clips Selects all clips.
Select OK
Marked
Selects all clips appended with
OK mark.
Select Range Specifies the range when
selecting multiple clips.
(A P
104 [Selecting Multiple
Clips Randomly] )
Deselect All
Clears all clip selections.
Add OK Mark Appends an OK mark.
0
This Clip:
Appends an OK mark to the
clip pointed by the cursor.
0
Selected Clips:
Appends an OK mark to the
clips selected (appended
with check mark).
0
All Clips:
Appends an OK mark to all
clips.
Delete OK Mark Deletes the OK mark.
0
This Clip:
Deletes the OK mark of the
clip pointed by the cursor.
0
Selected Clips:
Deletes the OK mark of the
clips selected (appended
with check mark).
0
All Clips:
Deletes the OK mark of all
clips.
Playing Recorded Clips
99
Playback
Item Description
FTP Upload Uploads a clip to the FTP server.
0
This Clip:
Uploads the clip pointed by
the cursor.
0
Selected Clips:
Uploads the clips selected
(appended with check
mark).
0
All Clips:
Uploads all clips.
Delete Clips Deletes clip. However, clips with
OK mark cannot be deleted.
0
This Clip:
Deletes the clip pointed by
the cursor.
0
Selected Clips:
Deletes the clips selected
(appended with check
mark).
0
All Clips:
Deletes all clips.
Trim This Clip Trims the clip pointed by the
cursor.
Memo :
0
The object
of action is the clip of the current slot
being displayed.
0
[Selected Clips] cannot be performed if there are
no selected (appended with check mark) clips.
0
[This Clip
] cannot be performed if there are more
than one selected (appended with check mark)
clips.
0
If the write-protect switch of an SD card is set,
OK mark cannot be appended or deleted, and
the clips cannot be deleted and trimmed.
Playing back
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel
of the camera recorder to play back.
.
SHUTTERWHT BALGAIN
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
ONLINE/3
OIS/2
FOCUS ASSIST/1
TIME CODE
C
B
A
A
Set Button (R)
0
Plays back/pauses the clip pointed by the
cursor.
0
You can
press the cross-shaped button (HI)
to perform frame-by-frame forward playback
during pause mode.
B
Cross-shaped Button (JKH I)
0
[J/K] Button:
Skips in the reverse or forward direction.
0
[H/I] Button:
0
During Playback:
Fast forwards in the reverse or forward
direction.
0
While paused:
Frame-by-frame playback in the reverse
or forward direction.
C
[CANCEL] Button
Stops playback.
1
In the thumbnail screen, move the cursor to
the clip to be played back.
Move the cursor to the clip to be played back
using the cross-shaped button (JKH I).
2
Press the Set button (R).
Playback of the selected clip starts.
Audio Output during Playback
0
You can confirm the playback sound from the
monitor speaker, or the headphone connected
to the [x] terminal. When a headphone is
connected
to
the [x] terminal, sound cannot be
output from the monitor speaker.
(A P176 [Connect the headphone.] )
0
Adjust the volume of the monitor speaker and
headphone using the [MONITOR +/-] volume
adjustment button on the LCD monitor section
of the camera recorder.
100
Playing Recorded Clips
Playback
Time Code Playback
Time code
or user’s bit recorded on an SD card can
be displayed on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Memo :
0
The time code is also superimposed on the
video
signal
output from the [SDI OUT] terminal.
0
If a
section without time code is played back, the
time code will stop. However, playback will
continue.
Displaying Information during Shooting
During playback, pressing the [DISPLAY] button
shows the display screen. Pressing the
[ONLINE/3] button during shooting switches the
display information between camera information
display, GPS display and turning off the display.
0
The GPS display displays information on the
recording location of the video being played
back only when GPS information has been
recorded.
0
Camera information display displays only
information of Gain, Iris, Shutter and White
Balance that have been recorded.
.
5600K
1/100
F1.6
0
dB
+35.483197
+139.652172
GPS Display
Camera Information Display
Display Off
Memo :
0
Trimming information is displayed while
trimming is
in progress. In this case, pressing the
[ONLINE/3] button does not switch the display.
Playing Recorded Clips
101
Playback
Deleting Clips
Delete clip.
Memo :
0
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
deleted on the camera recorder.
0
Read-only clips can be deleted on a PC.
Deleting One Clip
Delete the clip (one clip) pointed by the cursor in
[Delete Clips]
B [This Clip] in the menu.
Memo :
0
Clips with OK mark cannot be deleted.
During Thumbnail Screen
1
Move the cursor to the clip to be deleted.
Move the cursor to the clip to be deleted using
the cross-shaped button (JKH I).
.
1
2
Press the [ONLINE/3] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
3
Select [Delete Clips] B
[This Clip] and press
the Set button (R).
A screen to confirm deletion appears.
.
3
All Clips
Selected Clips
This Clip
4
Select [Delete] using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
Deleting starts.
.
4
Stop
Deleting...
Cancel
Delete
Delete This Clip?
Selecting and Deleting Multiple Clips
To select and delete multiple clips, refer to
“[Selecting and
Performing Operations on Multiple
Clips] (A P 104)”.
Deleting All Clips
Delete all clips that are displayed.
1
Press the [ONLINE/3] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
2
Select [Delete Clips] B [All Clips
].
A screen to confirm deletion appears.
3
Select [Delete
] and press the Set button
(R).
Deleting starts.
Memo :
0
The time taken to delete clips depends on the
number of clips to be deleted.
102
Deleting Clips
Playback
Appending/Deleting OK
Mark
0
You can append OK marks to the clips for
important scenes.
0
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
deleted, thus protecting the important clips.
0
When the camera recorder is in Media mode,
you can delete the OK marks appended during
recording, or append/delete OK marks after
shooting.
During Thumbnail Screen
1
Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
0
If the clip does not have an OK mark, an OK
mark will be appended.
0
If the clip is appended with an OK mark, the
OK mark will be deleted.
.
OK Mark
During Playback or Pause Screen
1
Press [FOCUS
ASSIST/1
] button during clip
playback.
0
If the clip does not have an OK mark, an OK
mark will be appended.
0
If the clip is appended with an OK mark, the
OK mark will be deleted.
.
OK Mark
Memo :
0
The clip pauses when an OK mark is appended
or deleted during playback.
Appending/Deleting OK Mark of
Multiple Clips
To select and append/delete OK mark for multiple
clips, refer to “[Selecting and Performing
Operations on Multiple Clips] (A P
104)”.
Appending/Deleting OK Mark
103
Playback
Selecting and Performing
Operations on Multiple
Clips
0
Multiple clips can be selected during thumbnail
screen or playback screen display.
0
After selecting multiple clips, perform
appending/deleting
of
OK mark, deleting of clips
using the action selection screen.
0
After selecting multiple clips, the selections will
be canceled by the following operations.
0
When [Deselect All] in the action menu is
selected
0
When exiting
Media mode from the thumbnail
screen
0
When the recording media is removed
0
When switching the slot in use
Selecting Multiple Clips Randomly
1
Move the cursor to a clip without a check
mark, and press the [
[OIS/2] button.
A green check mark appears on the clip.
.
1
2
Repeat Step 1 to select multiple clips.
0
Multiple clips can be selected.
0
Press the [ONLINE/3] button while the
multiple clips are selected.
0
Appends OK mark together:
[Add OK Mark] B [Selected Clips]
0
Deletes OK mark together:
[Delete OK Mark
] B [Selected Clips]
0
Uploading selected
clips to the FTP server
together:
[FTP Upload] B [Selected Clips]
0
Deletes selected clips together:
[Delete Clips]
B [Selected Clips]
Memo :
0
Selecting clips appended with check mark and
pressing the [OIS/2] button will cancel the
selection.
0
If the
operation is performed on multiple clips at
the same time, a progress bar appears. You can
stop the operation by pressing the Set button (R)
while the operation is in progress. However, it is
not possible to undo operations that are
completed.
104
Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple Clips
Playback
Selecting Multiple Clips Consecutively
1
Press the [ONLINE/3] button.
2
Select “Select Range” in the action
selection screen, and press the Set button
(R).
.
FTP Upload...
Delete OK Mark...
Add OK Mark...
Deselect All
Select Range
Select OK Marked
Select All Clips
2
3
Move the cursor to the beginning (or end)
of the range for multiple selection, and
press the Set button (R).
4
Move the cursor to the other end of the
range.
0
Magenta check marks appear on the clips
within the range. (Including clips that were
already selected.)
0
Gray check marks appear on selected clips
that are outside the range.
.
3
4
Selected Range:
Selected Range:
End Position
Start Position
5
Press the Set button (R) to confirm the
range.
0
The check marks change from magenta to
green.
0
Pressing the [ONLINE/3
] button while the
multiple clips are selected displays the action
selection screen. The following operations
can be performed.
0
Appends OK mark together:
[Add OK Mark]
B [Selected Clips]
0
Deletes OK mark together:
[Delete OK Mark]
B [Selected Clips]
0
Uploading selected
clips to the FTP server
together:
[FTP Upload] B [Selected Clips]
0
Deletes selected clips together:
[Delete Clips]
B [Selected Clips]
Memo :
0
Selecting clips appended with check mark and
pressing the [[OIS/2] button will cancel the
selection.
0
If the
operation is performed on multiple clips at
the same time, a progress bar appears. You can
stop the operation by pressing the Set button (R)
while the operation is in progress. However, it is
not possible to undo operations that are
completed.
Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple Clips
105
Playback
Trimming Recorded Clips
It is
possible to crop (trim) the necessary parts of a
clip that is recorded to the recording media.
The trimmed clip is saved as a separate file to the
recording media and the original clip remains
intact.
1
Switch to Media mode.
Switch the mode using the [MODE] selection
button on the side operation panel.
2
Move the cursor to the clip to be trimmed.
Move the cursor to the clip to be trimmed using
the cross-shaped button (JKH I).
.
2
3
Press the [ONLINE/3] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
4
Select [Trim This Clip], and press the Set
button (R).
Playback of the selected clip starts.
.
Jan 24,2019
3840x2160
30p 140M
282min
12 :34 :56
00: 00:00.00
1000/2000
0
4030 20 10 0
30min
11:22:33.00
11:23:44.00
00: 08:22
TRIM
OUT
IN
Trim This Clip
Delete Clips...
FTP Upload...
Delete OK Mark...
Add OK Mark...
Deselect All
Select Range
A
B
C
4
A
Guide
Operation guide
B
Position bar
6
: Current position of the video
7
:
Position to start trimming (in point)
8
: Position to end trimming (out point)
C
Trimming information
W or Y : Indicates the available space in
the storage media (W
or Y)
7
: Indicates the time code of the in
point
8
: Indicates the time code of the out
point
9
: Indicates the duration from the in
point to the out point
Memo :
0
The
trimmed
clip will be saved to the same card
slot as that of the original clip.
0
[Duration] appears in yellow if the duration is 10
minutes or longer. Trimming cannot be
performed in this case.
0
When [System
] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [WFrame Rate] is set to “
70M (XHQ)”, [Duration] appears
in yellow if the
duration is 6 minutes or longer. Trimming
cannot be performed in this case.
0
When [System] B [Record Set]
B [Record
Format] B [System] is configured to “4K EXT
(SSD)” or “4K”, [Duration] appears in yellow if
it is 3 minutes or longer. Trimming cannot be
performed in this case.
0
[Duration
] appears in yellow if the duration is
longer than the recordable time on the storage
media. Trimming cannot be performed in this
case.
0
When trimming starts, the display switches to
the Media Display screen.
5
Specify the in point.
0
Operate
buttons
such as H/I or J/K to move
the video to the in point.
(A P100 [Playing back] )
0
Specify the in point by pressing the [FOCUS
ASSIST/1] button at the point you want to
start trimming.
6
Specify the out point.
0
Operate buttons
such as H/I or J/K to move
the video to the out point.
(A P100 [Playing back] )
0
Specify the out point by pressing the [OIS/2]
button at the point you want to end trimming.
7
Perform trimming.
Press the [ONLINE/3] button to perform
trimming.
Memo :
0
While trimming
is in progress, you can press the
[CANCEL] button to return to the thumbnail
screen.
0
When trimming the in and out point, the in point
trimmed may be up to one second before the
specified in
point and the out point trimmed may
be up to one second behind the specified out
point.
106
Trimming Recorded Clips
Playback
Basic Operations in Menu
Screen
0
Pressing the [MENU/THUMB] button displays
the menu screen on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder.
0
Various settings for shooting and playback can
be configured on the menu screen.
0
There are two types of menu screens -
[Main
Menu] and [Favorites Menu].
0
[Main Menu
]
contains all the setting items of the
camera recorder, classified according to
functions and uses, while [Favorites Menu]
allows users to customize the menu items freely.
(A P
155 [Adding/Editing Frequently Used
Menu Items (Favorites Menu)] )
0
The operating procedures and main screen
displays are the same for both menus.
0
The menu screen can also be displayed on
external monitors connected to the [SDI OUT]
terminal.
(
A P130 [ Character ] )
Operation Buttons
To operate the menu, use the cross-shaped
buttons on the side operation panel of the camera
recorder or
the cross-shaped buttons at the front of
the camera or at the bottom of the lens.
.
AE LOCK/4
ZEBRA/5
MARKER/6
SHUTTERWHT BALGAIN
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
ONLINE/3
OIS/2
FOCUS ASSIST/1
TIME CODE
STATUSDISPLAY
PEAKING
C
8
V
CH2
C
F
B
E
D
A
G
A
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] Button
Adds the
selected menu or submenu item to the
[Favorites Menu].
B
[OIS/2] Button
Resets settings in the [TC Preset] or [UB
Preset] setting screen.
C
[MENU/THUMB] Button
0
Displays the menu screen. The
[Main
Menu]
screen is displayed by default.
0
During normal usage, [Main Menu
]
is
displayed if the previous menu operation
ended at [Main Menu], and [Favorites
Menu] if the previous menu operation ended
at [Favorites Menu].
0
Press this button to close the menu screen
during
menu
display and return to the normal
screen.
0
Pressing and holding down the button while
the menu is displayed switches the [Main
Menu] screen to the [Favorites Menu] or vice
versa.
D
Set Button (R)
Sets the values and items.
E
Cross-shaped Button (JKH I)
J
:
Moves the cursor upward.
K
:
Moves the cursor downward.
H
: Moves back to the previous item.
I
: Moves forward to the next item.
F
[CANCEL] Button
Cancels settings and returns to the previous
screen.
G
[DISPLAY] Button
Switches between the [Main Menu] and
[Favorites Menu] screens.
Basic Operations in Menu Screen
107
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Display and Description of the Menu
Screen
Selecting Menu Items
.
AddFavorites
SECShutter
24hourTime Style
YMDDate Style
OnDate/Time
TimeBattery
OffAudio Meter
Display Settings
H
I
F
E
B
D
G
A
C
A
Cursor
Indicates the selected item. Use the cross-
shaped button (JK) to move the cursor
B
Menu Item
0
Displays the names of the menu item and
sub-menu.
0
Menu
items
with [...] after them indicates that
there is a sub-menu to access.
C
Fixed Item
Items that cannot be changed are displayed in
gray and cannot be selected.
D
Operation Guide
Guide for the current operation buttons.
E
Setting Value
Setting values for the menu items.
For menus with sub-menus, values are not
displayed.
F
Scroll Bar
Indicates the scroll position.
G
Header
Indicates the current menu type with the line
color.
Blue
: [Main Menu] Screen
Green : [Favorites Menu] (Operation
screen)
Magenta : [Favorites Menu] (Editing screen)
H
Remaining Battery Power
(A P37 [Power Status Display] )
Memo :
0
If the
supplied battery (or equivalent battery sold
separately) is not used, the battery mark which
indicates the battery level may not appear.
I
Menu Title
Title of the currently displayed menu.
Changing Setting Values
.
CancelSet
Off
SECShutter
24hourTime Style
YMDDate Style
Date/Time
Battery
Audio Meter
Display Settings
On
D
F
A
C
B
E
A
Menu Item to Change
Menu item to be changed.
A list of setting values F appears in a pop-up.
B
Operation Guide
Guide for the current operation buttons.
C
Setting Values Before Change
Setting values before changing. The
background of the item is displayed in blue.
D
Scroll Bar
Indicates the scroll position.
E
Cursor
Indicates the selected item. Use the cross-
shaped button (JK) to move the cursor
F
List of Setting Values
0
A
pop-up displaying a list of setting values for
selection.
0
The height of the pop-up depends on the
number of settings available. Use the scroll
bar D to confirm the current display status.
108
Basic Operations in Menu Screen
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Text Input with Software Keyboard
Use the software keyboard to enter the [Setup
File]
subname, [Clip Name Prefix], and the settings
under [Network].
Entering a subname
(A P172
[Configuring Setup Files] )
.
G
A
E
H
C
B
D
F
Entering the [Clip Name Prefix]
(A P154 [ Clip Name Prefix ] )
.
Cancel
Set
A
E
H
C
B
D
Settings under [Network]
The keyboard displayed varies according to the
settings.
(A P
135 [Network Menu] )
.
A
H
C
G
D
B
E
F
I
A
Character Entry Field
0
Field for entering the title.
0
You can enter up to 8 characters for the
[Setup File] subname or up to 4 characters
for the [Clip Name Prefix].
B
Character Cursor
Select a
character using the key cursor D, and
press the Set button (R) to input the selected
character at the position of the character cursor.
The character cursor moves to the next position
on the right each time a character is input.
The cursor can be moved using the arrow keys
H.
C
Character Keys
Use the cross-shaped button (JKHI) to move
the key cursor D to the character you want to
enter.
D
Key Cursor
Indicates the currently selected character or
item. Use the cross-shaped button (JKHI) to
move the cursor.
E
Confirmation Buttons
0
Select
[Set]/
[Store] and press the Set button
(R) to confirm the title.
0
Select [
Cancel] and press the Set button (R)
on the side control panel of the camera
recorder to abort character input and return
to the previous screen.
F
[SP] Space Key
Select [SP
] and press the Set button (R) on the
side control panel of the camera recorder to
enter a space at the current position of the
character cursor B.
G
[3 ] Backspace Key
Select [3 ] and press the Set button (R) on the
side control panel of the camera recorder to
delete the character on the left of the character
cursor B.
H
Arrow Keys
Moves the position of the character cursor B.
I
Character Switch Button
Switches the character buttons C to the upper
case, lower case, and symbols.
Basic Operations in Menu Screen
109
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Menu Screen Hierarchical
Chart
[Main Menu...] .....................................
(A P 110)
- [Camera Function...] ....................... (A P 111)
-
[Bars] .......................................... (A P 111)
-
[OIS] ........................................... (A P 111)
- [Shutter] ...................................... (A P 111)
- [AE Level] ................................... (A P 111)
- [AE Speed] ................................. (A P 111)
- [AE Area] .................................... (A P 111)
- [AGC Limit] ................................. (A P 111)
- [Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)] .............. (A P 112)
- [Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)] ............ (A P 112)
- [EEI Limit] ................................... (A P 112)
- [Smooth Trans] ........................... (A P 112)
- [GAIN L] ...................................... (A P 112)
- [GAIN M] ..................................... (A P 112)
- [GAIN H] ..................................... (A P 112)
- [Zoom...] ..................................... (A P 112)
- [Focus...] .................................... (A P 112)
- [Face Detection...] ...................... (A P 112)
- [Infrared] ..................................... (A P 113)
- [User Switch Set...] ..................... (A P 113)
- [KEYLOCK] ................................ (A P 113)
- [Menu Access] ............................ (A P 113)
- [Camera Angle[Tagging]] L .... (A P 113)
- [Camera Process...] ........................ (A P 118)
-
[Color Space] .............................
(A P 118)
- [Gamma] .................................... (A P 118)
- [Detail] ........................................ (A P 119)
- [Master Black] ............................ (A P 119)
- [Black Toe] ................................. (A P 120)
- [Knee] ......................................... (A P 120)
- [White Clip] ................................. (A P 121)
- [White Balance...] ....................... (A P 121)
- [Color Matrix] .............................. (A P 122)
- [Color Gain] ................................ (A P 122)
- [Reverse Picture] ........................ (A P 122)
- [Reset Process] .......................... (A P 122)
- [TC/UB...] ........................................ (A P 124)
- [TC Generator] ........................... (
A P 124)
- [TC Preset] ................................. (A P 124)
- [UB Mode] .................................. (A P 124)
- [Drop Frame] .............................. (A P 124)
- [LCD/VF...] ...................................... (A P 125)
-
[Shooting Assist...] ......................
(A P 125)
- [Marker Settings...] ..................... (A P 125)
- [Display Type...] .......................... (A P 125)
- [Display On/Off...] ....................... (A P 125)
- [VF Color] ................................... (A P 125)
- [VF Bright
] .................................. (A P 125)
-
[VF Contrast] .............................. (A P 125)
- [LCD Contrast] ............................ (A P 125)
- [LCD Backlight] .......................... (A P 125)
- [LCD Mirror] ................................ (A P 125)
- [Convert to ITU709] .................... (A P 125)
- [LCD RGB Gain] ......................... (A P 126)
- [VF RGB Gain] ............................ (A P 126)
- [A/V Set...] ....................................... (A P 130)
-
[Video Set...]
............................... (A P 130)
- [Audio Set...] ............................... (A P 132)
- [Network] ........................................ (A P 135)
-
[Connection Setup...] ..................
(A P 135)
- [Live Streaming...] ...................... (A P 135)
- [Return over IP...] ........................ (A P 135)
- [Web...] ....................................... (A P 135)
- [Metadata Server...] .................... (A P 135)
- [Upload Settings] ........................ (A P 135)
- [Import Metadata] ....................... (A P 135)
- [Zero Config] .............................. (A P 136)
- [Reset Network] .......................... (A P 136)
- [Overlay Settings...] A
L ......... (A P 144)
- [Overlay Function] ......................
(A P 144)
- [Layout] ...................................... (A P 144)
- [Import User Layout] ................... (A P 144)
- [Delete User Layout] ................... (A P 144)
- [Type] ......................................... (A P 144)
- [Overlay Custom Menu]L* ..... (A P 144)
- [Output...] ................................... (A P 144)
- [Sportzcast] L ........................ (A P 145)
- [Watermark] ................................ (A P 145)
- [Full Screen Graphic...] ............... (A P 145)
- [Password Lock] ......................... (A P 145)
- [System...] ....................................... (A P 147)
-
[Record Set...] ............................
(A P 147)
- [Media] ....................................... (A P 147)
- [Setup File] ................................. (A P 147)
- [Tally Lamp] ................................ (A P 147)
- [NETWORK LED] ....................... (A P 148)
- [STATUS LED] ........................... (A P 148)
- [LED Bright] ................................ (A P 148)
- [GPS] A L .......................... (A P 148)
- [Language] ................................. (A P 148)
- [Reset All] ................................... (A P 148)
- [Date/Time] ................................. (A P 148)
- [Date Style] ................................. (A P 148)
- [Time Style] ................................ (A P 149)
- [Time Zone] ................................ (A P 149)
- [Reserved] .................................. (A P 149)
- [System Information] ................... (A P 149)
Memo :
0
Some menus
cannot be set depending on the operating mode or status of the camera recorder. These
items are displayed in gray, and they cannot be selected.
0
Setting value with the R mark is the factory default.
* The display of the [Overlay Custom Menu] changes according to the imported data.
110
Menu Screen Hierarchical Chart
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Camera Function Menu
Menu screen for specifying operation settings
during shooting.
This item can only be selected in the Camera
mode.
Bars
For setting whether to output color bars.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
The audio test signals (1 kHz) can be output
simultaneously with the color bar output.
(A P133 [ Test Tone ] )
OIS
For setting whether to enable image stabilizer.
When “On
” is selected, set the Level.
To turn on the
[Hard Lock] function, configure OIS
to “Off”.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
(A P73 [Using the Image Stabilizer] )
9
Level
For setting the level of the image stabilizer.
[Setting Values: High, RNormal]
Memo :
0
The icon changes according to the level set.
(A P161 [Image Stabilizer Mark] )
0
When “High” is selected, correcting severe
camera shake may cause the area surrounding
the image to darken.
9
Hard Lock
When
the
Hard Lock feature is “On”, the IS (image
stabilization) lens is locked in place.
Use this feature when blurry image caused by
camera shake tends to occur due to strong
acceleration.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
(A P73 [About the Hard Lock Feature] )
Memo :
0
Camera shake that causes image blur occurs
when switching between “On” and “Off”.
Shutter
For specifying shutter-related settings.
Configure the value to “Step” (fixed value) or
“Variable
” when operating the shutter with the
cross-shaped button (J K) on the side of the
camera recorder unit.
0
Variable:
Sets to variable scan. Use this setting when
shooting a PC monitor.
0
Step:
Sets to step shutter, which switches the shutter
speed by a fixed value.
[Setting Values: Variable, RStep]
AE Level
For setting the convergence level during AE (Auto
Exposure).
This can also be adjusted using the cross-shaped
button (H I) on the side of the camera recorder
unit.
[Setting Values: -6 to +6 (R0)]
AE Speed
For setting
the convergence speed during AE (Auto
Exposure).
[Setting Values: RFast, Middle, Slow]
AE Area
For configuring the AE detection area.
[Setting Values: Center, Bottom, RNormal]
AGC Limit
For setting the maximum gain value of “AGC
”,
which electrically boosts the sensitivity level
according to the brightness automatically.
0
When [LCD/VF]
B [Display Type] B [Gain] is set
to “dB”:
[Setting Values: 24 dB, R18 dB, 12 dB, 6 dB]
0
When [
LCD/VF]
B [Display Type] B [Gain] is set
to “ISO”:
[Setting Values: ISO 12800, RISO 6400, ISO
3200, ISO 1600]
Memo :
0
When [FULL AUTO]
is set to “ON”, this item
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
Camera Function Menu
111
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)
For setting the limit value of the OPEN end when
auto iris is enabled.
[Setting Values: F5.6, F4, Open]
Memo :
0
When [FULL AUTO] is set to “ON
”, this item
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)
For setting the limit value of the CLOSE end when
auto iris is enabled.
[Setting Values: F16, RF11, F8, F5.6]
Memo :
0
When [FULL AUTO] is set to “ON
”, this item
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
EEI Limit
For setting the shutter speed control range when
the Automatic Shutter mode (EEI) is enabled.
[Setting Values: 4F-stop, R3F-stop, 2F-stop]
Memo :
0
When [FULL AUTO] is set to “ON
”, this item
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
Smooth Trans
For setting the shock reduction function, which
slows down the sudden change when switching
with the [GAIN]
or [WHT BAL] switch.
[Setting Values: Fast, Middle, Slow, ROff]
Memo :
0
This function is disabled when AGC is operating.
0
When “J-Log1” or “HLG” is selected for [Camera
Process] B [Color Space], the setting is fixed at
“Off” and the selection cannot be changed.
GAIN L, GAIN M, GAIN H
For setting the gain value of each position on the
[GAIN]
selection switch.
The setting is fixed at “AGC” in the Full Auto mode.
In addition, the sensitivity setting in [Lolux] is used.
(A P116 [ Lolux ] )
0
When [LCD/VF] B [Display
Type
] B [Gain] is set
to “dB”:
[Setting Values: 24 dB, 21 dB, 18 dB, 15 dB, 12
dB, 9 dB, 6 dB, 3 dB, 0 dB, -3 dB, -6 dB]
(Default values for GAIN L: 0dB, GAIN M: 6dB,
GAIN H: 12dB)
0
When [
LCD/VF]
B [Display Type] B [Gain] is set
to “ISO” and [Camera Process] B [Color
Space] is set to a value other than “HLG”:
[Setting Values: ISO12800, ISO10000,
ISO8000, ISO6400, ISO5000, ISO4000,
ISO3200, ISO2500, ISO2000, ISO1600,
ISO1250, ISO1000, ISO800, ISO640, ISO500,
ISO400]
(Default values for GAIN L: ISO800, GAIN M:
ISO1600, GAIN H: ISO3200)
Memo :
0
When “J-Log1” is selected for [
Camera
Process] B [Color Space], the base ISO speed
for achieving the 800% dynamic range of [J-
Log1] is “[ISO1250]”. The square brackets
appear only in the case of the base ISO.
Zoom...
For specifying zoom settings.
(A P113 [Zoom Function Settings] )
Focus...
For specifying focus settings.
(A P114 [Focus Function Settings] )
Face Detection...
For specifying face detection settings.
(A P115 [Face Detection Function Settings] )
112
Camera Function Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Infrared
When “On” is
selected, an I icon appears and the
camera recorder switches to the infrared recording
mode that is suitable for night recording.
Using infrared illumination allows images to be
captured naturally in a pitch-dark environment. It is
recommended for observation of animals without
alerting them or for natural facial expressions
without firing glaring flash light at the subject.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Caution :
0
Do not use infrared recording for capturing
strong light sources or heat sources. Doing so
may damage the camera recorder.
Memo :
0
This is fixed at “Off” when [FULL AUTO] is set to
“ON”.
0
The settings are fixed as followed when it is
configured to
“On”.
0
Manual focus
0
ND filter “OFF”
0
[Camera Function] B [Focus]
B [AF Assist]
and [MF Assist] appear as “---”.
0
All items other than [Color Space
]
and
[Reverse Picture] under [Camera Process]
appear as “---”.
0
The zoom and focus positions will be initialized
after the settings are changed.
0
When
[Infrared
] is configured to “On”, if the type
of light source changes after focus is
established, the image may go out of focus.
User Switch Set...
For specifying user button related settings.
(A P116 [User Switch Set Item] )
KEYLOCK
For specifying the settings when the [KEYLOCK]
switch is set to “ON”.
[Setting Values:
RKeylock Except Rec, Keylock
All]
Menu Access
For specifying settings on the behavior when
accessing the menu using the [MENU/THUMB]
button.
[Setting Values: Press and Hold, ROne Press]
Camera Angle[Tagging] L
For specifying tagging settings for the camera
angle.
[Setting Values: SB, RSL, EZ, SL2, EZ2, TV]
Zoom Function Settings
Dynamic Zoom
For setting whether to enable the dynamic zoom
function.
0
On:
Enables the dynamic zoom (1x to 40x).
0
Off:
Enables only the optical zoom (1x to 20x).
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
When [System
] is set to “4K EXT (SSD)”, “4K” or
“High-Speed”, this item is fixed at “Off” and
cannot be selected.
0
When [Digital Extender
]
is set to “On”, “Off”
becomes fixed and cannot be selected.
9
Response
For specifying the speed of zoom response when
Dynamic Zoom is
“On”.
[Setting Values: Slow, RNormal]
Memo :
0
When [Dynamic Zoom] is “Off”, this item
appears as
“---” and cannot be selected.
Digital Extender
For specifying whether to magnify the image (by 2
times). When “On” is selected, a F icon appears.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
When [System] is set to “4K EXT (SSD)”, “4K” or
“High-Speed”, this item is fixed at “Off” and
cannot be selected.
0
When [Dynamic Zoom] is set to
“On”, “Off
becomes fixed and cannot be selected.
Handle Zoom Speed
This function allows you to set the zoom speed of
the zoom
lever at the handle when the [ZOOM FIX/
VAR/OFF] switch is set to “FIX”.
[Setting Values: 1 to 8 (R 5)]
Camera Function Menu
113
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Focus Tracking
For specifying whether to track the focus during
zooming.
0
On:
Tracks the focus during zooming.
0
Off:
Gives priority to the zoom speed and does not
track the focus during zooming.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Memo :
0
Zoom speed may be affected when zooming is
performed near the tele-end.
Preset Zoom
For setting
the speed for shifting to the preset zoom
position and the rate of change for starting and
stopping the preset zoom operation of the preset
zoom function assigned to the user button.
9
Speed
For setting the speed to shift to the preset zoom
position.
[Setting Values: 1 to 21 (R11)]
9
Ease In
For setting the rate of change from the start of the
zoom
operation
until the predetermined [Speed] is
reached.
The larger the setting value, the longer it takes to
reach the value specified in Speed.
[Setting Values: 1 to 5, ROff]
9
Ease Out
For setting the rate of change from the
predetermined [Speed] until the zoom operation
stops.
The larger the setting value, the longer it takes
before the operation stops.
[Setting Values: 1 to 5, ROff]
REMOTE Zoom Ease
For specifying whether to zoom in or zoom out
slowly when zoom operation starts or during
zooming using a wired remote control.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Web Zoom Ease
For specifying whether to zoom in or zoom out
slowly when zoom operation starts or during
zooming using the View Remote feature.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Focus Function Settings
AF Assist
For specifying the behavior when the focus ring is
turned during AF.
0
Direction:
This option allows you to shift the auto focus
point to near and far directions by turning the
focus ring during AF.
0
Manual:
Temporarily switches
to MF when the focus ring
is turned during AF.
0
Off:
Sets the AF Assist function to “Off”.
[Setting Values: Direction, Manual, ROff]
Memo :
0
This setting is effective only when the [FOCUS]
switch is set to
“AUTO”.
AF Speed
For setting the AF operation speed.
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]
AF Sensitivity
For specifying the sensitivity of AF in response to
changes in the photographic subject.
0
High: High sensitivity
0
Middle: Normal
0
Low: Low sensitivity
[Setting Values: High, RMiddle, Low]
AF Area
For configuring the AF area.
0
Multi:
Automatically configures to an area optimal for
recording.
0
Wide:
Extends the AF area sideways.
0
Normal:
Performs AF at the area near the center of the
image.
[Setting Values: Multi, Wide, RNormal]
114
Camera Function Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
MF Assist
For specifying the behavior when the focus ring is
turned during MF.
0
On:
Turning the focus ring during MF activates AF
for a short interval after the operation, after
which the camera recorder returns to the MF
mode. However,
it does not function while in the
expanded focus mode.
0
Off:
Does not switch temporarily to AF when the
focus ring is turned during MF.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Limitter
For specifying the closest focusing distance.
When [LCD/VF]
B [Display Type] B [Focus] is set
to “Meter”:
[Setting Values: 5 m - ∞, 3 m - ∞, 1 m - ∞, ROff]
When [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [Focus] is
configured to “Feet”:
[Setting values: 16 ft - ∞, 10 ft - ∞, 3 ft - ∞, ROff]
AF Hold during Zoom
For specifying AF operation during zoom
operation.
0
Hold:
Constricts AF operation and performs silent
zooming during the zoom operation.
0
Off:
Activates AF operation during zooming.
[Setting Values: Hold, ROff]
Face Detection Function Settings
Mode
For configuring the behavior when operating the
user button that is assigned with the “Face
Detection” function in the Auto Focus mode.
Select
the
control to track results of face detection.
0
AF&AE:
Sets auto focus and exposure control for the
face that is being tracked.
0
AF:
Sets
auto
focus for the face that is being tracked.
[Setting Values: RAF&AE, AF]
(A P62 [Adjusting the Focusing by Face
Detection] )
Memo :
0
When “AF&AE” is selected, this function will be
activated when the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU]
switch is set to “AUTO” and when at least one of
the Iris, Shutter and Gain items is configured to
Auto mode.
0
When “AF” is specified, this function will be
activated only when the
[FOCUS AUTO/
MANU] switch is set to
“AUTO”.
Face Only AF
For activating
auto focusing only for the face of the
subject.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
When a face cannot be detected when this is
configured to “On
”, the camera recorder
switches to manual focusing.
Sensitivity
For setting the level of ease of face detection.
[Setting Values: RHigh, Middle, Low]
Holding Duration
For specifying duration to maintain the current
focus when the camera loses track of the face.
Set to
“Short” to select another object immediately
if the face on the screen is lost.
Set to “Long” to operate at the same position for
some time even if the face on the screen is lost.
[Setting Values: Long, RNormal, Short]
Camera Function Menu
115
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
User Switch Set Item
USER1 to USER9, USER10 ▲, USER11 ▼,
USER12 ◀, USER13 ▶
Assigning one of the functions in the following
menu to the [FOCUS ASSIST/1], [OIS/2],
[ONLINE/3], [AE LOCK/4
], [ZEBRA/5], [MARKER/
6], [USER7], [USER8] or [EXP.FOCUS/9] button or
the [▲/10], [▼/11], [◀/12] or [▶/13] front cross-
shaped button enables operation of the said
preconfigured function (on/off, launching,
switching).
Set according to the shooting conditions. Usable in
the Camera mode.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
[Setting Values: Cancel, Menu, Slot Select, Return
Video, Return over IP, Auto Upload, Live
Streaming, Load Picture File, Clip Review, OK
Mark, Clip Cutter Trig, Backup Trig, Rec, LCD
Backlight, Spot Meter, Focus Assist, Expanded
Focus, Focus Assist +, Marker, Histogram, Zebra,
AWB, White Balance, Preset Zoom3, Preset
Zoom2, Preset Zoom1, Digital Extender, OIS,
Black Compress, Black Stretch, Face Only AF,
Face Detection, AE Lock, Lolux, Bars, None]
Memo :
0
“Cancel” and “Menu” can only be assigned to
[USER7] or [USER8].
0
“Rec
” cannot be assigned to [FOCUS
ASSIST/1], [OIS/2] and [ONLINE/3].
0
“Focus Assist +” is a combination of the
“Focus
Assist” and “Expanded Focus
” functions.
0
The
following
functions can be assigned only for
GY-HC500SPCU.
[ODK Tagging]OFF, [ODK Tagging]KO, [ODK
Tagging]KOR, [ODK Tagging]P, [ODK
Tagging]PR, [ODK Tagging]FG, [ODK
Tagging]FGB, [ODK Tagging]REMOVE
Lolux
To increase the sensitivity when in dim
surroundings, set a value in the Lolux mode.
0
When [LCD/VF]
B [Display Type] B [Gain] is set
to “dB”:
[Setting Values: R36 dB, 30 dB]
0
When [LCD/VF
]
B [Display Type] B [Gain] is set
to “ISO”:
[Setting Values: RISO 51200, ISO 25600]
Clip Review
For configuring the behavior when operating the
user button that is assigned with the “Clip
Review
” function.
0
Last 5sec:
Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the
ending.
0
Top 5sec:
Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the
beginning.
0
Clip:
Views the entire clip.
[Setting Values:
RLast 5sec, Top 5sec, Clip]
Spot Meter
For configuring the behavior when operating the
user button that is assigned with the “Spot Meter”
function.
0
Max & Min:
Displays the brightest and darkest areas of the
image.
0
Max:
Displays the brightest area of the image.
0
Min:
Displays the darkest area of the image.
0
Manual:
Displays the image brightness at a specified
position.
[Setting Values: RMax & Min, Max, Min, Manual]
Memo :
0
When “HLG”
is selected in [Camera Process] B
[Color Space], the value of the spot meter
changes according to the setting of [LCD/VF] B
[Convert to ITU709]/[White Level].
116
Camera Function Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
AE Lock
For configuring the behavior when operating the
user button that is assigned with the “AE Lock”
function.
0
FAW:
Use this to fix the FAW (Full-time Auto White
Balance) function to the value when the user
button assigned with “AE Lock” is pressed.
0
AE:
Use this to fix the Auto function of Gain, Iris, or
Shutter to the value when the user button
assigned with “AE Lock” is pressed.
0
AE/FAW:
Use this to fix the FAW (Full-time Auto White
Balance) function
and the Auto function of Gain,
Iris, or Shutter to the value when the user button
assigned with “AE Lock” is pressed.
[Setting Values: FAW, RAE, AE/FAW]
Memo :
0
This feature
only works when Iris, Shutter, Gain
or White Balance is set to Auto mode.
0
“AE Lock” is canceled when the user button
assigned
with “AE Lock” is pressed, or when any
of the functions that can be locked is operated
regardless of the mode (Manual or Auto).
0
“AE Lock”
is canceled in the following cases.
0
When the user button that is assigned with
“AE Lock” is pressed
0
When changes are made to the iris, gain or
shutter settings
0
When changes are made to the AE level
0
When there is a switch between the Camera
and Media modes
Expanded Focus
For configuring the behavior when operating the
user button that is assigned with the “Expanded
Focus” function.
0
Limited Time:
Activates the timer.
Turns off the “Expanded Focus
” function about
3 seconds after the user button assigned with
“Expanded Focus” is pressed.
0
Momentary:
The
“Expanded Focus
” function is enabled
during the interval while the user button
assigned with “Expanded Focus” is pressed.
0
Toggle:
Pressing the user button assigned with
Expanded Focus
” each time switches the
“Expanded Focus” function to on or off.
[Setting Values: Limited Time, Momentary,
RToggle]
Memo :
0
When one of the [J/10], [K/11], [H/12], [I/13]
buttons is
assigned with “Expanded Focus” and
“Toggle” is selected, press the [CANCEL] button
to turn off the function.
Camera Function Menu
117
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Camera Process Menu
Menu screen for adjusting the quality of camera
images.
This item cannot be selected in the Media mode.
Color Space
For configuring the color space that is used inside
the camera.
The gamma
and color gamut change automatically
according to the selected color space.
When [System] is configured to a setting other than
“SD”
0
J-Log1:
Color
space
that supports 800% dynamic range
and log gamma
0
HLG:
Color space that supports the ITU2100 HLG
HDR
0
ITU2020:
Color space that supports the ITU2020 wide
color gamut
0
ITU709:
ITU709 color space
[Setting Values: J-Log1, HLG, ITU2020, RITU709]
When [System] is set to “SD”
0
ITU601 (EBU):
Color space
that supports the EBU color gamut
0
ITU601 (170M):
Color space that supports the SMPTE170M
color gamut
0
ITU709:
ITU709 color space
[Setting Values: ITU601 (EBU), ITU601 (170M),
RITU709]
Memo :
0
When
[System
] is configured to a setting other
than “SD” and “J-Log1” or “HLG” is selected,
some menu items under [Camera Process]
cannot be configured.
0
The AE function does not function when
“J-
Log1” or “HLG” is selected.
9
Colorimetry
For configuring
the standard for converting R, G, B
signals to Y, Cb, Cr signals when [Color Space] is
configured to “HLG” or “ITU2020”.
0
ITU2020:
Records and outputs ITU2020 RGB signals
using
the
Y-Cb-Cr signal conversion coefficient.
0
ITU709:
Records and outputs ITU709 RGB signals using
the Y-Cb-Cr signal conversion coefficient.
[Setting Values: RITU2020, ITU709]
Memo :
0
This item is available when [Color Space] is set
to “HLG” or “ITU2020”.
0
This is fixed at
“ITU709
” when [Color Space] is
set to “J-Log1” or “ITU709”.
0
This
is
fixed at “ITU601” when [System] is set to
“SD”.
Gamma
For adjusting
the gamma curve that determines the
gradation expression.
(A P170 [Adjusting the Gamma] )
0
Cinema 2:
Sets to a gamma curve with soft expression
giving priority to high luminance gradation.
0
Cinema 1:
Sets to
a gamma curve with similar gradation to
the screen characteristics of movies.
0
Standard:
Sets to a standard gamma curve.
[Setting Values: Cinema 2, Cinema 1, RStandard]
Memo :
0
[Gamma]
cannot be configured when [Color
Space] is set to “HLG” or “J-Log1”. “HLG
Gamma” is used during “HLG” and “J-Log1
Gamma” is used during “J-Log1”.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Infrared
]
is set to “On”.
118
Camera Process Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
Level
The amount of correction can be specified
separately when [Gamma
] is set to “Standard”,
“Cinema 1” or “Cinema 2”.
When [Gamma] is set to “Standard”
[Setting Values: 0.35 to R 0.45 to 0.55 (in steps of
0.02)]
0
Increase the number:
Finer gradation at bright areas and coarser
gradation at dark areas.
0
Decrease the number:
Finer gradation at dark areas and coarser
gradation at bright areas.
When [Gamma] is
set
to “Cinema 1” or “Cinema 2”
[Setting Values: +5 to R 0 to -5]
0
Increase the number:
Finer gradation at dark areas and coarser
gradation at bright areas.
0
Decrease the number:
Finer gradation at bright areas and coarser
gradation at dark areas.
Memo :
0
When [Gamma] is set to “Standard” with the
value set at
[0.45], the gamma adjusted
conforms to ITU709 or ITU2020.
0
If
[Gamma
] is set to “Cinema 2”, the maximum
peak signal decreases from 109% as the
number becomes smaller in the setting values
from 0 to -5. When the level is at -5, the video
input with a dynamic range of 400% will be kept
within a 100% output.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Color
Space
] is configured to “HLG” or “J-Log1”.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Infrared
]
is set to
“On”.
Detail
For adjusting the contour (detail) enhancement
level.
Increasing the value increases the sharpness of
the contour.
[Setting Values: +10 to -10, Off]
(Default Value: -6 for “J-Log1” and “HLG
” of Color
Space; 0 for all other settings)
Memo :
0
The setting
values of this item and [Adjust...] are
stored separately when [Color Space] is set to
“HLG” or “J-Log1”.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Infrared
]
is set to “On”.
9
Frequency
For specifying the correction frequency of the
contour. Set this according to the object.
0
High:
Emphasizes the
high frequency range. Use this
when shooting objects with fine patterns.
0
Middle:
Emphasizes the intermediate frequency range.
0
Low:
Emphasizes the low frequency range. Use this
when shooting objects with large patterns.
[Setting Values: High, RMiddle, Low]
Memo :
0
Available when [
System] is set to “4K EXT
(SSD)” or “4K”.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Infrared
]
is set to
“On”.
Master Black
For
adjusting
the pedestal level (master black) that
serves as the reference black.
Increasing the value increases the pedestal.
[Setting Values: +50 to -50 (R-3)]
Memo :
0
This item cannot be configured when [Color
Space] is set to “J-Log1”.
0
The
setting
value of this item is stored separately
when [Color Space] is set to “HLG”.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]
is set to “On”.
Camera Process Menu
119
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Black Toe
Process the
dark areas according to the balance of
bright and dark areas in the image to adjust the
overall balance of contrast.
For altering the gain of dark areas. Adjust this item
according to the condition of the captured video
signals.
0
Stretch:
Increases the gain of dark areas in an image to
stretch the signals of these areas only, thereby
showing the contrast between bright and dark
areas more clearly.
Specify the amount of stretch with [Stretch
Level].
0
Normal:
Normal condition.
0
Compress:
Compresses the gain of dark areas to increase
the contrast when the entire image appears
bright and contrast is weak. Specify the
compression amount with [Compress Level
].
[Setting Values: Stretch,
RNormal, Compress]
Memo :
0
This item cannot be configured when [Color
Space
] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG”.
0
This item cannot be configured when
[
Infrared]
is set to “On”.
9
Stretch Level
Stretch amount increases when a larger value is
specified.
[Setting Values: 5 to 1 (R 3)]
Memo :
0
This item is displayed only when [
Black Toe] is
set to “Stretch”. Otherwise, this item appears as
“---” and cannot be selected.
0
This item cannot be configured when
[Color
Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG”.
0
This item cannot be configured when
[
Infrared]
is set to “On”.
9
Compress Level
Compression amount increases when a larger
value is specified.
[Setting Values: 5 to 1 (R 3)]
Memo :
0
This item is displayed only when [
Black Toe] is
set to “Compress”. Otherwise, this item appears
as “---” and cannot be selected.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Color
Space] is set to “J-Log1
” or “HLG”.
0
This item cannot be configured when
[Infrared
]
is set to “On”.
Knee
For specifying the “Knee” operation, which
compresses video
signals beyond a certain level to
show the gradation of the highlighted portion. To
check the gradation of a bright area, set to “Manual”
and adjust the knee point (starting point of knee
operation) manually.
0
Manual:
Enables
manual
adjustment of knee point using
[Level].
0
Auto:
Adjusts the knee point automatically according
to the luminance level.
[Setting Values: Manual, RAuto]
Memo :
0
This item cannot be configured when [Color
Space
] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG” and when
[Gamma] is set to “Cinema 2”.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Infrared
]
is set to “On”.
9
Level
For setting the starting point (knee point) of knee
compression when [Knee] is set to “Manual
”.
[Setting Values: 100.0%, 97.5%, R
95.0%, 92.5%,
90.0%, 87.5%, 85.0%, 82.5%, 80.0%, 77.5%,
75.0%, 72.5%, 70.0%]
Memo :
0
This item cannot be configured when [
Knee] is
set to “Auto”.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Color
Space] is set to
“J-Log1” or “HLG”
and when
[Gamma] is set to “Cinema 2”.
0
This item cannot be configured when
[Infrared]
is set to “On”.
120
Camera Process Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
Sensitivity
For setting the response speed of the “Knee”
operation when [Knee] is set to “Auto”.
Set to “Slow
” when shooting an object under a
condition where there is drastic change in the light
intensity.
[Setting Values: RFast, Middle, Slow]
Memo :
0
This item cannot be configured when [Knee] is
set to “Manual”.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Color
Space] is set to
“J-Log1” or “HLG” and when
[Gamma] is set to “Cinema 2”.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Infrared
]
is set to “On”.
9
Peak Filter
For configuring the response speed of the “Knee”
operation with respect to a high-luminance point
light
source and the like when [Knee] is configured
to “Auto”.
[Setting Values: RHigh, Middle, Low]
Memo :
0
This item cannot be configured when [Knee] is
set to “Manual”.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Color
Space] is set to
“J-Log1” or “HLG” and when
[Gamma
] is set to “Cinema 2”.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Infrared
]
is set to
“On”.
White Clip
For setting the point to apply white clip for video
signals with a high luminance level.
0
109%:
Applies white clip at the point where the
luminance level is 109%.
0
103%:
Applies white clip at the point where the
luminance level is 103 %.
0
100%:
Applies white clip at the point where the
luminance level
is 100 %. Set to this value when
the system in use limits Y output signals within
100 %.
[Setting Values: R109%, 103%, 100%]
Memo :
0
The setting
value of this item is stored separately
when [Color Space] is set to “HLG” or “J-Log1”.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]
is set to “On”.
White Balance...
Menu for adjusting white balance.
(A P
123 [White Balance Item] )
*
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White
Balance] (A P 69)”.
Camera Process Menu
121
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Color Matrix
For setting the color matrix.
0
Natural:
Sets to a brighter and more natural color matrix
than the standard. Effective for shooting under
a strong single color light source such as stage
lightings.
0
Cinema Subdued:
Sets to a subdued color matrix that is similar to
the screen characteristics of movies.
0
Cinema Vivid:
Sets to a vivid color matrix that is similar to the
screen characteristics of movies.
0
Standard:
Sets to a standard color matrix.
0
Off:
Sets the color matrix function to Off.
[Setting Values: Natural, Cinema Subdued,
Cinema Vivid, RStandard, Off]
Memo :
0
This item cannot be configured when [Color
Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG”.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Infrared
]
is set to “On”.
9
Adjust
This item is used to adjust [Color Matrix
] to a color
according to the user’s preference.
The adjusted values of “Natural”, “Standard”,
“Cinema Vivid”, and “Cinema Subdued” in [Color
Matrix] can be stored individually.
0
The
saturation
and hue of Red, Green and Blue
can be configured individually.
[Setting range for Saturation: -10 to +10] (roughly
± 10%)
[Setting range for Hue: -10 to +10]
(A P171 [Adjusting Color Matrix] )
Memo :
0
This item cannot be configured when [Color
Space] is set to “J-Log1”.
0
This item cannot be selected when
[
Color
Matrix] is set to “Off”.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Infrared
]
is set to
“On”.
Color Gain
For adjusting the video signal color level.
Increasing the value deepens the color.
[Setting Values: +15 to -50, Off (R0)]
Memo :
0
Images are displayed in black-and-white when
this is set to “Off
”.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Color
Space] is set to “J-Log1”.
0
The
setting value of this item is stored separately
when [Color Space] is set to “HLG”.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]
is set to “On”.
Reverse Picture
For recording images correctly by setting this item
to “Rotate” when the lens image appears upside
down or laterally inverted.
0
Rotate:
Enables horizontal/vertical inversion of the
image.
0
Off:
Disables horizontal/vertical inversion of the
image.
[Setting Values: Rotate, ROff]
Reset Process
Restores all items in the [Camera Process
] menu
to their default settings.
122
Camera Process Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
White Balance Item
Preset Temp.
For setting the color temperature when the
[WHT
BAL] switch is set to “PRESET
”.
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White Balance]
(A P 69)”.
Alternative Temp.
For setting the alternative color temperature in the
Preset mode.
When the [WHT BAL] switch is set to “PRESET”,
pressing
the [y] or the user button assigned with
the “AWB” function each time switches the color
temperature setting in the Preset mode. ([Preset
Temp.]1[Alternative Temp.])
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White Balance]
(A P 69)”.
Preset Paint Memory
For configuring whether to configure the color
temperature individually or collectively in the
Preset mode. Adjustment is performed in
[
Preset
Paint].
0
Individual:
Each of the 9 types of color temperatures
(2300K, 3000K, 3200K, 4200K, 4800K, 5200K,
5600K, 6500K, 7500K) are configured
individually.
0
Common:
The
entire
color temperature range is configured
collectively.
[Setting Values: Individual, RCommon]
Preset Paint
For
adjusting
the R (red) and (B) blue components
in the Preset mode.
0
Increase the number:
Strengthens the red/blue.
0
Decrease the number:
Weakens the red/blue.
[Setting Values: +32 to -32 (R 0)]
AWB Paint
For adjusting
the R (red)/B (blue) component in the
AWB (Auto White Balance) mode.
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White Balance]
(A P 69)”.
0
Increase the number:
Strengthens the red/blue.
0
Decrease the number:
Weakens the red/blue.
[Setting Values: -32 to +32 (R 0)]
Memo :
0
This item is selectable when the [
WHT BAL]
switch is set to “A” or “B”. When “PRESET” is set,
this item appears as “---” and cannot be
selected.
0
Different values can be specified for “A” and “B”.
0
When [Clear Paint After AWB] is configured to
“On”, pressing the [y] button or the user button
assigned with the “AWB” function to readjust the
white balance switches the R and B values to
“0”.
Clear Paint After AWB
For specifying
whether to clear the [AWB Paint] (R
value and B value) settings after executing AWB
(Auto White Balance).
0
On:
Sets the [AWB Paint] (R value and B value)
settings to
“0” after executing AWB (Auto White
Balance).
0
Off:
Does not change the [AWB Paint
] (R value and
B value) settings after executing AWB (Auto
White Balance).
[Setting Values:
ROn, Off]
FAW Paint
For adjusting the R (red)/B (blue) component
during FAW (Full Auto White Balance) mode.
0
Increase the number:
Strengthens the red/blue.
0
Decrease the number:
Weakens the red/blue.
[Setting Values: -32 to +32 (R 0)]
Camera Process Menu
123
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
TC/UB Menu
Menu screen for setting time code and user’s bit.
This item cannot be selected in the Media mode,
or during recording.
TC Generator
For setting the operation of the time code.
0
Free Run(GPS)L:
Time code
information can be synchronized with
the date/time information acquired from the
GPS.
0
Free Run(Ext):
External time code input will be synchronized
with this and the time code will be recorded.
0
Free Run:
The time code operates in the run mode at all
times regardless of the recording status. It
continues to run even when the power of the
camera recorder is turned off.
0
Rec Run:
The time code operates in the run mode during
recording. It continues to run in the order of the
recorded clips as long as the SD card is not
replaced. If the SD card is removed and
recording is made on another card, time code
will be recorded on the new card from where it
was left off in the previous card.
0
Regen:
The time code operates in the run mode during
recording. When the SD card is replaced, the
last time code recorded on the card is read and
recorded on a new card so that the time code
continues in running order.
[Setting Values: Free Run(GPS), L, Free
Run(Ext), Free Run, RRec Run, Regen]
Memo :
0
When [Rec Mode] is configured to “Interval
Rec” or “Frame Rec”, only “Rec Run” and
“Regen
” are selectable.
0
When [System] is configured to “High-Speed”,
only “Rec Run” and “Regen” are selectable.
0
When [Frame Rate] is set to
“24p”, “Free
Run(GPS)” cannot be selected.
TC Preset
For setting the time code (hour, minute, second,
frame).
Display :
Drop setting 02:02:25.20
: Non Drop setting 02:02:25:20
(A P77 [Setting Time Code Generator] )
UB Mode
For setting the recording mode of the user’s bit.
0
Date:
Records the date.
0
Time:
Records the time.
0
Preset:
Records according to the preset setting.
(A P80 [Setting the User’s Bit] )
[Setting Values: Date, Time, R
Preset]
Memo :
0
If [UB Mode] is set to “Time”, the user’s bit
operates in the 24-hour format even if the LCD
display is in the 12-hour format.
9
Preset
For setting the user’s bit. (Digit by digit)
Display
:
AB CD EF 01
(A P80 [Presetting the User’s Bit] )
Memo :
0
When [UB Mode] is set to “Date” or “Time
”, this
item appears as “---” and preset is disabled.
0
When [TC
Generator
] is set to “Regen”, this item
appears as “<Regen>” and preset is disabled.
Drop Frame
For setting the framing mode of the time code
generator.
0
Non Drop:
Internal time code generator works in the non-
drop-frame mode.
Use this setting when placing
emphasis on the number of frames.
0
Drop:
Internal time code generator works in the drop-
frame mode. Use this setting when placing
emphasis on the recording time.
[Setting Values: Non Drop, RDrop]
Memo :
0
This item can be set only when [System]
B
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [WFrame
Rate] is set to “60p”, “30p”, or “60i”.
However, when “Free Run(GPS)” is selected for
[TC Generator], this item is fixed at “Drop” and
cannot be selected. L
0
When [Frame Rate] is “24p
”, “Non Drop
becomes fixed and cannot be selected.
0
When [Frame Rate
] is “50p”, “25p”, or “50i”, this
item appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
(A P
151 [WFrame Rate/ G
Frame Rate] )
124
TC/UB Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
LCD/VF Menu
Item for specifying settings related to the LCD
monitor or viewfinder screen.
This menu screen can be used to specify settings
related to the Focus Assist mode, zebra pattern
display, screen size, marker, and safety zone. In
addition, it is also used for selecting whether to
display characters on the LCD monitor or
viewfinder screen, as well as for adjusting the
picture quality of the LCD monitor.
Shooting Assist...
Menu for setting the Shooting Assist function.
(A P126 [Shooting Assist Item] )
Marker Settings...
For setting items such as the safety zone and
center mark.
(A P127 [Marker Settings Item] )
Display Type...
For specifying display-related settings.
(A P128 [Display Type Item] )
Display On/Off...
For configuring the on/off setting of the screen
display.
(A P129 [Display On/Off Item] )
VF Color
For selecting whether to display the image on the
viewfinder screen in color or black-and-white.
Select “On” to display in color, and “Off
” to display
in black-and-white.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
VF Bright
For setting
the brightness of the viewfinder screen.
Increasing the value increases the brightness.
[Setting Values: +10 to +1, R0, -1 to -10]
VF Contrast
For
setting
the difference in luminance between the
darkest and brightness areas in the viewfinder
screen.
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values: +10 to +1, R0, -1 to -10]
LCD Contrast
For setting
the difference in luminance between the
darkest and brightness areas in the LCD monitor.
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values: +10 to +1, R0, -1 to -10]
LCD Backlight
For setting the brightness of the LCD monitor
backlight.
Increasing the value increases the brightness.
[Setting Values: +1, R 0, -1]
LCD Mirror
For specifying the image display method when
facing the LCD monitor.
Select “Mirror
” to display the image after laterally
inverting it. (Mirror display)
(A P43 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
[Setting Values: Mirror, RNormal]
Memo :
0
The setting of this item is valid only in Camera
mode.
0
During color
bar, expanded focus, menu screen
and status screen display, the “Mirror” setting is
disabled.
(A P169 [Color Bar Output] )
Convert to ITU709
When [Color Space] is set to “ITU2020”, “J-Log1”
or “HLG”, the video images on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder are converted to the ITU709 color space
for display.
0
Cam + Return:
The camera and return videos are converted
from the color space configured in
[Color
Space] to the ITU709 color space.
0
Cam:
Only the camera video is converted to the
ITU709 color space.
0
Off:
Not converted.
[Setting Values: Cam + Return, Cam,
ROff]
Memo :
0
This item can be configured only when [Color
Space] is set to
“ITU2020”, “J-Log1” or “HLG”.
LCD/VF Menu
125
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
White Level
For configuring
the white level during adjustment of
the dynamic range that is visible in the LCD monitor
or viewfinder when [Color Space] is set to “HLG”.
When [Color Space] is set to “HLG” and [Convert
to ITU709] is set to a value other than “Off”, this item
can be used to configure the output luminance level
(%) of HLG videos that corresponds to 100% on
the ITU709 gamma curve during the conversion.
[Setting Values: 80.0%, 77.5%, 75.0%, R 72.5%,
70.0%, 67.5%,65.0%, 62.5%, 60.0%, 57.5%,
55.0%, 52.5%, 50.0%]
Memo :
0
This item can be configured only when [Color
Space] is set to
“HLG”.
0
The
value
on the spot meter changes in tandem
with this setting.
Example: When [White Level] is set to “75.0%”,
the point at which the HLG output is 75% is
displayed as 100% on the spot meter.
0
Refer to [Tone Mapping Characteristics for
Converting HLG to ITU709 for LCD/VF]
(A P 245) for each characteristic. Conversion
to the ITU709 color space is performed with
gamma and knee adjusted such that the
maximum HDR dynamic range is visible during
the conversion.
LCD RGB Gain
For adjusting the R (red), G (green) and B (blue)
gain level of the LCD monitor.
[Setting Values: +127 to R 0 to -128]
9
Reset
Restores [LCD RGB Gain
] to the default settings.
VF RGB Gain
For adjusting the R (red), G (green) and B (blue)
gain level of the viewfinder.
[Setting Values: +127 to R 0 to -128]
9
Reset
Restores [VF RGB Gain]
to the default settings.
Shooting Assist Item
Focus Assist
For setting whether to add color to the contour of
the focused image upon switching the image to
black-and-white.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
9
Type
For configuring the behavior when operating the
user button that is assigned with the [Focus
Assist] function.
(A P
61 [Focus Assist Function] )
0
ACCU-Focus:
Enables the Focus Assist and ACCU-Focus
(forced focus)
functions. The depth of field of the
object becomes shallower to enable easier
focusing. The ACCU-Focus function switches
automatically to “Off” after about 10 seconds.
0
Normal:
Enables only the Focus Assist function. The
focused area is displayed in color to enable
easier focusing. Display color can be specified
with [
Color].
[Setting Values: ACCU-Focus, RNormal]
9
Color
For setting the display color of the focused area
when Focus Assist is activated.
[Setting Values: RBlue, Green, Red]
Zebra
For selecting whether to display zebra patterns at
the bright areas of the subject.
Select “On
” to display zebra patterns or “Off” to
hide.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
9
Detect
For configuring the timing to detect the zebra
pattern display.
0
Converted ITU709:
Performs detection after converting to the
ITU709 color space.
0
HLG/J-Log1:
Performs detection before converting to the
ITU709 color space.
[Setting Values: Converted ITU709, RHLG/J-
Log1]
Memo :
0
This item is selectable only when [Color
Space]
is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG” and [Convert
to ITU709] is set to “Cam” or “Cam + Return”.
126
LCD/VF Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
Top
For setting the maximum luminance level for the
zebra pattern display.
[Setting Values: Over, 100%, 98%, 95% to 5% (in
5% increments)] (R80%)
9
Bottom
For setting the minimum luminance level for the
zebra pattern display.
[Setting Values: 100%, 98%, 95% to 0% (in 5%
increments)] (R70%)
Memo :
0
The relation between Top and Bottom is such
that Top>Bottom
always holds. To maintain this
relation during setting, the setting value is
automatically corrected.
Peaking Frequency
For setting the frequency bandwidth for
emphasizing the outline using the [PEAKING]
button.
[Setting Values: High,
RMiddle, Low]
Histogram
For setting
whether to display the histogram, which
shows the distribution of different points with
different levels of brightness in an image.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
9
Histogram Top
For selecting the maximum brightness limit for
changing the histogram display color.
[Setting Values: 5% to 110% (in 5% increments)]
(R
80%)
0
When [Color Space
] is set to “J-Log1”
[Setting Values: -5F-stop, -4F-stop, -3F-stop(2%),
-2F-stop, -1F-stop, 0F-stop(18%), F-stop, F-
stop, 1F-stop, 1F-stop, 1F-stop, 2F-stop, 2
F-stop(90%), 2 F-stop, R
3F-stop, 3 F-stop, 3
F-stop, 4F-stop, 4 F-stop, 4 F-stop, 5F-
stop, 5 F-stop, 5½F-stop]
Memo :
0
When [Color Space] is set to “J-Log1”, a green
line appears which corresponds to the “0F-
stop(18%)”
portion of the subject with 18%
reflectance.
9
Histogram Bottom
For selecting the minimum brightness limit for
changing the histogram display color.
[Setting Values: 0% to 105% (in 5% increments)]
(R 20%)
0
When [Color Space]
is set to “J-Log1”
[Setting Values: -6F-stop, -5F-stop, -4F-stop,
R-3F-stop(2%), -2F-stop,
-1F-stop, 0F-stop(18%),
F-stop, F-stop, 1F-stop, 1 F-stop, 1 F-
stop, 2F-stop, 2 F-stop(90%), 2 F-stop, 3F-
stop, 3 F-stop, 3 F-stop, 4F-stop, 4 F-stop,
4 F-stop, 5F-stop, 5 F-stop]
Memo :
0
When [Color Space] is set to “J-Log1”, a green
line appears which corresponds to the “0F-
stop(18%)” portion of the subject with 18%
reflectance.
Marker Settings Item
For setting the marker and safety zone, which are
useful in helping you determine the angle of view
for the image according to the shooting purpose.
(A P169 [Marker and Safety Zone Displays
(Camera Mode Only)] )
Memo :
0
During Clip
Review or when in the Media mode,
the markers do not appear regardless of the
setting.
Marker
For setting whether to display marker, safety zone,
and center marks on the screen.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
9
Grid Marker
For setting whether to display a 3x3 grid on the
screen.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
When [Grid Marker] is set to
“On”, [Aspect
Ratio], [Aspect Marker], and [Safety Zone] do
not function.
LCD/VF Menu
127
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
Aspect Ratio
For selecting
the final image aspect ratio to be used
from the overall angle of view.
[Setting Values: 16:9(+4:3), 2.35:1 Top, 2.35:1
Center, 1.85:1 Top, 1.85:1 Center, R16:9, 1.75:1,
1.66:1, 14:9, 13:9, 4:3]
Memo :
0
When [System] B [Record Set]
B [Record
Format] B [SD Aspect] is set to “4:3”, this item
is fixed at “4:3” and cannot be selected.
(A P
152 [ SD Aspect ] )
9
Aspect Marker
For specifying how boundary markers are to be
used to indicate the parts of an image that are
beyond the range of the aspect ratio selected in
[Aspect Ratio].
0
Line+Halftone:
Displays the boundary using lines, and areas
outside the boundary in halftone.
0
Halftone:
Displays areas
outside the boundary in halftone.
0
Line:
Displays the boundary using lines.
0
Off:
Hides the boundary markers.
[Setting Values: Line+Halftone, Halftone, Line,
ROff]
Memo :
0
When [Aspect Ratio] is set to “16:9”
or
“16:9(+4:3)”, this item is fixed at “Off” and cannot
be selected.
9
Safety Zone
For setting the percentage of area that is to be
deemed as valid area (Safety Zone) within the
boundary of the aspect ratio selected in
[
Aspect
Ratio].
[Setting Values: 95%, 93%, 90%, 88%, 80%, ROff]
9
Center Mark
For
specifying
whether to display a mark to indicate
the screen center within the aspect ratio selected
in [Aspect Ratio].
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Display Type Item
This menu is used to set the displays on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen.
Battery
For setting the display of the remaining battery
power on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
0
Time:
Displays the remaining battery power in
minutes. (min)
0
Capacity%:
Displays the remaining battery power in
percentage. (%)
0
Voltage:
Displays the current battery voltage in units of
0.1 V. (V)
[Setting Values: RTime, Capacity%, Voltage]
Memo :
0
The battery mark that appears before the “Time”,
“Capacity%” or “Voltage” value changes according to
the remaining battery power.
In addition, the plug mark is added during charging.
4
S :
10 % and below
D
R :
11 % to 30 %
C
Q :
31% to 70 %
B
P :
71 % to 100 %
0
When the remaining battery power is low, “RES”
instead of the value is displayed.
Replace the battery as soon as possible.
0
The remaining battery power and remaining time are
intended as reference values for the shooting
duration.
0
The time, capacity or voltage will not be displayed
during charging.
TC/UB
For specifying whether to display the time code
(TC) or
user’s bit (UB) rate in the display on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen.
[Setting Values: UB, RTC]
Zoom
For setting the display method of the zoom
position.
0
Number:
Displays the zoom position in numbers.
0
Bar:
Displays the zoom position in a bar.
[Setting Values: Number, RBar]
128
LCD/VF Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Focus
For setting the display method of the approximate
distance to the subject in focus.
0
Feet:
Displays the distance in feet.
0
Meter:
Displays the distance in meters.
[Setting Values: Feet, RMeter]
ND Filter
For specifying how the filter position is to be
displayed.
0
Normal + Assist:
Displays the current filter position.
If the ND filter setting is inappropriate, the
appropriate ND filter to select will appear
blinking.
0
Normal:
Displays the current filter position.
[Setting Values: Normal + Assist, RNormal]
Shutter
For setting the shutter display to be displayed on
the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
0
DEG:
Displays the shutter speed in degrees in the
same way as film cameras.
0
SEC:
Displays the shutter speed in seconds.
[Setting Values: DEG, RSEC]
Memo :
0
“DEG” is selectable only when [WFrame Rate]
is set to “24p” or “25p”.
When [W
Frame Rate] is set to other values, the
shutter display setting is fixed at “SEC” and
cannot be selected.
(A P
151 [WFrame Rate/ G
Frame Rate] )
Gain
For setting the gain display to be displayed on the
LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
0
ISO:
Displays the gain as ISO sensitivity.
0
dB:
Displays the gain in dB (decibel).
[Setting Values: ISO, RdB]
Memo :
0
This item cannot be configured when [
Color
Space] is set to “HLG”.
Display On/Off Item
For setting whether to turn on or off the display of
an item
on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
Battery, Clip Info, High-Speed, Media Status,
Rec Trigger, TC/UB, Media Remain, Record
Format,
Video
Format, Guide, GPS A L,
Return over IP, Live Streaming, Network,
Date, Time, Operation Lock, Zoom, Focus,
Zebra, Focus Assist, Color Space, Black Toe,
ND Filter, OIS, Face Detection, Infrared, AE
Level, Iris, Shutter, Gain, White Balance,
Audio Meter, Position Bar, Camera
Angle[Tagging]L, ODK[Tagging]L
For configuring whether to display or hide an item.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Memo :
0
This may not be selectable depending on the
operating mode and status.
LCD/VF Menu
129
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
A/V Set Menu
Menu screen for video output and audio.
Video Set...
For specifying video output-related settings.
(A P130 [Video Set Item] )
Audio Set...
For specifying audio-related settings.
(A P132 [Audio Set Item] )
Video Set Item
SDI OUT
For configuring video output from the [SDI OUT]
terminal.
[Setting Values: On,
ROff]
Memo :
0
When a resolution with no SDI output is
selected, the setting is fixed at “Off”.
0
When “4K EXT (SSD)”
is selected for the
[System] item, video images are not output from
the [SDI OUT] terminal.
9
Character
For configuring whether to show the display and
menu on the [SDI OUT] terminal.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
9
Resolution
For
selecting
the resolution of video output from the
[SDI OUT] terminal according to the monitor to be
connected.
[Setting Values: 1080psF, R1080p, 1080i, 720p,
576i, 480i, 480i (2:3pd)]
Memo :
0
The selectable options vary according to the
[System
] B [Record Set] B [Record Format] B
[System]/[WResolution] setting.
0
Cross conversion output is not possible.
0
When [
A/V Set]
B [Video Set] B [SDI OUT] B
[Resolution] is set to “1080p”, configuring
[System] B [GPS] to “On” changes the setting to
“1080i”. A L
9
3G-SDI Mapping
For configuring the mode of mapping for signals
output from the [SDI OUT
] terminal.
[Setting Values: Level B, RLevel A]
Memo :
0
SDI output
is configurable only when the setting
is set to “1080p”.
0
When [
SDI OUT] is configured to “Off”, this item
cannot be configured.
9
Rec Trigger
For configuring whether to superimpose trigger
signals on the [
SDI OUT] terminal in tandem with
the [REC] button.
If “Type-A” or “Type-B” is specified, it is possible to
record on a device equipped with SDI record trigger
in tandem with the operation of the [REC] button.
When a compatible device is connected,
recording/stop control signals are output in tandem
with the operation of the [REC] button.
The record trigger output status to the connected
device is indicated by REC B /STBY B on the
display screen.
[Setting Values: Type-A, Type-B, ROff]
Memo :
0
If “Type-A” does not work, it may operate in the
“Type-B
” setting, but the user’s bit to the
connected device will not be correctly output.
0
Even if REC B /STBY B is displayed on the
display screen, the compatible device may not
necessarily be recording.
0
This item can be configured when [SDI OUT] is
configured to
“On” and [Rec Mode] is configured
to “Normal”, “Pre Rec” or “Clip Continuous”.
0
Set to
“Off
” if connecting to a device that does
not support record trigger.
130
A/V Set Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
HDMI OUT
For configuring video output from the [HDMI]
terminal.
[Setting Values: On,
ROff]
Memo :
0
Monitor and menu displays are not output from
the [HDMI] terminal.
9
Resolution
For selecting
the resolution of video output from the
[HDMI] terminal according to the monitor to be
connected.
[Setting Values: 2160/60p, 2160/50p, 2160/30p,
2160/25p, 2160/24p, 1080/60p, 1080/50p,
1080/30p, 1080/25p, 1080/24p, 1080p, R1080i,
720p, 576p, 576i, 480p, 480i, 480p(2:3pd)]
Memo :
0
The selectable options vary according to the
settings in [System] B [Record Set]
B [Record
Format] B [System] and [WResolution]/
[GResolution].
0
Cross conversion output is not possible.
0
When in the Camera mode, selecting
“SD
” for
[System] B [Record Set] B [Record Format] B
[System] fixes the resolution at “480p” or “576p”.
9
Color
For setting the color format of HDMI signals.
[Setting Values: RGB, RAuto]
Memo :
0
This item can be configured when [HDMI OUT]
is set to a setting other than
“Off”.
9
Colorimetry
For configuring the colorimetry of the HDMI signal
when [Camera Process]
B [Color Space] B
[Colorimetry] is set to “ITU2020”.
0
ITU2020:
Outputs using the colorimetry of ITU2020
regardless of the device that is connected via
HDMI.
0
ITU709:
Outputs using the colorimetry of ITU709
regardless of the device that is connected via
HDMI.
0
Auto:
Switches the colorimetry automatically
according to the device that is connected via
HDMI.
[Setting Values: ITU2020, ITU709, RAuto]
Memo :
0
This item can be configured when [HDMI OUT]
is set to a setting other than “Off”.
0
This item can be configured when
[HDMI
Color
] is set to “Auto”.
0
This item cannot be configured when [Camera
Process] B [Color Space
]
B [Colorimetry] is set
to a setting other than “ITU2020”.
9
Enhance
For
setting
the color range of HDMI signals. When
connecting to a PC monitor, set this to “On”.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
This item can be configured when [HDMI OUT]
is set to a setting other than
“Off”.
A/V Set Menu
131
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
Rec Trigger
For configuring whether to superimpose trigger
signals on the [
HDMI] out terminal in tandem with
the [REC] button.
If “On” is specified, it is possible to record on a
device equipped with HDMI record trigger in
tandem with the operation of the [REC] button.
When a compatible device is connected,
recording/stop control signals are output in tandem
with the operation of the [REC] button.
The HDMI record trigger output status to the
connected device is indicated by REC B/STBY B
on the display screen.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
Even if REC B/STBY B is displayed on the
display screen, the compatible device may not
necessarily be recording.
0
This item can be configured when [HDMI OUT]
is set to a value other than
“Off”, and [Rec
Mode] is set to “Normal”, “Pre Rec” or “Clip
Continuous”.
0
Set to “Off” if connecting to a device that does
not support record trigger.
9
TC
For setting whether to superimpose time code to
the [HDMI] terminal.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
This item can be configured when [HDMI OUT]
is set to a setting other than
“Off”.
0
Set to “Off” if connecting to a device that does
not support HDMI TC.
Audio Set Item
Input1 Mic Ref.
For setting the reference input level when the
[INPUT1] selection switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC
+48V”.
[Setting Values: -62dB, -56dB,
R-50dB, -44dB,
-38dB, -32dB]
Input2 Mic Ref.
For setting the reference input level when the
[INPUT2] selection switch is set to
“MIC” or “MIC
+48V”.
[Setting Values: -62dB, -56dB,
R-50dB, -44dB,
-38dB, -32dB]
Int. Mic Gain
For setting
the sensitivity of the built-in microphone.
[Setting Values: 12 dB, 6 dB, R0dB]
AUX Gain
For setting the sensitivity of the [AUX] terminal
input.
[Setting Values: 12 dB, 6 dB, R0dB]
Ref. Level
For setting the recording reference level. (Applies
to both [CH1/CH2]
.)
[Setting Values: -12dB, -18dB, R-20dB]
Limiter
For setting the limiter operation.
0
-9dBFS:
Sets “-9dBFS” to the maximum recording level.
0
-6dBFS:
Sets
“-6dBFS
” to the maximum recording level.
0
Off:
Depending on the settings of the [CH1/CH2
AUTO/MANUAL] selection switches, the
operation may be different as described below.
0
The limiter does not function when
“MANUAL
” is set.
0
The limiter
functions at -6dBFS when “AUTO”
is set.
[Setting Values: -9dBFS, R-6dBFS, Off]
132
A/V Set Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
AGC Response
9
Attack Time
Sets the time to activate the limiter.
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]
9
Decay Time
Sets the time to deactivate the limiter operation.
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]
AGC Mode
For setting whether to link the limiter operation of
[CH1] and [CH2].
Select “Link” to link or “Separate
” to separate.
[Setting Values: Link, RSeparate]
Memo :
0
Enabled only
when both the [AUX] input terminal
and [INPUT1/INPUT2] input terminal are set to
“LINE” or “MIC”, and CH1/CH2 of the [CH1/CH2
AUTO/MANUAL] switch is set to “AUTO”.
XLR Manual Level
For setting whether to link manual audio
adjustment operation between [INPUT1] and
[INPUT2] terminals.
Select “Link
” to link or “Separate” to separate.
When this item is set to “Link”, adjust the recording
level using the [CH1] recording level adjustment
knob.
[Setting Values: Link, RSeparate]
Memo :
0
Enabled only when both the [INPUT1/INPUT2
]
input terminals are set to “LINE” or “MIC”, and
both [CH1]/[CH2] of the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/
MANUAL] selection switches are set to
“MANUAL”.
0
When this item is set to
“Link”, [CH2] recording
level adjustment knob is disabled.
Int. Mic Separation
For setting the enhancement level of the stereo
effect of the built-in microphone.
0
On:
Enhances the stereo effect.
0
Off:
Does not enhance the stereo effect.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Memo :
0
Both [CH1] and
[CH2] selection switches are set
to “INT”.
0
When
[Int.
Mic Separation] is set to “On”, a
icon is displayed on the status screen (audio
input) while the function is operating.
Test Tone
For specifying whether to output the audio test
signals (1 kHz) during color bar output.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
INPUT1/2 Wind Cut
For selecting
whether to cut the low frequencies of
the audio input signals (low-cut) when the [INPUT1/
INPUT2] switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC+48V”.
Set this item to reduce wind noise from the
microphone.
0
Both:
Enables low-cut on both the [INPUT1] and
[
INPUT2
] terminals.
0
INPUT2:
Enables low-cut on the audio of the [INPUT2
]
terminal only.
0
INPUT1:
Enables low-cut on the audio of the [
INPUT1]
terminal only.
0
Off:
Disables low-cut.
[Setting Values: Both, INPUT2, INPUT1, ROff]
Int. Mic Wind Cut
For selecting
whether to cut the low frequencies of
the audio input signals (low-cut) from the built-in
microphone. Set this item to “On” to reduce wind
noise from the microphone.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
A/V Set Menu
133
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Equalizer
You can
correct the characteristic and enhance the
sound of the connected microphone using this
equalizer setting.
For setting the audio frequency from a 5-band
equalizer.
0
Frequency:
100Hz, 330Hz, 1kHz, 3.3kHz, 10kHz
0
Variable level:
± 6dB (1dB step)
Memo :
0
Audio will be recorded in the characteristic set
in the equalizer.
0
Set all bands to “0 dB” to bypass the equalizer.
0
When the equalizer level is set to the + side, the
audio may be distorted. In this case, reduce the
recording level in Manual mode.
0
If the values of multiple frequencies are
changed, the specified levels and the actual
levels may be different due to interference
between the frequency bands.
0
This function is enabled only when both
[INPUT1/2 Wind Cut] and [Int. Mic Wind Cut] are
set to “Off”.
Monitor
For setting the audio sound of the [x] terminal to
stereo or mixed sound when the [MONITOR]
selection switch on the LCD monitor is set to
“BOTH”.
0
Mix:
Outputs mixed sound (mixed sound of CH1 and
CH2) to both L and R.
0
Stereo:
Outputs stereo sound (outputs audio sound of
CH1 to L, and CH2 to R).
[Setting Values: RMix, Stereo]
Memo :
0
If both CH1 and CH2 are built-in microphones,
stereo sound is output from the [x] terminal
regardless of the [Monitor]
setting.
IFB/RET Monitor...
9
CH1(/2)
For configuring the output from the [x] terminal
during IFB Return over IP of each channel.
0
Auto:
Outputs upon mixing the IFB/Return over IP
audio with the microphone audio when IFB/
Return over IP audio input is detected. Outputs
only the microphone audio when IFB/Return
over IP audio input is not detected.
0
IFB/RET Only:
Outputs only the IFB/Return over IP audio at all
times.
0
Off:
IFB/Return over IP audio is not output.
[Setting Values: RAuto, IFB/RET Only, Off]
Memo :
0
To
enable
different settings for CH1 and CH2 of
[IFB/RET Monitor], set [Monitor] to “Stereo”.
Alarm Level
For selecting whether to turn on the warning tone
as well as setting the volume.
The warning tone is output from the monitor
speaker or [x] terminal.
[Setting Values: RHigh, Middle, Low, Off]
Audio On FULL AUTO
For setting whether to enable Auto for audio when
the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to “ON”.
0
Auto:
Sets audio recording mode to the auto mode.
0
SW Set:
Sets the audio recording mode following the
[CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] selection switch
setting.
[Setting Values: RAuto, SW Set]
134
A/V Set Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Network Menu
For specifying network-related settings.
The display of the software keyboard for input
varies according to the item you are setting.
Connection Setup...
For configuring the network connection settings.
A [
Wizard] screen will appear according to the
mode of connection. Follow the instructions to
perform the setting.
The preconfigured settings can be loaded, saved
or deleted.
(A P136 [Connection Setup Item] )
Memo :
0
Users cannot access this menu in the following
cases.
0
During manual FTP transfer
0
During live streaming
0
Return over IP in Progress
Live Streaming...
For configuring settings for distributing live video
images and audio.
(A P137 [Live Streaming Item] )
Memo :
0
Users cannot access this menu in the following
cases.
0
When [Record Format] B
[System] is set to a
setting other than “HD” or “SD”
0
During FTP transfer
0
When [Record
Format
] B [Frame Rate] is set
to “24p”
Return over IP...
For configuring settings related to Return over IP.
This function
allows video and audio to be received
via the network.
(A P139 [Return over IP Item] )
Memo :
0
Users cannot access this menu in the following
cases.
0
When [Record Format] B
[System] is set to a
setting other than “HD” or “SD”
0
When [Record
Format
] B [Frame Rate] is set
to “24p”
0
When [Overlay Settings] B [Overlay
Function
]
is set to “Enable”A L
0
When [Record Set
]
B [Time Stamp] is set to
“On”
Web...
For setting the functions that make use of the web
browser.
(A P141 [Web Item] )
Metadata Server...
For registering the FTP server for importing the
metadata and the path of the file to be imported.
Up to 4 settings can be registered.
(A P
142 [Metadata Server Item] )
Upload Settings...
For configuring the method for uploading to the
FTP server as well as the server and directory for
uploading the
clip recorded in the media to the FTP
server.
(A P142 [Upload Settings Item] )
Import Metadata
0
For importing metadata from the FTP server.
0
Metadata loaded by the setup files (“User File”/
“All File
”) will be deleted.
(A
P180 [Importing Metadata] )
Memo :
0
This option is not selectable if the network
connection is not established.
0
This option is not selectable while using the
network.
Network Menu
135
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Zero Config
For allowing this camera recorder to be detected
automatically by external devices (such as
switchers) connected to the same LAN.
Connection can be established via one link from
the menu of the external device.
Memo :
0
The Zero Config function is not equipped with
the function
to change the settings of the camera
recorder.
9
Announcement
For configuring the method of connection from an
external device during automatic detection of this
camera recorder.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
9
Hostname Prefix
Part of the host name can be changed.
It will appear in the format of “XXXX-YYYY.local
on the Status screen (network).
XXXX : Character string (maximum 8 characters)
configured in [Hostname Prefix]
YYYY : Serial number of this camera recorder
Memo :
0
When [
Announcement
] is configured to “Off”,
this item does not appear on the status screen
(Connection Setup).
Reset Network
Restores all items in the [Network] menu to their
default settings.
Connection Setup Item
Wizard
Displays a [Wizard] screen for connecting to the
network.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Setup File
9
Load
Loads the settings on the
[
Wizard] screen.
(A P202 [Reading the Connection Settings
File] )
9
Store
Saves the settings on the [Wizard] screen.
(
A P201 [Saving the Connection Settings File] )
9
Delete
Deletes the saved settings.
(A P203 [Deleting Connection Settings] )
FTP Proxy...
For setting the FTP proxy.
9
Type
Select the type of FTP proxy.
[Setting Values: RNo Proxy, HTTP]
9
Server
Set the FTP proxy server name.
Memo :
0
Enter the name using the onscreen keyboard.
0
You can enter characters not more than 127
bytes using single-byte alphanumeric
characters (a to z, 0 to 9), single-byte hyphen
(“-”) or dot (“.”).
0
When [Type] is set to “No Proxy
”, changes
cannot be made.
9
Port
Set the FTP proxy port number.
Memo :
0
Enter the name using the onscreen keyboard.
0
Enter an integer between 1 and 65535.
APN
For specifying APN (Access Point Name).
* This item is grayed out and cannot be selected
if APN cannot be set for the adapter attached.
Caution :
0
The APN setting is written into the cellular
adapter, not this camera recorder.
Setting a wrong APN may result in
communication failure or expensive bills from
the telecommunications
company. Set the APN
correctly.
(A P180 [Cellular adapter connection (“USB”-
“Cellular”)] )
136
Network Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Live Streaming Item
Live Streaming
Starts live distribution when “On” is selected.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
“On” cannot be selected if streaming is not
possible with
the selected resolution, frame rate
and bitrate combination.
0
“On” cannot be selected if connection of the
selected network is not established.
0
“On” cannot be selected when FTP is running.
0
Live
streaming
switches to “Off” when the power
is turned off.
9
Auto Restart
When the network is reconnected after
disconnection, live streaming will resume
automatically.
0
On:
Once the
network is reconnected, live streaming
resumes automatically.
0
Off:
Live streaming does not resume automatically
even when the network is reconnected.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
When the power of the camera is turned off,
regardless of the settings in [Auto Restart]
, live
streaming does not begin automatically even
when power is turned on again and network
connection is established.
0
The setting cannot be changed during live
streaming (when
live streaming is configured to
“On”).
Server
For selecting the server for live streaming.
[Setting Values: RServer1, Server2, Server3,
Server4]
Memo :
0
The setting cannot be changed during live
streaming (when [
Live Streaming] set to “On”).
9
Streaming Server
For setting the server for live streaming.
Memo :
0
The setting cannot be changed during live
streaming (when [
Live Streaming] set to “On”).
9
Server1, Server2, Server3, Server4
* The name that is set in
[Alias] is displayed
individually.
o
Alias
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this
camera.
The name set in this item will be displayed in the
[Server] options.
*1 The default value is
“Server1/Server2/
Server3/Server4”.
*2 You can enter up to 31 characters and ASCII
characters.
o
Type
For configuring the system for transferring video
and audio to be distributed.
[Setting Values: RMPEG2-TS/UDP, MPEG2-TS/
TCP, MPEG2-TS/RTPRTSP/RTP, ZIXI, RTMP]
A
[Setting Values: RMPEG2-TS/UDP, MPEG2-TS/
TCP, MPEG2-TS/RTP, RTSP/RTP, RTMP] B
Memo :
0
Use reception devices that are compatible with
the respective transfer systems.
0
To use the “ZIXI
” setting, a dedicated server is
needed separately. A
0
The following items that can be set vary
depending on the setting of this item.
o
Destination Address
For setting details such as the host name and the
IP address of the live distribution destination.
*
Enter not more than 127 characters using
single-byte
alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to
9), single-byte hyphen [-], or dot [.].
Network Menu
137
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
o
Destination URL
For entering the URL of the live distribution
destination beginning with “rtmp://”.
There is no default value (blank).
* You can enter up to 191 characters and ASCII
characters.
Memo :
0
This
item
is selectable only when [Type] is set to
“RTMP”.
o
Destination Port
Enter the network port number of the live
distribution destination
using an integer between 1
and 65535.
When [Type] is set to “MPEG2-TS/UDP”, “MPEG2-
TS/TCP” or “MPEG2-TS/RTP”, the default value is
“6504”. If “ZIXI” is set, the default value is “2088”.
Memo :
0
When [Type] is set to “MPEG2-TS/RTP”, only
even numbers from 2 to 65530 can be specified
for the port number.
0
When [Type] is set to “MPEG2-TS/RTP
” and
[SMPTE 2022-1 FEC] is set to “On”, N+2 and N
+4 port numbers are also used in addition to the
specified port number (N).
o
Stream ID A
For setting the registered stream ID of the live
distribution destination.
The default value varies with the product model.
* Enter not more than 63 characters.
Memo :
0
This item
is selectable only when [Type] is set to
“ZIXI”.
o
Stream Key
Enter the stream key specified at the live
transmission destination.
There is no default value (blank).
* Enter not more than 127 characters.
Memo :
0
This item
is selectable only when [Type] is set to
“RTMP”.
o
Username
For setting the user name.
The default value is “JVC”.
*
Enter not more than 31 characters.
Memo :
0
This
item
is selectable only when [Type] is set to
“RTSP/RTP”.
o
Password
For setting the [Stream ID] password.
For ZIXI, there is no default value (blank).
For RTSP/RTP,
a random alphanumeric value that
varies with each model is assigned as the default
value.
* Enter not more than 127 characters. Enter not
more than 31 characters for RTSP/RTP setting.
o
Latency A
For setting the latency mode.
[Setting Values: High, Medium, RLow, Min]
Memo :
0
This item
is selectable only when [Type] is set to
“ZIXI”.
o
Adaptive Bit Rate A
If “On” is selected, the bit rate setting value of live
streaming is set to maximum limit, and the bit rate
is changed automatically according to changes in
the network bandwidth.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
[Adaptive Bit Rate] can be configured when
[Type] is configured to “ZIXI”.
* The bit rate is displayed on the status screen
only when “On” is set.
o
SMPTE 2022-1 FEC
Set to “On” to use FEC (Forward Error Correction).
A transmission system that recovers the missing
packets
in the decoding process without having to
retransmit the missing packets.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
* The decoder must be compatible with SMPTE
2022-1.
Memo :
0
This item
is selectable only when [Type] is set to
“MPEG2-TS/RTP”.
138
Network Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
o
FEC Matrix
For setting the amount of FEC (Forward Error
Correction) overhead for configuring
SMPTE2022-1.
(A P209 [Setting the FEC Matrix] )
Memo :
0
This item is selectable only when [SMPTE
2022-1 FEC
] is set to “On”.
Resolution
For setting
the resolution of the video image during
live distribution.
The available options vary according to the settings
for [WResolution] and [WFrame Rate] under
[Record Format].
W Resolution
Setting Value
1920x1080
1440x1080
1920x1080, 1280x720,
640x360, 720x480,
720x576
1280x720 1280x720,
640x360
720x480 (U model) 720x480
720x576 (E model) 720x576
Memo :
0
The setting cannot be changed during live
streaming (when [Live Streaming
] set to “On”).
0
The Aspect
Ratio for the live streaming image is
fixed to “16:9”.
Frame Rate
For setting
the frame rate of the video image during
live distribution.
The options vary according to the settings of [Live
Streaming Set] B [Resolution] and the [WFrame
Rate] settings under [Record Format].
W Frame Rate
Setting Value
60p, 60i 60p, 60i, 30p
50p, 50i 50p, 50i, 25p
30p 30p
25p 25p
Memo :
0
The setting cannot be changed during live
streaming (when live streaming is configured to
“On”).
Bit Rate
For setting the encode bitrate of the video image
during live distribution.
The selectable options vary according to the
settings in
[Live Streaming Set] B [Resolution] and
[Bit Rate].
For details on the settings, please refer to
[Distributable [Record Format] and [Live Streaming
Set] Combinations] (A P 206).
Memo :
0
The setting cannot be changed during live
streaming (when [Live Streaming] set to “On”).
0
Depending on
the type of network adapter used
and the connection, images and audio sound
during live streaming may be choppy.
Return over IP Item
Function A
For configuring the Return over IP function to
Enable
or
Disable when in the QuickTime(MPEG2)
or MXF(MPEG2) mode.
[Setting Values: Enable, RDisable]
Memo :
0
Configure this
item when “QuickTime(MPEG2)”
or “MXF(MPEG2)” is selected for [System] B
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [WFormat].
The live streaming images may turn out different
depending on whether this item is configured to
“Enable” or “Disable”. It is recommended that
this item be configured to “Disable” if only live
streaming is to be used.
0
When this is configured to “Enable” and
[Camera Process
]
B [Color Space] is
configured to “J-Log1” or “HLG”, live streaming
settings will be as follows.
0
[
Color Space
] “ITU709”
0
[Gamma
] “Standard”
0
[Knee]“Manual
”/[Level]“95.0%”
0
[Color Matrix
] “Standard”
Return over IP
For configuring Return over IP to On/Off.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
This is fixed at
“Off
” when [Return over IP] B
[Function] is set to “Disable”. A
Network Menu
139
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Server
For selecting the source server for sending out
Return over IP audio/video.
[Setting Values: RServer1, Server2, Server3,
Server4]
Memo :
0
The setting cannot be changed while Return
over IP
is operating (when [Return over IP] is set
to “On”).
0
When [Return over IP] B [Function
] is
configured to
“Disable”, this item cannot be
changed. A
9
Return Server
For configuring the source server for sending out
Return over IP audio/video.
Memo :
0
The setting cannot be changed while Return
over IP
is operating (when [Return over IP] is set
to “On”).
9
Server1, Server2, Server3, Server4
* The name that is set in [Alias] is displayed
individually.
o
Alias
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this
camera.
The name set in this item will be displayed in the
[Server] options.
*1 The default value is
“Server1/Server2/
Server3/Server4”.
*2 You can enter up to 31 characters and ASCII
characters.
o
Type
For configuring the system for transferring video
and audio to be distributed.
[Setting Values: RRTSP/RTP, ZIXI, Icecast] A
[Setting Values: RRTSP/RTP, Icecast] B
Memo :
0
Operates as IFB when the setting is configured
to “Icecast”.
0
Use transmission devices that are compatible
with the respective transfer systems.
0
To use the “ZIXI” setting, a dedicated server is
needed separately.
0
The following items that can be set vary
depending on the setting of this item.
o
Protocol
For configuring the protocol of the video/audio
source server to be connected.
[Setting Values: RUDP, TCP]
Memo :
0
This item
is selectable only when [Type] is set to
“RTSP/RTP”.
o
Source Address
For configuring details such as the host name and
IP address
of the video/audio transmission source.
There is no default value (blank).
* You can enter up to 191 characters and ASCII
characters.
o
Source Port
Enter the network port number of the video/audio
transmission source using an integer between 1
and 65535.
The default value is
“554
” when [Type] is set to
“RTSP/RTP”, “2077” when it is set to “ZIXI”, and
“5000” when it is set to Icecast.
Memo :
0
When [Type] is set to
“RTSP/RTP”, only even
numbers from 2 to 65530 can be specified for
the port number.
o
Stream ID
For configuring the stream ID registered on the
video/audio transmission source.
There is no default value (blank).
* Enter not more than 63 characters.
Memo :
0
This item is available for setting when [Type
] is
set to “RTSP/RTP” or “ZIXI”.
o
Username
For setting the user name.
There is no default value (blank).
* Enter not more than 63 characters.
Memo :
0
This item
is selectable only when [Type] is set to
“RTSP/RTP”.
140
Network Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
o
Password
For setting the password.
There is no default value (blank).
* You can enter up to 31 characters when [
Type]
is set to “RTSP/RTP”.
* You can enter up to 127 characters when [Type]
is set to “ZIXI”.
Memo :
0
This item is available for setting when [Type
] is
set to “RTSP/RTP” or “ZIXI”.
o
Name A
For configuring the name.
The default value is
“HC550
”.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
Memo :
0
This item
is selectable only when [Type] is set to
“ZIXI”.
o
Latency A
For setting the latency mode.
[Setting Values: Medium, RMin, Off]
Memo :
0
This item
is selectable only when [Type] is set to
“ZIXI”.
o
Mountpoint
Enter the mountpoint (character string for
identifying a stream) for streaming servers that
support multiple streams.
There is no default value (blank).
* Enter not more than 63 characters.
Memo :
0
This item
is selectable only when [Type] is set to
“Icecast”.
Web Item
Web Access
To access via a web browser, set to
“On”.
[Setting Values:
ROn, Off]
Camera Name
For setting the name to be displayed on the web
browser. Enter not more than 8 characters using
the software keyboard.
(Default value: HC550 A, HC500 B)
Username
For setting the user name. Enter not more than 31
characters using the software keyboard.
(Default value: jvc)
Password
Changes the password for accessing via a web
browser.
The current password is displayed. Enter a new
password directly.
Enter not more than 31 characters using the
software keyboard.
(Default value: random alphanumeric value that
varies with each model)
Port
For configuring
the port number during access to a
web page from an external source.
Memo :
0
Enter the name using the software keyboard.
0
Enter an
integer between 1 and 65535. (Default
value: 80)
0
To configure the setting to a number other than
the default value, specify the number of an
unused port.
0
For more details, please consult the
administrator of the network in use.
Network Menu
141
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Metadata Server Item
Meta-FTP1, Meta-FTP2, Meta-FTP3, Meta-
FTP4
*
The name that is set in
[Alias] is displayed
individually.
o
Alias
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this
camera.
The name set in this item will be displayed in the
[Import Metadata] options.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
o
Protocol
For setting the protocol of the FTP server to be
connected.
0
FTP:
Protocol that
does not encrypt the incoming and
outgoing data.
0
SFTP:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSH.
0
FTPS:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSL or TLS. It uses an implicit mode
(starts encrypted communication once
connection starts).
0
FTPES:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSL or TLS. It uses an explicit mode
(starts encrypted communication after
permission is granted).
[Setting Values: RFTP, SFTP, FTPS, FTPES]
o
Server
For setting the server name (“mystation.com”, etc.)
or the IP address (“192.168.0.1”, etc.) of the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 127 characters using
single-byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to
9), single-byte hyphen [-], or dot [.].
o
Port
Enter the FTP server port number to use using an
integer between 1 and 65535.
The default value varies with the protocol setting.
(FTP: 21, SFTP: 22, FTPS: 990, FTPES: 21)
o
File Path
Enter the path name for the metadata file (“/pub/
meta.xml”, “/home/user/meta2.xml”, etc.)
0
Enter not more than 127 characters.
o
Username
Enter the user name for connecting to the FTP
server.
*
Enter not more than 31 characters.
o
Password
Enter the password for connecting to the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
o
PASV Mode
For
setting whether to set the communication mode
used for file transfer to the passive mode.
Set to “On” if the camera is inside a firewall, and a
connection from the FTP server to the camera
cannot be established.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
When [Protocol] is set to “SFTP”, this item
appears as
“---” and cannot be selected.
Upload Settings Item
Upload
For configuring the method for uploading to the
FTP server.
0
Auto:
Select this option for automatic FTP transfer.
FTP transfer starts when [Auto Upload] is
configured to “On”.
0
Manual:
Select this option for manual FTP transfer from
the Media mode.
[Setting Values:
RAuto, Manual]
Auto Upload
When [Upload] is configured to “Auto”, FTP
transfer starts automatically when the setting is
configured to “On”.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
This is fixed at
“Off” when [System] is set to
“High-Speed”.
0
Configuring
[Auto Upload] to “
On” disables
configuration of all the settings under the Upload
Settings item.
9
Slot
For selecting the recording media slot to enable
automatic upload.
[Setting Values: RA, B]
Memo :
0
This is
fixed at “EXT” when [System] is set to “4K
EXT (SSD)”.
142
Network Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
Cellular
For configuring
whether to enable connection via a
USB cellular adapter.
[Setting Values: Enable, RDisable]
9
Server
For configuring
the server for uploading to the FTP
server.
[Setting Values: RClip-FTP1, Clip-FTP2, Clip-
FTP3, Clip-FTP4]
Clip Server
9
Clip-FTP1, Clip-FTP2, Clip-FTP3, Clip-
FTP4
* The name that is set in
[Alias] is displayed
individually.
o
Alias
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this
camera.
The name set in this item will appear on the [FTP
Upload] action screen of the thumbnail display.
*
Enter not more than 31 characters.
o
Protocol
For setting the protocol of the FTP server to be
connected.
0
FTP:
Protocol that
does not encrypt the incoming and
outgoing data.
0
SFTP:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSH.
0
FTPS:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSL or TLS. It uses an implicit mode
(starts encrypted communication once
connection starts).
0
FTPES:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSL or TLS. It uses an explicit mode
(starts encrypted communication after
permission is granted).
0
ZIXI:
Enables stable transmission by reducing jitter
and packet loss significantly through
communicating via a relay server.
[Setting Values: RFTP, SFTP, FTPS, FTPES,
ZIXI] A
[Setting Values: RFTP, SFTP, FTPS, FTPES] B
Memo :
0
To use the “ZIXI” setting, a dedicated server is
needed separately.
0
If “ZIXI” is set, the resume function is enabled.
o
Server
For setting
the server name (“mystation.com”, etc.)
or the IP address (“192.168.0.1”, etc.) of the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 127 characters using
single-byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to
9), single-byte hyphen [-], or dot [.].
o
Port
Enter the FTP server port number to use using an
integer between 1 and 65535.
The default value varies with the protocol setting.
(FTP: 21, SFTP: 22, FTPS: 990, FTPES: 21, ZIXI:
2088)
o
Dir. Path
Enter the path name for the directory to upload to
(“/pub”, “/home/user”, etc.)
*
Enter not more than 127 characters.
o
Username
Enter the user name for connecting to the FTP
server.
*
Enter not more than 31 characters.
o
Stream ID A
For configuring the stream ID that is registered at
the distribution destination.
The default value varies with the product model.
*
Enter not more than 63 characters.
Memo :
0
This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
“ZIXI”.
o
Password
Enter the password for connecting to the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 31 characters. Enter not
more than 127 characters for ZIXI setting.
o
PASV Mode
For
setting whether to set the communication mode
used for file transfer to the passive mode.
Set to
“On
” if the camera is inside a firewall, and a
connection from the FTP server to the camera
cannot be established.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
When [Protocol
] is configured to “SFTP” or
“ZIXI”, this item appears as “---” and cannot be
selected.
Network Menu
143
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Overlay Settings Menu
A L
This screen is used to configure overlay settings.
Images can be overlaid onto recorded video and
live stream video.
Overlay Function
For specifying whether to activate the overlay
function.
[Setting Values: Enable, RDisable]
Memo :
0
The setting cannot be changed during
recording, streaming or Return over IP.
0
When [System] is configured to a setting other
than “HD” and “HD+Web”, this item is fixed at
“Disable”.
0
When “Disable
” is selected, settings of the
overlay function cannot be changed.
Layout
For selecting a SDP file.
Memo :
0
Create a SDP file using SDP Generator in
Windows or Mac before recording.
Import User Layout
Load the SDP file that is created by using SDP
Generator onto this camera recorder.
Memo :
0
Maximum 4 files can be saved in this camera
recorder.
0
The SDP file may not be saved depending on
the available memory capacity of the camera
recorder.
Delete User Layout
For deleting the SDP file.
Memo :
0
The SDP
file is not deleted by selecting [System]
B [Reset All]. Delete the file from the camera
recorder.
Type
By selecting [Type], overlay images can be
displayed.
The selectable types of scoreboards vary with the
[Layout] settings.
L
[Setting Values: Broadcast, RNone] A
[Setting Values: Broadcast, Basketball, Baseball,
Football, Type 2, Type 1, RNone] L
Memo :
0
Selecting [Layout] or [Type] of the scoreboard
overlay imported using
[Import User Layout]
displays the team settings menu. L
Overlay Custom Menu
The display changes according to the imported
data.
Output
For specifying overlay output settings.
9
HD Recording
For setting whether to record overlay images
together with the recorded video into an SD card.
0
On:
Saves the
video with overlay images into an SD
card.
0
Off:
Overlay images are not recorded into an SD
card.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
9
HDMI
For setting whether to display overlay images on
HDMI output.
0
On:
Displays overlay images on streaming videos
and HDMI output.
0
Off:
Displays overlay images only on streaming
videos.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
9
SDI (Fixed)
Displays
overlay
images on the SDI output. Setting
is fixed at “On” and cannot be changed.
144
Overlay Settings Menu A L
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
Proxy Recording (Fixed)
Displays overlay images on the recording in slot B
when [System] is
configured to “HD+Web”. Setting
is fixed at “On” and cannot be changed.
9
Live Streaming (Fixed)
Displays overlay images on live streaming videos.
Setting is fixed at
“On” and cannot be changed.
Sportzcast L
This camera
recorder can be linked to a Sporzcast
product to automatically import the scoreboard
data at sports stadiums.
0
Connect:
Connects to the preconfigured Sportzcast
server.
0
Disconnect:
Terminates the current connection with the
Sportzcast server.
[Setting Values: Connect, RDisconnect]
Memo :
0
“Connect” cannot be selected if network
connection is not established.
0
Switches to “Disconnect” upon shifting to a
mode other than the Record mode or when the
unit is powered off.
0
[Settings] cannot be selected when
[
Overlay
Settings] B [Sportzcast] is configured to
“Connect”.
9
Settings
For specifying settings related to Sporzcast.
(A P
146 [Settings Item
L (Sportzcast)] )
Watermark
Inserting watermarks (digital watermark) on
recorded videos
protects the content of your work.
0
On:
Displays watermark.
0
Off:
Does not display watermark.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
It can be displayed when the SDP file for which
“Watermark” is preconfigured is selected in
[Layout
].
9
Position
The display position of the watermark can be
changed by using the cross-shaped button.
Full Screen Graphic
Images can
be displayed across the whole screen.
9
Status
For displaying the number of images saved in this
camera recorder and the memory capacity used.
(A P216 [Displaying Images on the Whole
Screen (Full Screen Graphic Function)] )
9
Import Graphic W / Y
For reading the images to be used in Full Screen
Graphic from an SD card.
Memo :
0
JPEG and PNG formats are supported.
0
Enter not more than 31 characters for the file
name.
9
Delete Graphic
For deleting all images saved in this camera
recorder.
Password Lock
The Overlay Settings menu can be locked with a
password.
0
On:
A password is required to open the Overlay
Settings menu.
0
Off:
Opens the Overlay Settings menu without a
password.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
(A P218 [Protecting Overlay Settings with a
Password] )
Caution :
0
Do not
forget the password that you have set. If
the password is lost or forgotten, you cannot
deactivate the password protection function.
Overlay Settings Menu A L
145
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Settings Item L (Sportzcast)
Server
Select the server to connect to.
0
Cloud:
For configuring the setting when connecting to
the Sportzcast cloud service.
[Setting Values: RCloud, Server1 to Server3]
9
Sever Settings
o
Alias
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this
camera. The
name set in this item will be displayed
in the [Server] options.
*1 The default value is “Cloud/Server1/Server2/
Server3”.
*2 You can enter up to 31 characters and ASCII
characters.
o
Address
For configuring details such as the host name and
the IP address of the destination of connection.
* Enter not more than 127 characters using
single-byte
alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to
9), single-byte hyphen [-] or dot [.].
o
Broadcast
Set to “On” when connecting 3 or more Scorebot
units to the camera at the same time.
The
broadcast
setting on the Scorebot also needs
to be set to “On”. For details on how to configure
the setting on the Scorebot, please consult
“Sportzcast”.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
9
Search Local Server
For searching local servers (Scorebot) that are
connected
to
the same local network as the camera
through the Wizard and configuring the selected
Scorebot to the [Server Settings].
Memo :
0
If a Scorebot is currently being connected,
search cannot
be performed until the connection
has been terminated.
0
Old settings that are saved in [Server Settings]
at the storage destination will be overwritten.
0
Connection is automatically established upon
exiting the Wizard, and the [Server] setting
switches to [Server Settings] while the camera
is connected to the Scorebot.
9
License Name
Enter the license name provided by Sportzcast.
A license name that is currently in use by another
camera cannot be used.
9
BOT Number
Enter the BOT number provided by Sportzcast.
9
Channel
Enter the channel provided by Sportzcast.
Score Input Source
For selecting whether to acquire the next score
information
from
the server or to manually input the
score from the web browser screen when
[Sportzcast] is set to “Connect”. This option comes
in handy when you want to manually enter only a
part of the information.
Memo :
0
The [Display
] and [Overlay] buttons on the web
browser screen remain enabled at all times
regardless of the setting of this item.
0
The [Display] and [Overlay] buttons on the web
browser screen remain enabled at all times
regardless of the setting of this item.
0
If the
overlay display is not updated even though
the camera recorder is connected to a
Sportzcast server, check whether “Sportzcast”
is selected for each of the [Score Input Source]
items.
9
Display Order (Home)
For selecting whether to display the score
information of
the home team that is acquired from
the Sportzcast in the left or right column (or upper
or lower row). However, in the case of a baseball
game, the score is always displayed in the lower
row regardless of the setting.
0
Last:
Displays the score in the right column or lower
row.
0
First:
Displays the score in the left column or upper
row.
[Setting Values: RLast, First]
9
Team Name
For selecting the data reference source for the
team name.
[Setting Values: RSportscast, Web]
9
Shot Clock
For
selecting
the data reference source for the shot
clock.
[Setting Values: RSportscast, Web]
9
Others
For selecting the data reference source for score
information
not
included in the respective settings.
[Setting Values: RSportscast, Web]
146
Overlay Settings Menu A L
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
System Menu
This menu screen allows system-related settings.
For configuring recording settings, formatting and
restoration of
a recording media, tally lamp setting,
date/time, time zone and other settings.
It can also be used to reset the menu settings to
their default values.
Record Set...
For specifying recorded video-related settings.
(A P149 [Record Set Item] )
Media
9
Format Media
For formatting (initializing) a recording media.
Select a card slot, select [
Format] from [Cancel]/
[Format], and press the Set button (R) to format
(initialize) the card.
(A P51 [Formatting (Initializing) of Recording
Media] )
9
Restore Media
For restoring a recording media.
Select a card slot, and press the Set button (R) to
restore the recording media.
(A P52
[Repairing the Recording Media] )
Memo :
0
[! RESTORE]
appears in the remaining level
display area when a recording media that
requires repair is inserted. However, it is not
selectable when recording in Camera mode and
during Clip Review.
Setup File
This allows you to save the menu settings as well
as the performance results of shutter speed and
AWB.
It is useful to save settings according to different
shooting conditions.
9
Load File...
Loads the settings.
(A P174 [Loading a Setup File] )
9
Store File...
Saves the settings.
(A P173 [Saving Setup Files] )
9
Delete File...
Deletes the settings.
(A P
174 [Deleting Setup Files] )
Tally Lamp
For setting
whether to light up the tally lamp during
recording, when the remaining space warning is
displayed, or during live streaming.
Memo :
0
The blinking warning display, such as when the
remaining battery level is low, is enabled in a
setting other than “Off”.
0
Rec/Live Streaming:
Lights up during recording or live streaming.
0
Live Streaming:
Lights up during live streaming. Does not light
up during recording.
0
Rec:
Lights up during recording.
0
External:
Lights up when the camera recorder is
controlled by an external device such as RM-
LP100.
When external is selected, [PVW] is displayed
on the
LCD/VF screen during Preview Tally, and
[PGM] is displayed on the LCD/VF screen
during Program Tally.
0
Off:
Turns off the indicator.
[Setting Values: Rec/Live Streaming, Live
Streaming, RRec, External, Off]
System Menu
147
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
NETWORK LED
When this is configured to “On”, it lights up in red
when live streaming is in progress.
The
LED lights up in orange during poor streaming
connection or connection failure.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
STATUS LED
For configuring the STATUS LED.
0
REC/Pre Rec:
Lights
up
in red during recording or transition to
recording. Lights up in orange when the
remaining space on the recording media is
running low. Lights up in green when Pre Rec is
on standby.
0
External:
Lights up in red while in the Program mode when
an external device such as RM-LP100 is
connected. Lights up in green while in the
Preview mode.
0
Return over IP:
Lights up in green during Return over IP or when
IFB is in progress. Lights up in orange when an
error has occurred.
0
Off:
Does not light up.
[Setting Values: RREC/Pre Rec, External, Return
over IP, Off]
LED Bright
For specifying the brightness of the NETWORK
LED and STATUS LED.
[Setting Values: High, Middle, Low]
GPS A L
For setting the GPS function to On or Off (power
on/off).
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
When [A/V Set] B [Video Set]
B [SDI OUT1
Res.] is set to “1080p”, configuring [System] B
[GPS] to “On” changes the setting to “1080i”.
Language
Switches between languages in the menu screen.
[Setting Values: REnglish, Français, Español] (U
model)
[Setting Values: REnglish, Français, Deutsch,
Italiano, Español, Pусский, Türkçe] (E model)
Reset All
Resets all menu settings.
Memo :
0
[Date/Time] and [Time Zone
] cannot be reset.
(A P148 [ Date/Time ] )
(
A P149 [ Time Zone ] )
0
This item is not selectable when recording in
Camera mode, during Clip Review, during live
streaming and in Media mode.
Date/Time
For setting
the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
Memo :
0
The display
order of the date (year, month, day)
follows the setting in [Display Settings] B [Date
Style]. However, the 24-hour format is used for
the hour display regardless of the [Time Style]
setting.
(A P149
[ Time Style ] )
0
For setting the time acquired from the GPS
satellite by pressing the [FOCUS ASSIST/1]
button if radio wave reception from the GPS
satellite allows for setting of the date and time.
The
[USER1] button is grayed out if information
for setting the date and time cannot be acquired
from the GPS satellite. A L
Date Style
For setting the date display sequence for display
on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen as well
as for time stamp recording.
Display examples of the setting values are as
follows.
0
DMY2: 30 Jun 2019
0
DMY1: 30-06-2019
0
MDY2: Jun 30, 2019
0
MDY1: 06-30-2019
0
YMD: 2019-06-30
[Setting Values: DMY2, DMY1, MDY1, MDY2,
YMD]
(Default values: MDY2 (U model), DMY1 (E
model))
148
System Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Time Style
For setting the time display for display on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen as well as for time
stamp recording.
[Setting Values: R24hour, 12hour]
Time Zone
For setting the UTC time difference in units of 30
minutes.
[Setting Values: UTC-12:00-UTC-00:30, UTC,
UTC+00:30-UTC+14:00 (in 30 min increments)]
(Default values: UTC-05:00 (U model), UTC (E
model))
Memo :
0
If [Date/Time] is already set, the
[Date/Time]
item is automatically adjusted when [Time
Zone] is altered.
Reserved
For setting the additional function to “On” or “Off”.
9
Reserved 1 to Reserved 16
Normally set to
“Off”.
[Setting Values: On,
ROff]
System Information
9
Version
Displays information on the firmware version.
Display
:
0000-0000
9
Fan Hour
For displaying the usage time of the internal fan.
Memo :
0
Under normal environment, dust will
accumulate on
the internal fan when the camera
recorder is used over a long period. Dust may
enter the camera recorder especially if it is used
outdoors. This may affect the image and sound
quality of the camera recorder. Check and
replace the fan after every 9000 hours
(suggested guideline).
9
Open Source License
Displays the license for the open source software
used by this camera recorder.
Record Set Item
Record Format
After setting of all items in the
[Record Format
]
menu is complete, select [Set] at the bottom of the
screen to apply the new settings on the camera
recorder and switch the recording format. A
“Please Wait...” message appears during
switching.
9
System
For selecting a system definition.
0
4K EXT (SSD):
Records videos in “4K EXT” quality to
[EXT.SLOT
] (SSD media).
0
4K:
Records in “4K” quality for both slots A and B.
0
HD:
Records
in “HD” (High Definition) quality for both
slots A and B.
0
SD:
Records in
“SD” (Standard Definition) quality for
both slots A and B.
0
HD+Web:
Records in “HD” (high definition) for slot A, and
in resolution
suitable for web distribution for slot
B.
0
High-Speed:
Records slow motion videos in “HD”
(High
Definition) for both slot A and slot B.
[Setting Values: 4K EXT (SSD), 4K, RHD, SD, HD
+Web, High-Speed]
Caution :
0
The selectable options for the [WFormat]/
[GFormat], [WResolution]/[GResolution],
[WFrame Rate]/[GFrame Rate], [WBit Rate]/
[GBit Rate], [WAudio]/[GAudio], [YFormat],
[YResolution], [YFrame Rate], [YBit Rate] and
[YAudio] settings vary depending on the setting
of this item.
System Menu
149
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
WFormat/ GFormat
For selecting
the format of the file to be recorded to
the recording media in slot A or [EXT.SLOT].
0
QuickTime(MPEG2):
QuickTime file format (.MOV)
0
MXF(MPEG2):
MXF (material exchange format)
0
QuickTime(H.264):
QuickTime file format (.MOV)
0
Exchange: (U model only)
Sports Video Interop Group format
0
MP4 (H.264): (E model only)
MP4 file format
[Setting Values: QuickTime(MPEG2),
MXF(MPEG2), RQuickTime(H.264), Exchange]
(U model only)A
[Setting Values: QuickTime(MPEG2),
MXF(MPEG2), RQuickTime(H.264), MP4 (H.
264)](E model only)A
[Setting Values: RQuickTime(H.264), Exchange]
(U model only)B
[Setting Values: RQuickTime(H.264), MP4 (H.
264)](E model only)B
[Setting Values: QuickTime(H.264), RExchange]
L
Memo :
0
When [System]
is set to “4K EXT (SSD)”, this
item is fixed at “ProRes”.
0
When
[System]
is set to “4K”, “SD”, “HD+Web”,
or “High-Speed”, this item is fixed at
“QuickTime(H.264)”.
0
Exchange
file
format can be selected only when
[System] is set to “HD”.
0
Exchange format is used under license from
Sports Video Interoperability Group, Inc..
9
WResolution/ GResolution
For selecting the size of the still image to be
recorded to the recording media in slot A or
[EXT.SLOT]
. (Horizontal x vertical)
The available options vary according to the settings
of [System] and [WFormat].
0
When [
System
] is set to “4K EXT (SSD)” or “4K”:
Fixed at “3840x2160”.
0
When
[System]
is set to “HD”, and [WFormat] is
set to “QuickTime(MPEG2)” or “MXF(MPEG2)”:
[Setting Values: R1920x1080, 1440x1080,
1280x720]
0
When
[System]
is set to “HD”, and [WFormat] is
set to “QuickTime(H.264)”:
[Setting Values: 1920x1080, 1280x720]
0
When
[System]
is set to “HD”, and [WFormat] is
set to “Exchange” (U model only):
[Setting Values: 1920x1080, 1280x720]
0
When
[
System] is set to “HD”, and [WFormat] is
set to “MP4(H.264)” (E model only):
[Setting Values: 1920x1080, 1280x720]
0
When [System] is set to
“HD+Web”:
[Setting Values: 1920x1080, 1280x720]
0
When [System
] is set to “High-Speed”:
Fixed at “1920x1080”.
0
When [System] is set to
“SD”:
Fixed at either “720x480
” or “720x576”.
Memo :
0
The selectable values of [WFrame Rate]/
[GFrame Rate] and [WBit Rate]/[GBit Rate]
vary according to the setting of this item.
150
System Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
WFrame Rate/ GFrame Rate
For selecting the frame rate for recording to the
recording media in slot A or [
EXT.SLOT].
The available options vary according to the settings
for [System], [WResolution]/[GResolution] and
[WFormat]/[GFormat].
0
When [System] is set to
“4K EXT (SSD)
”:
[Setting Values: 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, 24p]
0
When [System]
is set to “4K”:
[Setting Values: 30p, 25p, 24p]
0
When [System] is set to “HD”, [
WFormat] is set
to “QuickTime(MPEG2)” or
“MXF(MPEG2)”A, and [WResolution] is set
to “1920x1080”:
[Setting Values: 60i, 50i, 30p, 25p]
0
When [System] is set to
“HD” or “HD+Web”,
[
WFormat] is set to “QuickTime(H.264)”, and
[WResolution] is set to “1920x1080”:
[Setting Values: 60p, 60i, 50p, 50i, 30p, 25p,
24p]
0
When [System] is set to
“HD”, and
[WResolution] to “1440x1080”:
[Setting Values: 60i, 50i]
0
When
[System
] is set to “HD” or “HD+Web” and
[WResolution] is set to “1280x720”:
[Setting Values: 60p, 50p]
0
When [
System
] is set to “HD”, and [WFormat] to
“Exchange”:
Fixed at “60p”. (U model only)
0
When [System]
is
set to “HD”, and [WFormat] to
“MP4(H.264)”:
Fixed at “50p”. (E model only)
0
When [System] is set to
“SD”:
Fixed at “60i”. (U model only)
0
When [System] is set to
“SD”:
Fixed at “50i
”. (E model only)
0
When [
System
] is set to “High-Speed”:
[Setting Values: 120/60p, 100/50p, 120/30p,
100/25p, 120/24p]
9
WBit Rate/ GBit Rate
For selecting the bit rate for recording to the
recording media in slot A or [EXT.SLOT].
The available
options vary according to the settings
for [System], [WResolution]/[GResolution] and
[WFormat]/[GFormat].
0
When [System] is set to
“4K EXT (SSD)
”:
[Setting Values: 422HQ, 422, 422LT]
0
When [System
] is set to “4K”:
[Setting Values:
150M, 150M, 70M]
0
When [System
] is set to “HD”, [WFormat] is set
to “QuickTime(MPEG2)” or
“MXF(MPEG2)”A, and [WResolution] is set
to “1440x1080”:
[Setting Values: 35M (HQ), 25M (SP)]
* When
[W
Resolution] is set to a setting other than
“1440x1080”, it is fixed at “35M (HQ)”.
0
When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD+Web” and
[WFormat] is set to “QuickTime(H.264)”:
0
When [WResolution] is set to
“1920x1080
”,
and [WFrame Rate] is set to “60p” or “50p”:
[Setting Values:
70M (XHQ),
50M (XHQ), 50M (XHQ)]
0
When [WResolution] is set to
“1920x1080
”,
and [WFrame Rate] to “60i”/“50i”/“30p”/“25p”/
“24p”:
[Setting Values:
50M (XHQ), 50M
(XHQ), 35M (UHQ)]
0
When [WResolution] is set to “1280x720”:
[Setting Values:
50M (XHQ), 35M
(UHQ)]
0
When [System]
is set to “HD”, and [WFormat] to
“Exchange” (U model only):
0
When [System]
is
set to “HD”, and [WFormat] to
“MP4(H.264)” (E model only):
0
When [WResolution] is set to “1920x1080
:
Fixed at “12M(LP)”.
0
When [WResolution] is set to
“1280x720
”:
Fixed at “8M(LP)”.
0
When [System] is set to
“SD”:
Fixed at 8M (HQ).
0
When [System]
is set to “High-Speed”:
0
When [WFrame Rate] is set to “120/60p
” or
“100/50p”
[Setting Values:
70M (XHQ),
50M (XHQ), 50M (UHQ)]
0
When [WFrame Rate] is configured to a
setting other than “120/60p” and “100/50p”
[Setting Values:
50M (XHQ), 50M
(XHQ), 35M (UHQ)]
System Menu
151
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
WAudio/ GAudio
For switching
to the audio that is to be recorded to
the recording media in slot A or [EXT.SLOT].
The selectable options vary according to the
settings in [WFormat]/[GFormat] or [WBit Rate]/
[GBit Rate].
9
Y Format
For
selecting the format of the file to be recorded to
the SD card in slot B when [System] is configured
to “HD+Web”.
This is fixed at QuickTime (H.264).
Memo :
0
When [System
] is set to other than “HD+Web”,
this item is fixed at the same setting as
[WFormat].
9
Y Resolution
For selecting the size of the image to be recorded
to the
SD card in slot B when [System] is configured
to “HD+Web”. (Horizontal x vertical)
0
When [System] is set to “HD+Web
”:
0
When [W
Frame Rate] is configured to “60p”/
“60i”/“30p”
[Setting Values: 960x540, 720x480,
480x270]
0
When [W
Frame Rate] is configured to
“50p”/
“50i”/“25p”
[Setting Values: 960x540, 720x576,
480x270]
0
When [W
Frame Rate] is configured to
“24p”
[Setting Values: 960x540, 480x270]
Memo :
0
When [System] is set to other than “HD+Web”,
this item is fixed at the same setting as
[WResolution].
9
Y Frame Rate
The frame rate of the image to be recorded to the
SD card in slot B is fixed when [System] is set to
“HD+Web”.
The
value fixed varies according to the settings for
[WFrame Rate].
0
Fixed at “60i
”,
“50i”, “30p”, “25p” or “24p”.
Memo :
0
When [System] is set to other than “HD+Web”,
this item
is fixed at the same setting as [WFrame
Rate].
9
Y Bit Rate
The bit rate of the image to be recorded to the SD
card in slot B is fixed when [
System] is set to “HD
+Web”.
The value fixed varies according to the settings for
[YResolution].
0
“3M(HQ)”
when [Y
Resolution] is configured
to “960x540”
0
“1.2M(LP)”
when
[YResolution] is configured
to “480x270”
0
“8M(HQ)
” when [
YResolution] is configured
to “720x480” or “720x576”
Memo :
0
When [System] is set to other than “HD+Web”,
this item is fixed at the same setting as [WBit
Rate].
9
Y Audio
The audio to be recorded to slot B is the same as
the audio to be recorded to slot A.
9
SD Aspect
For setting the aspect ratio of the image when
[System] is set to
“SD”.
[Setting Values:
R16:9, 4:3]
Memo :
0
For conditions
other than those above, this item
is fixed at “16:9”.
152
System Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Rec Mode
0
For selecting the mode for recording to the
recording media.
(A P91 [Special Recording] )
[Setting Values: R
Normal, Pre Rec, Clip
Continuous, Interval Rec, Frame Rec]
Memo :
0
When [Slot Mode
] is set to “Backup”, this item is
fixed at “Normal”.
0
This is fixed at
“Normal” when [System
] B
[Record Format] B [System] is configured to any
of the following.
0
4K EXT (SSD)
0
HD+Web
0
High-Speed
9
Pre Rec Time
For setting the pre-recording time when
[Rec
Mode] is set to
“Pre Rec”.
[Setting Values: R5sec, 10sec, 15sec]
Memo :
0
When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format]
B [System] is set to “4K”, this item is
fixed at “5sec”.
9
Rec Frames
For setting the number of frames to record when
[Rec Mode] is set to “Frame Rec” or “Interval Rec”.
[Setting Values: R1frame, 3frames, 6frames]
9
Rec Interval
For setting the recording time interval when [Rec
Mode] is set to
“Interval Rec”.
[Setting
Values: R1sec, 2sec, 5sec, 10sec, 30sec,
1min, 2min, 5min, 10min, 30min, 1hour]
Slot Mode
For setting the operation of the card slot.
0
Series:
Mode that activates slots A and B sequentially.
0
Dual:
Mode that activates slots A and B
simultaneously.
(A P88 [Dual Rec] )
0
Backup:
Mode that enables recording to slot B without
using the [REC] button. This item is selectable
only when [Rec Mode] is set to
“Normal”.
Record, start and stop operations can be
controlled from the [Backup Rec] menu or using
the user button that is assigned with “Backup
Trig”.
(A P
89 [Backup Rec] )
[Setting Values: R
Series, Dual, Backup]
Memo :
0
When this is configured to “Series” and
recordable
media is inserted into slot A or slot B
or both the slots, pressing the [REC] button
starts recording only to the card in the selected
slot (active slot).
0
When
this
is configured to “Dual” and recordable
media are inserted into both slots A and B,
pressing the [REC] button starts simultaneous
recording to the cards in both slots.
0
When [
System
] is configured to 4K EXT (SSD)
or “HD+Web”, “---” is displayed.
0
When
[System]
is set to “High-Speed”, this item
is fixed at “Series”.
9
Backup Rec
For
starting/stopping
backup recording with [REC]/
[STBY].
This item is selectable only when [Slot Mode] is set
to “Backup”.
Memo :
0
When recording
is stopped due to no remaining
space on the media, etc., this item is fixed at
“STOP” and cannot be selected.
System Menu
153
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
4GB File Spanning(SDXC)
A recording
file is automatically split when the size
exceeds 4 GB, but if an SDXC card is used, you
can record clips larger than 4 GB by setting this
option to “Off”. (Up to a maximum of 64 GB or 4
hours)
0
On:
Splits a
file when it exceeds 4 GB or 30 minutes.
0
Off:
Splits a file when it exceeds 64 GB or 4 hours.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Memo :
0
This option is only valid if the SD card used for
recording is of the SDXC format.
0
During simultaneous recording, such as Dual
Rec and backup recording, this option is valid
only when the SD cards in slots A and B are of
the SDXC format.
LPCM (QuickTime)
For setting the audio recording format of
QuickTime.
[Setting Values: Dual Mono, RStereo]
Time Stamp
For setting whether to display shooting date/time
information in the recorded video.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
The date/time display style can be changed in
[Date Style]/[Time Style
].
(A P148 [ Date Style ] )
(
A P149 [ Time Style ] )
0
The setting cannot be changed during
recording, streaming or Return over IP.
0
When [System] is set to “4K EXT (SSD)”, “4K” or
“High-Speed”, this item is fixed at “Off”.
0
When [
Overlay Function] is set to “Enable
”, this
item is fixed at “Off”. A L
Clip Set
9
Clip Name Prefix
For
configuring
the first four characters of the name
of the clip file to be recorded to the recording media.
Enter any of the 36 characters including alphabets
(upper case) and numbers (0 to 9) using the
software keyboard.
(A P109 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )
[Setting Values: xxxG] (The default value of xxx is
the last three digits of the serial number.)
9
Reset Clip Number
For assigning a new number (Clip Number) by
resetting it (0001).
Select [Reset] and press the Set button (R) to reset
the number.
If there are other clips on the recording media, it will
be assigned with the smallest available number.
0
Example:
If the [Clip Name Prefix] is “ABCD” and
“ABCD0001
” already exists on the recording
media, “ABCD0002” will be assigned.
Clear Planning Metadata
Erases the planning metadata downloaded from
the FTP server.
This item also deletes the metadata loaded using
the setup files (“User File”/“All File”).
154
System Menu
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Adding/Editing
Frequently Used Menu
Items (Favorites Menu)
You can
select and add/edit frequently used menu
items freely to create a personal menu screen
(Favorites Menu).
Memo :
0
[Favorites Menu]
is only enabled in the Camera
mode. [Favorites Menu] remains unchanged
even when the recording format changes.
0
Up to 20 menu items can be added.
0
Added
items
in [Favorites Menu] will not be reset
even when [System] B [Reset All] is executed.
0
Long descriptive names may be displayed for
the menu items in [Favorites Menu] to enable
better understanding.
Adding Menu Items to Favorites Menu
1
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button to open
the [Main Menu] screen.
2
Select the menu or submenu item to add.
.
Focus
Display Settings
Meter
2
Memo :
0
Adding items to [Favorites Menu] cannot be
performed in the following cases. [USER1
Add] is displayed in gray in the operation guide.
0
Selected item is already added to
[Favorites
Menu]
.
0
Number
of
menu items that can be added (20
items) is exceeded.
3
Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
A screen to confirm the addition appears.
4
Select [Add] and press the Set button (R).
The selected menu item is added to [Favorites
Menu].
.
4
Cancel
Add
Focus
Add to Favorites Menu?
Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items (Favorites Menu)
155
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Editing Favorites Menu
You can delete or change the order of the items
added to [Favorites Menu].
Deleting Items from [Favorites Menu]
1
Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.
A
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button to
open the [Main Menu] screen.
B
Press the
[DISPLAY] button or press and
hold down the [MENU/THUMB] button to
open the [Favorites Menu] screen.
2
Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set
button (R) or crossed-shaped button (I).
The header turns magenta and the editing
mode is activated.
.
2
Header
(Magenta)
Camera Function...
Edit Favorites
Edit Favorites
Favorites Menu
3
Select the menu or submenu item to delete.
.
3
Aspect Marker
Edit Favorites
4
Press the [OIS/2] button.
A delete mark (b) appears at the beginning of
the menu item.
.
Aspect Marker
Edit Favorites
Memo :
0
When the [OIS/2] button is pressed again while
the menu item with the delete mark (b) is
selected, the menu item will be excluded from
the items
to be deleted and the delete mark (b)
disappears.
5
Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu]
editing mode appears.
6
Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set
button (R).
.
6
Cancel
Exit without Saving
Save & Exit
Edit Favorites
Memo :
0
Deletion is not complete until the changes are
saved with [Save & Exit
].
0
To exit the editing mode without deleting any
items, select [Exit without Saving].
0
To return to the editing mode, select [Cancel].
156
Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items (Favorites Menu)
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Changing the Order of Items in [Favorites
Menu]
1
Open the [Favorites Menu
] screen.
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button to open the
[Favorites Menu] screen.
2
Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set
button (R) or crossed-shaped button (I).
The header turns magenta and the editing
mode is activated.
.
2
Header
(Magenta)
Camera Function...
Edit Favorites
Edit Favorites
Favorites Menu
3
Select the menu or submenu item to move
and press the Set button (R).
The moving mode is activated and a position
selection bar for the move appears.
.
Edit Favorites
Edit Favorites
TC/UB
TC/UB
3
Position
Selection
Bar
4
Select the position to move to with the
cross-shaped button (JK).
Move the position selection bar with the cross-
shaped button (JK) and select a position to
move to.
5
Press the Set button (R).
The selected item moves to the new position.
.
5
4
TC/UB
TC/UB
Edit Favorites
Edit Favorites
Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items (Favorites Menu)
157
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
6
Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu]
editing mode appears.
7
Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set
button (R).
.
7
Cancel
Exit without Saving
Save & Exit
Edit Favorites
Memo :
0
Moving is not complete until the changes are
saved with [Save & Exit
].
0
To exit the editing mode without saving any
changes, select [Exit without Saving]
.
0
To return to the editing mode, select [Cancel].
158
Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items (Favorites Menu)
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Display Screen in Camera
Mode
When the display setting for [
LCD/VF] B [Display
On/Off] is set to “Off”, the corresponding display is
hidden. However, the display may appear during
event display or warning display.
Memo :
0
When the display setting for [LCD/VF
] B
[Display On/Off] is set to “On”, the display screen
appears only in the following cases if it has been
turned off.
0
Approximately
3
seconds when changes are
being made
0
During event display or warning display
Display Screen
.
100min
50min
282min
1
/60
F2.8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 :56
ISO
102400
00: 00:00.00
1080 /30p
120/60fps
ITU709
COMPRESS
SB P
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
0
  

N
L
B
O
P
U
Y
D
E
F
C
G
A
KJ M
c
h
V
bi g
f
jk
d
X
W
a
e
R
S
Q
Z
T
I
H
A
Voltage/Battery Power
Displays the
current status of the power supply
in use.
(A P37 [Power Status Display] )
Memo :
0
Even when the display screen is turned off and
[LCD/VF] B [Display On/Off]
B [Battery] is set to
“Off”, this will be displayed when there is a
warning.
B
Remaining Space on Media
Displays the remaining recording time for the
recording media
in slot A and slot B separately.
W Y
G
: Currently selected slot. (White card)
W z : Write-protect switch of SD card is set.
W!INVALID : When a recording media
writing/reading error has
occurred, or when the
recording media is
irreparable.
W!FORMAT : Recording media requires
formatting.
W!RESTORE : Recording media requires
repair.
W
!INCORRECT
:
0
Recording media is not supported.
0
When an SD card lower than Class 10 is
inserted while in the XHQ mode.
W!REC INH :
0
When attempting to record more than 4
GB while an SD card that does not support
recording of more than 4 GB is inserted.
(A P154 [ 4GB File Spanning(SDXC) ] )
The following icons are displayed during FTP
upload.
(A P182 [Uploading a Recorded Video Clip] )
Icon Status
.
[Auto Upload] is configured to
“On” and in the standby state.
“A” is displayed at the top left
corner of the icon while in the
Auto FTP mode.
.
Auto FTP transfer is in progress.
Three images are alternately
displayed, and the arrows
become animated.
.
FTP transfer is in progress.
Three images are alternately
displayed, and the arrows
become animated. In this case,
instead of the remaining
recordable time on the
recording media, an estimated
value of the remaining transfer
time is displayed.
.
(Yellow)
Error has occurred during FTP
transfer.
Memo :
0
The displayed time is an estimate.
0
Even when the display screen is hidden and
[LCD/VF] B [Display On/Off] B [Media
Remain] is set to “Off
”, this will be displayed
when there is a warning.
C
Volume Operation Indicator
Displayed when
there are changes made to the
volume of the headphone(x) (0 to 15), the
values of LCD BRIGHT (E) or PEAKING (J)
(-10 to +10).
D
Operation lock
The r icon appears during operation lock.
Memo :
0
The s icon appears for 3 seconds after
operation lock is turned off.
Display Screen in Camera Mode
159
Display/Status Screen
E
Camera Angle [Tagging] L
Displays the camera angle tagging information
when [WFormat] is configured to “Exchange”.
F
ODK [Tagging] L
Displays the ODK (Offence, Defence, Kick)
tagging information when [
WFormat] is
configured to “Exchange”. It flashes in red when
in the REMOVE mode.
G
Black Toe
Displays the Black Toe setting.
Memo :
0
The “Normal” appears for 3 seconds after
changing to Normal.
H
Color Space Display
Displays the color space.
Memo :
0
This can be configured in [Camera Process]
B
[Color Space].
(A P
118 [ Color Space ] )
I
Audio Level Meter
0
Displays the audio levels for CH-1 to CH-2.
0
a appears on the screen when in the Auto
mode.
.
4 030 20 10 0
0
This is grayed out when in a mode that does
not support audio recording or when the
audio is not supported.
J
Iris F-Number
Displays F-number of the lens iris.
(A P65 [Adjusting the Iris] )
Memo :
0
A a icon appears on the left side of the lens
aperture value (F-number) during Auto Iris
mode.
0
While in the Auto Iris mode, and [AE Lock] is set
to “AE” or “AE/FAW”, a icon appears on the
left side of the lens aperture value (F-number)
during lock operation.
(A P117 [ AE Lock ] )
K
ND Filter Position
Displays the current ND filter position.
L
Shutter
0
The current shutter speed appears on the
screen.
(A P111 [ Shutter ] )
0
When the
camera recorder is switched to the
Full Auto shooting mode by turning the [FULL
AUTO] switch to “ON” or when it is switched
to the Automatic Shutter mode with [Camera
Function] B [Shutter] configured to “EEI”, the
a icon appears on the left side of the shutter
speed.
Memo :
0
The variable range of the shutter speed varies
according to the video format settings.
(A P67
[Setting the Electronic Shutter] )
0
While in the Automatic Shutter mode, and [
AE
Lock] is set to “AE” or “AE/FAW”, a
icon
appears on the left side of the shutter speed
during lock operation.
0
“[OFF]” appears for 3 seconds after Shutter is
configured to Off.
0
“[OFF]” is displayed when in the low-light
shooting mode.
M
AE Level
0
Displayed when
the AE function is activated.
0
When operated while manual operation is
disabled, “AE” blinks for about 5 seconds.
N
Gain
0
You can select to display the gain in “dB
” or
“ISO”.
(A P
129 [ Gain ] )
0
Displays the gain value when in the Manual
Gain mode.
0
A
a icon appears on the left side of the gain
value in the “AGC” mode.
0
“LUX” is
displayed to the left of the gain value
when in the Low-light shooting mode.
Memo :
0
While in the “AGC
” mode, and [AE Lock] is set
to “AE” or “AE/FAW
”, a
icon appears on the
left side of the gain value during lock operation.
160
Display Screen in Camera Mode
Display/Status Screen
O
White Balance Mode
Displays the current white balance mode.
(*****K indicates color temperature)
A *****K : When the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET]
switch is set to “A” in the Manual White
Balance mode.
B *****K : When the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET]
switch is set to “B” in the Manual
White Balance mode.
P *****K : When the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET]
switch is set to “PRESET” in the
Manual White Balance mode.
a
FAW : During Full Auto White Balance
mode.
FAW : While in the Full Auto White Balance
mode, and [AE Lock] is set for “FAW”
or “AE/FAW” during lock operation.
(A P70 [Preset Mode (PRESET)] )
(A P71 [Memory A Mode (A), Memory B Mode
(B)] )
Memo :
0
When [Preset Paint], [AWB Paint] or [FAW
Paint
] is set to a setting other than the default
value, a q icon is displayed to the right of the
color temperature.
P
Expanded Focus/Histogram
Displayed upon
pressing the user button that is
assigned with “Expanded Focus” and
“Histogram”.
Memo :
0
Display switches in the order of “Expanded
Focus” > “Histogram”.
Q
Infrared Recording
I” is displayed
when the infrared recording is
ON.
R
Face Detection
Displayed when Face Detection is ON.
q
: When [Face Detection] is set to
“ON”
H
: When [Face Only AF] is configured
to “ON” while [Face Detection] is
“ON”
S
Image Stabilizer Mark
Displayed when the image stabilizer is ON.
i
: When [Level] of [OIS] is set to
“Normal”.
j
: When [Level] of [OIS] is set to “High”.
Memo :
0
When Image Stabilizer is configured to “OFF”,
h
is displayed for 3 seconds.
T
Focus Assist
0
” is displayed when auto focus is
activated.
0
When ACCU-Focus is enabled, “ACCU
blinks for about 10 seconds while Focus
Assist starts up, after which the “
indicator lights up.
0
If recording starts while [ACCU-Focus] is
active,
[ACCU-Focus] will be forcibly
deactivated.
(A P
126 [ Focus Assist ] )
U
Luminance Information
Displayed when the Spot Meter function is
activated.
MAX
: Maximum luminance
MIN : Minimum luminance
V
Zebra pattern
During zebra pattern display,
(zebra icon)
is displayed on the display screen in Camera
mode.
(A P82 [Setting Zebra Pattern] )
W
Time Display
Displays the current time.
Memo :
0
The date/time
display style can be configured in
[System] B [Date/Time].
0
When [System
] B [Record Set] B [Time
Stamp] is set to “On”, this item is not displayed.
X
Focus Display
Displays the focus state and the approximate
distance to the subject in focus.
d
:
Manual focus
e
:
Autofocus
: Autofocus lock
C
:
[AF Area]-“Wide”
D
:
[AF Area]-“Multi”
Memo :
0
The displayed unit of measurement (feet or
meter) can
be configured in [LCD/VF] B [Display
Type] B [Focus].
0
When focus display is grayed, Auto Focus
cannot function.
Display Screen in Camera Mode
161
Display/Status Screen
Y
Zoom Display
0
Displays the zoom position. (Zoom bar or
value)
Dynamic Zoom Off:
.
Dynamic Zoom On:
.
0
The zoom bar will only be displayed for 3
seconds after the zoom operation is
activated.
0
The value will always be displayed.
Dynamic Zoom Off: Z00 to Z99
Dynamic Zoom On: DZ000 to DZ149
0
When [Digital Extender
] is configured to “On”,
F” is displayed to the right of the zoom
display.
Memo :
0
The mode of display (value or bar) can be
configured in [LCD/VF]
B [Display Type] B
[Zoom].
Z
Network Connection Icon
The network connection status is displayed.
Icon Status
.
Wireless LAN connection from the
host terminal (USB) is established
.
Wired LAN connection from the
host terminal (USB) is established
.
Cellular adapter connection from
the host terminal (USB) is
established
.
When a USB adapter different
from the connection settings is
detected
.
Built-in wireless LAN connection is
established
A
.
LAN terminal connection is
established
(No
display)
0
When an unusable USB
adapter is detected
0
When the LAN cable is not
connected
Memo :
0
Yellow display indicates preparation for
connection in progress.
a
Time Code (I)/User’s Bit (J) Display
0
Displays the time code (hour: minute:
second: frame) or user’s bit data.
0
Example of time code display:
Display Screen
.
00:00:00:00
*
* Colon (:) denotes non-drop frames and dot
(.) denotes drop frames.
0
Example of user’s bit display:
Display Screen
.
FF EE DD 20
Memo :
0
Use [LCD/VF] B [Display Type
]
B [TC/UB] to
toggle between the time code display and user’s
bit display.
b
Time Code Lock Indicator
When the built-in time code generator is
synchronized to the external time code data
input during the synchronization of time code
with another camera recorder, Z lights up.
c
IFB/RET Mark
Displays the
status of the IFB or Return over IP.
Icon Status
.
During audio feed only
.
(Yellow)
When an error occurs during
audio feed only
.
During video+audio feed
.
(Yellow)
When an error occurs during
video+audio feed
162
Display Screen in Camera Mode
Display/Status Screen
d
SDI/HDMI Record Trigger
STBY B : When [A/V Set]
B [Video Set] B
[SDI OUT] B [Rec Trigger] is set to
“Type-A” or “Type-B”, or [HDMI
OUT] B [Rec Trigger] is set to “On”
and recording is stopped
REC B : When [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B
[SDI OUT] B [Rec Trigger] is set to
“Type-A” or “Type-B”, or [HDMI
OUT] B [Rec Trigger] is set to “On”
and recording is in progress
e
GPS Mark A L
When [System] B [GPS] is set to “On”, the
signal reception status is displayed.
Memo :
0
The display changes according to the signal
reception sensitivity. If signals cannot be
received, the H mark appears in yellow
regardless of the
[
LCD/VF] B [Display On/Off]
B [GPS] setting.
0
This item is not displayed when
[
GPS] is set to
“Off”.
f
Media Status
---- :
A card is not detected in the
selected slot, and [Tally
Lamp] is configured to a setting
other than “External” or
[STATUS LED] is configured to
a setting other than “External”
STBY : Recording standby
RREC : Recording
REVIEW : Clip Review
(A P86 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately
(Clip Review)] )
STBY O : Pre Rec recording standby
(A P91 [Pre Rec] )
RRECO : Pre Rec recording
(A P91 [Pre Rec] )
STBY L : Clip Continuous Rec recording
standby
(A P92 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
RRECL : Clip Continuous Rec recording
(A P92 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
STBYL
(displayed in
yellow)
: Clip Continuous Rec recording
pause
(A P92 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
STBY N : Interval Rec recording standby
(A P95 [Interval Rec] )
STBYN
(displayed in
red)
: Interval recording pause
RRECN : Interval Rec recording
(A P95 [Interval Rec] )
STBY M : Frame Rec recording standby
(A P94 [Frame Rec] )
RRECM : Frame Rec recording
(A P94 [Frame Rec] )
STBYM
(displayed in
yellow)
: Frame Rec recording pause
(A P94 [Frame Rec] )
STOP : Unable to record to the card in
the slot
P.OFF : Power OFF
Q
: During clip cutter recording
(displayed for 3 seconds)
(A P96 [Splitting the Clips Freely (Clip Cutter
Trig)] )
PGM : Receiving program signals
from an external device, such
as a remote control unit
PVW : Receiving preview signals
from an external device, such
as a remote control unit
Display Screen in Camera Mode
163
Display/Status Screen
g
Live streaming mark
When [Network] B [Live Streaming
] B [Live
Streaming] is set to “On”, the distribution status
is displayed.
(A P137 [Live Streaming Item] )
Icon Status
.
(Red)
Distribution in progress (good
connection quality)
.
(Red)
Distribution in progress (poor
connection quality)
.
(Yellow)
Waiting for connection
(RTSP/RTP only), connection
failed
h
High-Speed Frame Rate
0
When [System] B [Record Set]
B [Record
Format] B [System] is configured to “High-
Speed”, the setting value for [WFrame Rate]
is displayed.
i
OK Mark
Displayed
when
OK mark has been appended.
(A P103 [Appending/Deleting OK Mark] )
j
Recording Format
Displays the recording format.
Memo :
0
The resolution, frame rate and bit rate can be
viewed on the status screen.
k
Event/Warning Display Area
Displays error messages.
(A P231 [Error Messages and Actions] )
164
Display Screen in Camera Mode
Display/Status Screen
Display Screen in Media
Mode
When the display setting for [
LCD/VF] B [Display
On/Off] is set to “Off”, the corresponding display is
hidden.
Memo :
0
Display on the information display area can be
toggled using the [ONLINE/3
] button.
0
When the display setting for [LCD/VF] B
[Display On/Off]
is set to “On”, the display screen
appears only in the following cases if it has been
turned off.
0
During event display or warning display
.
Jan 24,2019
3840x2160
30p 140M
282min
12 :34 :56
00: 00:00.00
1000/2000
0
4030 20 10 0
A
KL
O
P
N
E
H
I
J
B
D
C
FG
Q M
A
Voltage/Battery Power
Displays the
current status of the power supply
in use.
(A P37 [Power Status Display] )
Memo :
0
Even when the display screen is turned off and
[LCD/VF] B [Display On/Off]
B [Battery] is set to
“Off”, this will be displayed when there is a
warning.
B
Resolution
Displays the video image resolution.
C
Frame Rate/Bit Rate
Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs.
D
Operation Guide
Displays a guide for the current operation
buttons.
E
Audio Level Meter
Displays the audio levels of CH1 and CH2.
.
4 030 20 10 0
0
The display appears when the volume (0 to
15) of the headphone or speaker changes.
(A P159 [Volume Operation Indicator] )
F
Position Bar
Displays the current position in the video.
During trimming, the position bar appears in
green, and icons for the in and out points are
displayed.
6
: Current position of the video
7
:
Position to start trimming
(In point)
8
: Position to end trimming
(Out point)
G
Volume Operation Indicator
Displayed when there are changes made to the
volume of the headphone(x), speaker(K) (0
to 15), the values of LCD BRIGHT (E) or
PEAKING (J) (-10 to +10).
H
Information Display
Use the [ONLINE/3] button to switch between
camera information display, GPS display and
turning off the display.
0
The GPS
display displays information on the
recording location of the video being played
back only when GPS information has been
recorded.
0
Camera information display displays only
information of Gain, Iris, Shutter and White
Balance that have been recorded.
.
5600K
1/100
F1.6
0
dB
+35.483197
+139.652172
GPS Display
Camera Information Display
Display Off
Memo :
0
Trimming information is displayed while
trimming is
in progress. In this case, pressing the
[ONLINE/3] button does not switch the display.
0
The information
display area is not subject to the
display settings of the items in [LCD/VF] B
[Display On/Off].
Display Screen in Media Mode
165
Display/Status Screen
I
Date/Time Display
Displays the date/time that is recorded on the
currently played recording media.
Memo :
0
The date/time display style can be specified in
[System] B [Date Style]/[Time Style
].
(A P148 [ Date Style ] )
(
A P149 [ Time Style ] )
J
Network Connection Icon
The network connection status is displayed.
Icon Status
.
Wireless LAN connection from the
host terminal (USB) is established
.
Wired LAN connection from the
host terminal (USB) is established
.
Cellular adapter connection from
the host terminal (USB) is
established
.
When a USB adapter different
from the connection settings is
detected
.
Built-in wireless LAN connection is
established
A
.
LAN terminal connection is
established
(No
display)
0
When an unusable USB
adapter is detected
0
When the LAN cable is not
connected
Memo :
0
The icon appears blinking when the camera
recorder is
starting up, and is displayed in yellow
while getting ready to connect.
K
Time Code (I)/User’s Bit (J) Display
0
Displays the time code (hour: minute:
second: frame)
or user’s bit data recorded in
the recording media being played back.
0
Example of time code display:
.
00:00:00:00
*
* Colon (:) denotes non-drop frames and dot
(.) denotes drop frames.
0
Example of user’s bit display:
.
FF EE DD 20
Memo :
0
Use [LCD/VF] B [Display Type]
B [TC/UB] to
toggle between the time code display and user’s
bit display.
L
Check Mark
Displayed when the currently played clip is
selected.
M
OK Mark
Displayed when
OK mark has been appended.
(A P103 [Appending/Deleting OK Mark] )
N
Media Status
PLAY : Playing
STILL : Still picture playback mode
FWD * : High-speed playback in the
forward direction (* playback
speed: 5x, 15x, 60x, or 360x)
REV * : High-speed playback in the
reverse direction (* reverse
playback speed: 5x, 15x, 60x, or
360x)
STOP : Stop mode
P.OFF : Power OFF
O
Clip Information
Displays current clip number/total number of
clips.
P
Media
0
Displays the media slot of the currently
played clip.
0
z appears when the write-protect switch of
the SD card is set.
Q
Event/Warning Display Area
Displays error messages.
(A P231
[Error Messages and Actions] )
166
Display Screen in Media Mode
Display/Status Screen
Status Screen
For checking the settings of the camera recorder.
USER Switch Set Screen
For checking the status (functions assigned) of the
user buttons.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
.
Camera Screen
For checking information related to shooting using
the camera recorder.
.
LCD/VF Screen
For checking information related to the contents
displayed on the LCD monitor and viewfinder
screens.
.
Record Format Screen
For checking settings related to the recording
format.
.
Audio Screen
For checking the audio settings.
.
Video Screen
For checking the settings related to video output.
.
Planning Metadata Screen
For checking the current planning metadata
setting.
(A P187 [ Planning Metadata ] )
.
Status Screen
167
Display/Status Screen
Network Screen
For checking the network login information.
.
Connection Setup Screen
For checking the network connection information.
.
Streaming Screen
For viewing information related to live streaming.
.
168
Status Screen
Display/Status Screen
Marker and Safety Zone
Displays (Camera Mode
Only)
The marker and safety zone displays are useful in
helping you determine the angle of view for the
image according to the shooting purpose.
The marker
is displayed only in the Camera mode.
Displaying the Grid Marker
1
Set [LCD/VF] B [Marker Settings
]
B [Grid
Marker] to “On”.
(A P
127 [ Grid Marker ] )
A grid that divides the screen into 3x3 is
displayed.
.
Memo :
0
When [Grid Marker] is set to “On
”, [Aspect
Ratio], [Aspect Marker], and [Safety Zone] do
not function.
0
Example of display when [Aspect Ratio] = “4:3”,
[Aspect Marker] = “Line+Halftone”, and [Center
Mark] = “On”
.
Aspect Marker
Center MarkSafety Zone
Memo :
0
You can turn On/Off the safety zone and center
mark displays using [LCD/VF]
B [Marker
Settings] B [Aspect Ratio], [Safety Zone], and
[Center Mark].
(A P
128 [ Safety Zone ] )
Color Bar Output
Color bars can be output on this camera recorder.
Memo :
0
The audio test signals (1 kHz) can be output
simultaneously with the color bar output.
(A P133
[ Test Tone ] )
To Output the Color Bar Using the Menu
To output color bars, follow the setting procedure
below.
1
Set [Camera Function] B [
Bars] to “On”.
(A P111 [ Bars ] )
Color bars are output.
To
Output the Color Bar Using the User Button
1
Assign the “Bars” function to any of the
user buttons.
(A P
46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
2
Press
the user button that is assigned with
“Bars”.
Color bars are output.
Marker and Safety Zone Displays (Camera Mode Only)
169
Camera Features
Adjusting the Gamma
The gamma curve can be adjusted to various
characteristics when Color Space is set to a value
other than “HLG” and “J-Log1”.
(
A P118 [ Color Space ] )
(A P118 [ Gamma ] )
Standard : Standard gamma curve based on
video standard.
The adjustable level is 0.35 to 0.45
to 0.55 in steps of 0.02.
When the level is at 0.45, the
gamma curve becomes one that
conforms to the ITU709 standard.
Cinema 1 : Sets to a cinema-like gamma
curve.
The level can be adjusted
extensively from -5 to 0 to +5.
Cinema 2 : Sets to a gamma curve with soft
expression giving priority to high
luminance gradation.
The level can be adjusted
extensively from -5 to 0 to +5.
Gamma Variation
The typical characteristics are shown in the
following figure. The figure shows the
characteristics when “Standard”, “Cinema 1
” or
“Cinema 2” is configured and [Knee Level] is set to
“95%” for the “Standard” or “Cinema 1” graph.
.
STANDARD 0.45
Cinema2 NORMAL
Cinema2 -5
Cinema2 +5
Cinema1 NORMAL
Cinema1 -5
Cinema1 +5
Cinema1
+5
Cinema1
0
Cinema1
-5
Cinema2
+5
Cinema2
-5
Cinema2
0
STANDARD
0.45
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0 100 200 300 400
SCEAN(%)
OUTPUT (IRE)
HLG and J-Log1 Gamma
The gamma switches automatically to the
respective “HLG
Gamma” and “J-Log1 Gamma”
when [Color Space] is set to “HLG” or “J-Log1”.
The HLG Gamma becomes an ITU2100 HLG HDR
gamma. Output signals above 100 IRE can be
clipped by adjusting “White Clip”.
The J-Log1 Gamma becomes a Log gamma with
dynamic range of max 800%.
.
HLG
J-Log1
ITU709+KNEE
J-Log1
HLG
STANDARD0.45
+KNEE 95%
OUTPUT (IRE)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
INPUT (%)
170
Adjusting the Gamma
Camera Features
Adjusting Color Matrix
0
The color matrix of the camera recorder can be
adjusted to a color of the user’s preference.
0
When shooting is performed using multiple
cameras,
the
colors of the different cameras can
be adjusted, and a color of the user’s preference
can be set on this camera recorder.
0
The Saturation and Hue of the three colors (red,
green and blue) can be configured individually.
0
Adjust the color on the vector scope and
waveform monitor using the DSC color chart.
* The adjusted values of “Natural”, “Standard”,
“Cinema Vivid”, and “Cinema Subdued” in
[Color Matrix] can be stored individually.
(
A P122 [ Color Matrix ] )
1
Select [Camera Process] B [Color Matrix]
/
[Adjust].
(A P122
[ Color Matrix ] )
2
Adjust Hue.
0
Select the color using the cross-shaped
button (
JK) and confirm using the cross-
shaped button (I). (The cursor moves to
Hue.)
0
Pressing the cross-shaped button (J)
rotates the hue in the clockwise direction on
the vector scope.
0
Pressing the cross-shaped button (K)
rotates the
hue in the anti-clockwise direction
on the vector scope.
.
R
Cy
B
G
Y
I
Mg
R
Cy
B
G
Y
I
Mg
R
Cy
B
G
Y
I
Mg
Green
Blue
Red
3
Adjust Saturation.
0
Press the cross-shaped button (I) to move
the cursor to Saturation.
0
Each of the colors changes in the direction
indicated by the arrow on the vector scope.
0
Pressing the
cross-shaped button (J) moves
the color outward from the center of the circle
on the vector scope.
0
Pressing the cross-shaped button (K) moves
the color toward to the center of the circle on
the vector scope.
.
R
Cy
B
G
Y
I
Mg
R
Cy
B
G
Y
I
Mg
R
Cy
B
G
Y
I
Mg
Green
Blue
Red
Adjusting Color Matrix
171
Camera Features
Configuring Setup Files
The menu settings can be stored on the camera
recorder or an SD card by saving them as a setup
file.
Loading a saved setup file enables you to
reproduce the appropriate setup state speedily.
The following types of setup files are available.
o
Picture File:
File that contains image creation settings in
accordance
to
the shooting conditions ([Camera
Process] menu items).
o
All File:
File that contains all menu settings, ranging from
video
format
settings to image creation settings
such as device settings and shooting
conditions, as well as the contents of the
[Favorites Menu]. Settings in Network Settings
are not saved.
o
User File:
File that contains settings from All File that are
not included in the [Camera Process] menu
items.
(
A P118 [Camera Process Menu] )
Memo :
0
Make use of the [
Setup File] menu to save or
load a setup file.
0
The following operations can be performed on
the [Setup File
] menu.
0
[Saving Setup Files] (A P 173)
0
[Loading a Setup File] (A
P 174)
0
[Deleting Setup Files] (A P 174)
0
Even when [Record Format] B [System] is
configured to “4K EXT (SSD)”, setup files will be
saved to this camera recorder or the SD card.
Number of Storable Setup Files
Camera recorder :
[CAM1] to [CAM4]
SD slot A : [ W 1 ] to [ W 8 ]
SD slot B : [ Y 1 ] to [ Y 8 ]
Compatibility
o
User File/All File
0
Only User File/All File of the GY-HC550 and
GY-HC500 series can be loaded.
0
When User File/All File saved using GY-
HC550 are loaded using GY-HC500, the
functions that only exist on GY-HC550 are
ignored.
o
Picture File
Only Picture File of the GY-HC550 and GY-
HC500 series can be loaded.
172
Configuring Setup Files
Camera Features
Saving Setup Files
1
Display the [Setup File] menu.
Select [System] B [Setup File] and press the
Set button (R).
(A P147
[ Setup File ] )
2
Select
[Store File] and press the Set button
(R).
3
Select [Picture File], [User File] or [All File],
and press the Set button (R).
The existing files are displayed.
4
Select the file to be newly saved (or
overwritten) using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
.
4
Memo :
0
Files cannot be written in the following cases.
(Displayed in gray, selection disabled)
0
When the inserted SD card is not supported or
not formatted. (File name appears as “---”.)
0
When a write-protected SD card is inserted
(a z mark appears beside the SD card icon).
5
Name the file.
0
Enter the subname using the software
keyboard.
(A P109 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )
0
You can enter up to 8 characters for the
[Store File]/[Picture File] subname.
Memo :
0
When overwriting an existing file, the subname
of the existing file is displayed.
0
Select [Cancel]
and press the Set button (R), or
press the [CANCEL] button to return to the
previous screen.
6
Select [Store] and
press the Set button (R).
.
6
5
7
Save the file.
0
A confirmation screen appears when you
choose to overwrite.
Select [Overwrite] on the confirmation
screen, and
press the Set button (R). Saving
starts, and “Storing...” appears on the screen.
.
:SUNSET
7
Load Picture File
Cancel
Overwrite
Overwrite Picture File?
0
Saving starts,
and “Storing...” appears on the
screen when the file is newly saved.
.
8
Saving is complete.
After saving of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
Configuring Setup Files
173
Camera Features
Loading a Setup File
1
Display the [Setup File] menu.
Select [System] B [Setup File
]
and press the
Set button (R).
(A P147 [ Setup File ] )
2
Select [Load File] and press the Set button
(R).
3
Select [Picture File], [User File] or [All File],
and press the Set button (R).
The existing files are displayed.
4
Select the file to load using the cross-
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
.
4
Memo :
0
When the
write-protect switch of the inserted SD
card is set, a z mark appears beside the SD
card icon. Setup files can be loaded from an SD
card even if the write-protect switch is set.
0
Setup files that are completely incompatible will
not be displayed.
(A P172 [Configuring Setup Files] )
5
Select [Load] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Loading starts, and “Loading...” appears on
the
screen.
.
5
6
Reading is complete.
After reading of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
Deleting Setup Files
1
Display the [Setup File] menu.
Select [System] B [Setup File
]
and press the
Set button (R).
(A P147 [ Setup File ] )
2
Select [Delete File] and press the Set button
(R).
3
Select [Picture File], [User File] or [All File],
and press the Set button (R).
The existing files are displayed.
4
Select the file to delete using the cross-
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
.
4
CAM2
CAM1
Delete Picture File
Memo :
0
Setup File saved on the SD card cannot be
deleted.
5
Select [Delete] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Deletion starts, and “Deleting...” appears on the
screen.
.
:SUNSET
5
Cancel
Delete
CAM1
Delete Picture File?
6
Deletion is complete.
After file deletion is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen.
174
Configuring Setup Files
Camera Features
Connecting External
Monitor
0
To output live or playback video images and
audio sound to an external monitor, select the
output signals from the camera recorder, and
connect
using
an appropriate cable according to
the monitor to be used.
0
Choose the most suitable terminal according to
the monitor in use.
0
[SDI OUT] terminal:
Outputs either the 3G-SDI/HD-SDI signal or SD-
SDI signal.
0
[HDMI] terminal:
Outputs HDMI signals.
Memo :
0
If the [SDI OUT
] terminal or [HDMI] terminal is
connected, configure the settings in the [A/V
Set] menu according to the monitor to be
connected.
(A P130
[ SDI OUT ] )
(
A P131 [ HDMI OUT ] )
0
To connect the output signal in the 4K(2160p)
setting, use a Premium High Speed HDMI cable
(supports 18Gbps).
When connecting in the 4K(2160p) 59.94p or
50p setting, it is recommended that the cable
used does not exceed 2 m.
.
SDI IN
HDMI
* Select the output signal in [A/V Set] B [SDI
OUT]/[HDMI OUT].
(A P
130 [ SDI OUT ] )
(
A P131 [ HDMI OUT ] )
*
When [Record Format]
B
[System] is set to “SD”,
only SD-SDI signals are output.
(A P149 [ System ] )
* To display the menu screen or display screen on
the external monitor, set [A/V Set] B [Video
Set] B [SDI OUT] B [Character] to “On”.
(A P130 [ Character ] )
Connecting via SDI
0
Digital video signals, together with embedded
(superimposed) audio signals and time code
signals, are output for both the 3G-SDI/HD-SDI
and SD-SDI signals.
Memo :
0
The sampling frequency for embedded
(superimposed) audio signals is 48 kHz. Time
code of the built-in time generator as well as
playback time code are also output.
Connecting External Monitor
175
Connecting External Devices
Connect the headphone.
0
Audio output from the [x] terminal can be
selected using the
[A/V Set
] B [Monitor] item or
the [MONITOR] selection switch on the camera
recorder.
(A
P134 [ Monitor ] )
0
The different combinations of settings that are
output from the [x
] terminal and monitor
speaker are as follows.
[MONITOR]
Selection
Switch Setting
[Monitor]
Setting
[x]
Terminal
Speaker *
L R
[CH1] - CH1 CH1
[BOTH] [Mix] CH1+CH2 CH1+CH2
[Stereo] CH1 CH2
[CH2] - CH2 CH2
* Audio is output from the speaker only in Media
mode. Does not output in the Camera mode.
.
Memo :
0
If both CH1 and CH2 are set to built-in
microphone and the [MONITOR]
selection
switch has been set to “BOTH”, stereo sound is
output from the [x] terminal regardless of the
[Monitor] setting.
Connecting Wired Remote
Control
You can operate the functions of this unit with a
wired remote control.
Memo :
0
When the switches of the camera recorder and
remote control unit are operated at the same
time, the switch operation of the remote control
unit takes priority over that of the camera
recorder.
1
Connect a wired remote control to the
camera recorder.
Connect the wired remote control (sold
separately) to the [REMOTE] terminal of this
camera recorder.
.
REMOTE
Connect the wired
remote control
Caution :
0
Turn off
the power of the camera recorder when
connecting a wired remote control.
2
Turn on the power of the camera recorder.
176
Connect the headphone.
Connecting External Devices
Functions of Network
Connection
The network feature comprises web-browser-
based functions using devices such as a
smartphone, tablet
terminal, or PC, as well as FTP
and live streaming functions that run via thumbnail
screens and menu operation.
Memo :
0
When [System
] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B [System] is set to “High-Speed”, only
“Planning Metadata” can be used for the [LAN]
terminal connection.
Connecting to the Network
0
[LAN] Terminal
0
Built-in Wireless LAN A
0
Connect the following adapters to the [HOST]
terminal (USB)
0
Wireless LAN adapter
0
Ethernet adapter
0
Cellular adapter
(A P178 [Camera Setup for Network
Connection] )
List of Functions
Importing Metadata
You can download a metadata settings file (XML
format) from
the FTP server and store metadata in
the camera recorder.
(A P180 [Importing Metadata] )
Uploading Recorded Clips
Clips recorded to a recording media can be
uploaded to a preconfigured FTP server.
(A P182 [Uploading a Recorded Video Clip] )
Memo :
0
Uploading can also be performed via a web
browser.
(A P190 [Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web
Browser] )
Editing Metadata
0
Planning Metadata
You can
access the page for editing the camera
recorder’s metadata via a web browser on
devices such as a smartphone, tablet terminal,
or PC, and edit the metadata that is to be applied
to clips to be recorded.
(A P187 [ Planning Metadata ] )
0
Clip Metadata
You can access the page for editing the
metadata via a web browser on devices such as
a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and
display or rewrite the metadata that is recorded
to a clip.
(A P188 [ Clip Metadata ] )
View Remote
You can access via a web browser on devices such
as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC to check
the live image or remotely control the camera.
(A P196 [Camera Control Function] )
Memo :
0
This feature is available when [System] is
configured to “HD” or “SD”.
Camera Control
You can access via a web browser on devices such
as
a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC to remotely
control the camera.
(A P196 [Camera Control Function] )
Functions of Network Connection
177
Network
Live streaming
By combining with the decoder or PC application
that supports
live streaming, you can perform audio
and video streaming via the network.
(A P204 [Performing Live Streaming] )
Memo :
0
This feature is available when
[System] is
configured to “HD” or “SD”.
Broadcast Overlay A L
Texts, images and watermark can be overlaid onto
recorded video and live stream video. In addition,
changes such
as changing the image are possible
with the SDP Generator app.
Scoreboard Overlay L
A scoreboard can be overlaid onto a recorded or
live streaming video. In addition, changes such as
changing the image are possible with the “SDP
Generator
” app.
Sports Coaching L
This camera recorder supports the tagging feature,
which enables information such as the camera
angle and actions of an athlete to be recorded in
real time as metadata during sports photography
or videography.
Preparing Network
Connection
Operating Environment
Operation has been verified for the following
environments.
Computer
0
OS: Windows 7
Web browser: Internet Explorer 11
0
OS: Windows 10
Web browser: Chrome
0
OS: macOS 10.14
Web browser: Safari 12
Smartphone/Tablet Terminal
0
OS: iOS11 (iPhone X/iPad Pro)
Web browser: Safari 11
0
OS: Android 8
Web browser: Chrome
Camera Setup for Network Connection
1
Connect using the corresponding method
of connection
0
[
LAN] Terminal
Connect
a PC to this camera recorder directly
using a
cross-over cable or via devices such
as an Ethernet hub using a LAN cable.
(A P179 [Wired LAN connection (“LAN” or
“USB”-“Ethernet”)] )
0
Built-in Wireless LAN A
Attach the wireless LAN antenna if it is not
mounted.
(A P34
[Attaching the Wireless LAN
Antennas (Supplied)
A] )
(A P179 [Wireless LAN connection
(“Internal Wireless LAN”A or “USB”-
“Wireless LAN”)] )
0
Connect the following adapters to the
[HOST
]
terminal (USB)
0
Wireless LAN adapter
0
Ethernet adapter
0
Cellular adapter
(A P180 [Cellular adapter connection
(“USB
”-“Cellular”)] )
Memo :
0
Only a network connection adapter can be
connected to the [HOST] terminal (USB).
0
Connect or disconnect an adapter only after you
have turned off the power of the camera
recorder.
0
You can find the latest information on the
compatible adapters at the product page of our
website.
0
Two types of network coverage (WAN and LAN)
are available for each application.
178
Functions of Network Connection
Network
Connecting to the
Network
1
Select the interface in the [Wizard].
0
Select “LAN”, “USB” or “Internal Wireless
LAN
A in [Network] B [Connection
Setup] B [Wizard].
0
When “USB” is selected, the adapter that is
connected to the
[HOST] terminal (USB) is
recognized and displayed.
.
2
Configure the settings according to the
selected interface.
o
Wired LAN connection (“LAN” or “USB”-
“Ethernet
”)
Configure
the settings as follows according to
the screen.
0
IP address setting (DHCP or manual)
0
IP Address
0
Subnet mask
0
Default gateway
0
DNS Server
Memo :
0
When an
address is manually assigned in a NAT
environment, it is also necessary to set the
default gateway correctly besides conversion of
the address at the router’s end in order to
perform operations such as access to the
Internet from an external network via the router.
o
Wireless LAN
connection (“Internal Wireless
LAN”A or “USB”-“Wireless LAN”)
0
When
“Connect
with Access Point” or “P2P”-
“WPS” is selected on the [Select Connection
Type] screen.
Configure the settings as follows according to
the screen.
0
Mode of connection
0
Configuration method
.
0
When “P2P”-“
Manual” is selected on the
[Select Connection Type] screen.
Configure the settings as follows according to
the screen.
0
Mode of connection
0
Configuration method
.
* For “P2P”-“Manual”
connections, it is necessary
to configure the [Passphrase] according to the
steps below after the above settings are
configured.
A
Set the camera recorder to the Camera
mode, and display [
Connection Setup]
(status screen).
0
Press the [STATUS] button on the
camera recorder to display the status
screen.
Press the cross-shaped button (H I) to
display [Connection Setup].
0
Check to ensure that the [SSID] and
[
Passphrase] that you have set in the
wizard are displayed.
Connecting to the Network
179
Network
B
Select [SSID]
from
the list of access points
(smartphone, tablet terminal, PC, etc.),
and enter [Passphrase].
0
Display the list of access points in the
wireless connection settings of the
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and
select “HC550-****
A and [HC500-
****]B. (**** are numbers that vary with
the device used.)
0
After the password confirmation screen
appears, enter the [Passphrase]
displayed on the [Connection Setup]
screen.
.
o
Cellular adapter connection (“USB
”-
“Cellular”)
Configure the settings as follows according to
the screen.
0
Connection phone number
0
Username
0
Password
Caution :
0
You can access the web functions via a web
browser on devices such as a smartphone,
tablet terminal,
or PC only in a LAN environment.
0
Note that you may have to pay very high bills in
the case of pay-per-use contracts. Fixed price
contract is recommended if you are using the
network function.
0
Note that the use of improper settings may result
in expensive bills from the phone service
provider. Make sure that the setting is correct.
0
To avoid expensive bills due to the roaming
connection, you are recommended to use this
function by disabling the roaming contract.
0
There may be communication even when you
are not using the network function. Remove the
cellular adapter when the function is not in use.
3
Setting is complete.
After setting is complete, you can access the
camera recorder via a web browser.
(A P186 [Connecting from a Web Browser] )
Importing Metadata
You can download a metadata settings file (XML
format) from
the FTP server and store metadata in
the camera recorder.
The imported metadata is applied to clips to be
recorded.
Preparing Metadata
0
You can record the four metadata types below.
Title1 : ASCII
only,
max. 63 characters
(bytes)
Title2 : UNICODE, max. 127 bytes
Creator : UNICODE, max. 127 bytes
Description : UNICODE, max. 2047 bytes
0
Metadata makes use of the XML description
format.
0
Edit the
<Title1><Title2><Description><Creator> tag
element using the XML editor. (Indicated by the
frames below)
.
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<NRT-MetaInterface lastUpdate="2015-01-29T18:06:21+09:00"
xmlns="urn:schemas-proHD:nonRealTimeMetaInterface:ver.1.00"
xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance">
<MetaData>
<Title1>Title1 sample</Title1>
<!-- only "en",max63bytes -->
<Title2>Title2 sample</Title2>
<!-- ,max127bytes -->
<Description>Description sample</Description>
<!-- ,max2047bytes -->
<Creator>Creator sample</Creator>
<!-- ,max127bytes -->
</MetaData>
</NRT-MetaInterface>
180
Connecting to the Network
Network
Configuring the Server for Downloading
For specifying the settings for connecting to the
FTP server
for downloading the metadata (domain
name, user name, password, etc.) as well as the
path of the file to download.
1
Open the [Metadata Server] screen.
Open the [Network] B [Metadata Server]
screen.
(
A P142 [Metadata Server Item] )
.
Meta-FTP4...
Meta-FTP3...
Meta-FTP2...
Meta-FTP1...
Metadata Server
2
Register the [Metadata Server].
0
Select a server using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
The server
settings screen appears. Perform
setting for each item.
0
Up to 4 settings can be registered.
.
Username
File Path
Port
Server
Protocol
Alias
Metadata Server Set
Memo :
0
For details
on the registered information, please
consult the network administrator for the server.
Importing Metadata
Download the metadata settings file (XML format)
from the FTP server.
1
Select [Network] B [
Import Metadata]
and
press the Set button (R).
The [Import Metadata] screen appears.
.
Import Metadata
2
Select the server for importing the
metadata.
0
The name that is registered in
[
Metadata
Server] B [Alias] is displayed.
0
Select a server using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
.
2
Import Metadata
Importing Metadata
181
Network
3
Select [Import] on the
confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Import starts.
After import
is complete, the display is restored
to the screen before the [Import Metadata]
screen appears.
.
3
Importing...
Cancel
Import
Import Metadata?
Memo :
0
You cannot exit the menu or perform recording
while import is in progress.
0
If import
of the metadata failed, “Import Error!” is
displayed, and a message indicating the cause
of the error appears.
Press the Set button (R) to return to the [Import
Metadata] screen in step 1.
(A P
232 [List of FTP Transfer Errors] )
0
When “HTTP” is selected in the
[Select FTP
Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,
connections to the servers other than “FTP”
protocol cannot be made.
0
If a setting other than “FTP
” is specified for
[Protocol], to ensure the safety of the
communication path, a screen appears
prompting you to validate the fingerprint of the
public key and certificate received from the
server.
Check to ensure that the displayed value
coincides with the known value.
Uploading a Recorded
Video Clip
The following
are steps to upload clips recorded in
a recording media to a preset FTP server.
Configuring the FTP Server for
Uploading
For specifying the settings for connecting to the
FTP server to upload recorded clips to (domain
name, user name, password, etc.) as well as the
directory of the upload destination.
1
Open the [Clip Server] screen.
Open the [Network] B [Upload Settings]
B [Clip
Server] screen.
(A P143 [ Clip Server ] )
.
Clip Server
2
Register the [Clip Server].
Register the server to upload recorded clips in
the recording media to.
Up to 4 servers can be registered.
Memo :
0
For details
on the registered information, please
consult the network administrator for the server.
182
Importing Metadata
Network
Uploading Clips Automatically (Auto
FTP)
The following are steps to automatically upload
clips recorded
in a recording media to a preset FTP
server.
1
Configure the settings for automatic
upload
Configure [Network] B [Upload Settings] B
[Upload]
to
“Auto” and configure the settings for
each of [Slot], [Cellular] and [Server].
(A P142 [ Upload ] )
.
2
Start uploading
0
Configuring [Network] B [Upload Settings]
B
[Auto Upload] to “On” starts uploading.
0
You can also press the user button that is
assigned with
“Auto Upload”.
Memo :
0
FTP transfer
is performed for the slot configured
in [Slot].
0
If recording is started for the same slot as the
one configured in [Slot] while FTP transfer is in
progress, FTP transfer will be interrupted.
0
FTP transfer is not performed while live
streaming or Return over IP is in progress.
0
FTP transfer is disabled when [System]
B
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [System] is
configured to “High-Speed”. To perform FTP
transfer, select a setting other than “High-
Speed”.
Uploading Clips Manually (Manual FTP)
The following are steps to upload clips recorded in
a recording media to a preset FTP server.
All playable clips on the thumbnail screen can be
uploaded.
1
Configure the FTP server for manual
uploading
Set [Network] B [Upload Settings] B [Upload]
to “Manual
”.
(
A P142 [ Upload ] )
2
Register the [Clip Server].
0
Open the [Network
]
B [Upload Settings] B
[Clip Server] screen.
0
Register the server to upload recorded clips
in the recording media to.
Up to 4 servers can be registered.
(A
P143 [ Clip Server ] )
Memo :
0
For details
on the registered information, please
consult the network administrator for the server.
0
When [Network] B [Upload Settings] B [Upload]
is configured to “Auto”, manual uploading is also
disabled for slots other than the selected “Slot”.
To perform manual uploading, select “Manual”.
0
FTP transfer is disabled when
[System
] B
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [System] is
configured to “High-Speed”. To perform FTP
transfer, select a setting other than “High-
Speed”.
Uploading a Video Clip
1
Set the camera recorder to the Media mode.
0
Press and hold the [MODE] selection button
in the Camera mode to enter the Media
mode. A thumbnail screen of the clips
recorded on the recording media is
displayed.
0
You can upload the selected clips on the
thumbnail screen to the FTP server.
(A P97 [Thumbnail Screen] )
Uploading a Recorded Video Clip
183
Network
2
Move the cursor to the clip to be uploaded.
Move the cursor to the clip to be uploaded using
the cross-shaped button (JKH I).
.
2
3
Press the [ONLINE/3] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
.
All Clips
Selected Clips
This Clip
3
4
Select [FTP Upload] B [This Clip]
B server
to upload to, and press the Set button (R).
The status of the transfer process is indicated
by a progress bar.
.
Upload in Background
Stop
FTP Upload
Memo :
0
The name for the server to upload files to are
indicated using the preset names in [Clip
Server]
B [Alias].
0
To stop uploading, press the Set button (R).
Select
[
Yes] on the confirmation screen, and
press the Set button (R) to stop uploading and
return to the thumbnail screen.
5
Upload is complete.
0
After upload is complete, “Successfully
Completed.”
appears on the screen.
0
Press the Set button (R) to return to the
thumbnail screen.
.
5
Exit
Successfully Completed.
FTP Upload
Selecting and Uploading Multiple Clips
To select and upload multiple clips, refer to
“[Selecting and
Performing Operations on Multiple
Clips] (A P 104)”.
Uploading All Video Clips
1
Press the [ONLINE/3] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
2
Upload the clips.
Select [FTP Upload...] B [All Clips]
B server to
upload to, and press the Set button (R).
.
All Clips
Selected Clips
This Clip
2
3
Upload starts.
The status of the transfer process is indicated
by a progress bar.
.
Upload in Background
Stop
FTP Upload
184
Uploading a Recorded Video Clip
Network
Memo :
0
To stop uploading, press the Set button (R).
Select [
Yes] on the confirmation screen, and
press the Set button (R) to stop uploading and
return to the thumbnail screen.
0
If the
file to be uploaded has the same name as
an existing file in the FTP server, an overwrite
confirmation window appears.
0
When “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP
Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,
the overwrite confirmation window will not be
displayed and the existing file is overwritten.
0
Even after upload has started (FTP transfer in
progress)
in
step 3, pressing the [MODE] button
switches the camera recorder to the Camera
mode, allowing you to start shooting.
0
If a setting other than “FTP” is specified for
[Protocol], to ensure the safety of the
communication path, a screen appears
prompting you to validate the fingerprint of the
public key and certificate received from the
server.
Check to ensure that the displayed value
coincides with the known value.
0
Fingerprint is a unique value that varies with
each public key and certificate.
0
For details of the fingerprint, please consult
the administrator of the server to be
connected.
(A P143
[ Clip Server ] )
0
When “HTTP” is selected in the
[Select FTP
Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,
connections to the servers other than “FTP”
protocol cannot be made.
4
Upload is complete.
0
After all clips are uploaded successfully,
“Successfully Completed.” is displayed.
Press the Set button (R) to return to the
thumbnail screen.
0
When clips are not uploaded successfully,
the following errors are displayed.
.
Cause of
Error
Exit
Internal Error.
Failed.
FTP Upload
(A P
232 [List of FTP Transfer Errors] )
Memo :
0
If a notification such as a an error message
appears after
shifting to the Camera mode while
FTP transfer is in progress, a 5 icon (yellow) will
appear in the media’s remaining level display
area in the Camera mode.
You can press the [MODE] button to switch to
the Media mode and display the above error
screen.
Follow “[List of FTP Transfer Errors] (A P 232)”
to clear the error message.
Uploading a Recorded Video Clip
185
Network
FTP Resume Feature
When FTP transfer starts and there is a file of the
same name on the server with a file size smaller
than the
file to be transferred, the file on the server
will be regarded as an interrupted file during a FTP
transfer. A confirmation screen to resume transfer
(append writing) appears.
.
If “Resume” is
selected,
FTP transfer is carried out
such that it appends from the position where it was
interrupted.
When FTP transfer ends normally, “Complete”
appears on the screen.
Memo :
0
FTP server equipped with resume function is
required.
0
If [Network] B [Upload Settings] B [Clip
Server] B [Clip-FTP1/2/3/4] B [Protocol] is set
to “SFTP”, the resume function is disabled.
0
If “HTTP
” is selected in the [Select FTP Proxy
]
screen of the network connection setting, the
resume function is disabled.
Connecting from a Web
Browser
You can access the web functions of this camera
recorder via a web browser on devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
Make the
necessary preparations for connection in
advance.
(A P178 [Camera Setup for Network
Connection] )
1
Set the camera recorder to the Camera
mode, and display
[Connection Setup
]
(status screen).
0
Press the [STATUS] button on the camera
recorder to display the status screen. Press
the cross-shaped button (HI
) to display the
[Connection Setup] screen.
0
Check the displayed
[
IP Address].
2
Start up the web browser on the terminal
you wish to connect to the camera
recorder, and enter the [IP Address] in the
address field.
(Example: 192.168.0.10)
If “192.168.0.10” is displayed in [IP Address],
enter “http://192.168.0.10”.
.
http://192.168.0.10
3
Enter the user name and password.
Enter the user name and the password on the
login screen to display the main page of the
camera.
0
Check the [Web Username
] and [Web
Password] in the [Network] screen (status
screen).
Memo :
0
The user name and password can be changed
in [Network] B [Web]
B [Username] and
[Password].
(A P141
[ Username ] )
(
A P141 [ Password ] )
186
FTP Resume Feature
Network
Editing Metadata
You can create the metadata to be inserted into a
recorded file,
or rewrite the metadata of a recorded
clip.
Planning Metadata
You can access the page for editing the camera
recorder’s
metadata
via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and
edit the metadata that is to be applied to clips to be
recorded.
1
Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(A P
186 [Connecting from a Web Browser] )
2
Tap (click) the [
Planning Metadata] tab to
open the [Planning Metadata] screen.
.
2
3
Edit the metadata.
A
Enter information for the necessary fields.
B
After input is complete, tap (click) [Save
] to
overwrite the metadata.
.
A
B
4
Tap (click) [
OK
] on the confirmation screen.
0
Update of the [Planning Metadata] starts.
0
After update is complete, “Renewal of
planning metadata is succeeded.” is
displayed. Tap (click)
[OK].
0
Returns to the screen in step 3.
.
4
OK
Renewal of planning metadata is
succeeded.
Memo :
0
If update
failed, “Renewal of planning metadata
is failed.” is displayed.
Tap (click) [Close] to return to the screen of step
3.
Editing Metadata
187
Network
Clip Metadata
You can access the page for editing the metadata
via a web browser on devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and display or
rewrite the metadata that is recorded to a clip.
1
Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(A P186
[Connecting from a Web Browser] )
2
Display the clip list.
Tap (click) the
[Clip List] tab to display the clip
list.
.
2
3
Set the camera recorder to the “Remote
Edit Mode”.
You can switch to “Remote Edit Mode”
from a
web browser or through operation of the
camera.
o
Switching from a web browser
A
You will see a message indicating “It is
necessary to change the camera mode to
"Remote Edit Mode". Change the mode.
on the web browser.
.
A
B
ChangeCancel
It is necessary to change the camera
mode to "Remote Edit Mode".
Change the mode.
B
Tap (click) [Change] to switch the camera
to the Remote Edit mode.
.
Exit
Remote Edit Mode
o
Switching from the camera
A
“Change to Remote Edit Mode?
” is
displayed on the display screen of the
camera unit.
B
Select [Change
] and press the Set button
(R) to switch to the Remote Edit mode.
.
B
A
Exit
Remote Edit Mode
Cancel
Change
Remote Edit Mode?
Change to
188
Editing Metadata
Network
Memo :
0
When the menu or status is displayed, display
of the confirmation screen will be put on hold.
0
If the
menu is displayed on the camera recorder,
close the menu.
0
If the status is displayed on the camera recorder,
close the status display.
0
Pressing the Set button (R) on the camera
recorder while in the Remote Edit Mode ends
the Remote Edit Mode forcibly and switches to
the Camera mode.
0
When FTP upload via the camera unit is
currently in progress, switching to the Remote
Edit mode is disabled.
4
Select the Metadata Edit mode.
Select the [Metadata] tab.
5
Select the clip to rewrite the metadata.
0
A list of the recorded clips appears on the
[Clip List
] screen.
0
Tap (click) the clip for which you want to
rewrite the metadata.
.
4
5
Memo :
0
You can
switch the displayed slot using the [Slot
A] and [Slot B] tabs. The [Slot EXT] tab appears
when [System] is configured to “4K EXT (SSD)”.
0
You
can
use the [J-30] or [K+30] tab to jump to
the previous or next 30 clips on the list.
6
Edit the metadata of the selected clips.
A
Edit the information for the necessary fields.
0
If you are using a PC, input using the mouse
and keyboard.
0
If you are using a smartphone or tablet
terminal, tap the text input area to display a
standard software keyboard on the screen.
Enter the information using the displayed
keyboard.
B
You
can
tap (click) [OK Mark] to add an OK mark
to or delete it from selected clips.
C
After editing is complete, tap (click) [Save] to
overwrite the metadata.
.
BA
C
Editing Metadata
189
Network
7
Tap (click) [OK
] on the confirmation screen.
0
Update of the metadata starts.
0
After update is complete, “Renewal of clip
metadata is succeeded.” is displayed. Tap
(click) [
OK].
0
Returns to the screen in step 4
.
.
7
OK
Renewal of clip metadata is
succeeded.
Memo :
0
If update failed, “Renewal of clip metadata is
failed.
” is displayed.
Tap (click) [Close] to return to the screen of step
4.
Uploading a Recording
Clip via a Web Browser
0
The
following
are steps to upload clips recorded
in a recording media to a preset FTP server.
0
You can upload selected clips, all clips, or those
appended with an OK mark.
Configuring the FTP Server for
Uploading
(A P182 [Configuring the FTP Server for
Uploading] )
Uploading Video Clips
1
Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(A P186 [Connecting from a Web Browser] )
2
Display the clip list.
Tap (click) the [Clip List] tab to display the clip
list.
.
2
3
Set the camera recorder to the “Remote
Edit Mode”.
You can switch to “Remote Edit Mode”
from a
web browser or through operation of the
camera.
190
Editing Metadata
Network
o
Switching from a web browser
A
You will see a message indicating
“It is
necessary to change the camera mode
to "Remote Edit Mode". Change the
mode.” on the web browser.
.
A
B
ChangeCancel
It is necessary to change the camera
mode to "Remote Edit Mode".
Change the mode.
B
Tap (click) [Change] to switch the
camera to the Remote Edit mode.
.
Exit
Remote Edit Mode
o
Switching from the camera
A
“Change to Remote Edit Mode?” is
displayed on the display screen of the
camera unit.
B
Select
[Change] and press the Set button
(R) to switch to the Remote Edit mode.
.
B
A
Exit
Remote Edit Mode
Cancel
Change
Remote Edit Mode?
Change to
Memo :
0
When the menu or status is displayed,
display of the confirmation screen will
be put on hold.
0
If the menu is displayed on the camera
recorder, close the menu.
0
If
the
status is displayed on the camera
recorder, close the status display.
0
Pressing the Set button (R) on the
camera recorder while in the Remote
Edit Mode ends the Remote Edit Mode
forcibly and switches to the Camera
mode.
0
When FTP upload via the camera unit
is currently in progress, switching to the
Remote Edit mode is disabled.
4
Select the Upload mode.
Select the [Upload] tab.
5
Select the clip you want to upload.
0
A list of the recorded clips appears on the
[Clip List] screen.
0
Tap (click) the clip you want to upload to
select it.
0
Clips being
selected are indicated by a check
mark.
Memo :
0
You can
switch the displayed slot using the [Slot
A] and [Slot B] tabs. The [Slot EXT] tab appears
when [System] is configured to “4K EXT (SSD)”.
0
You
can use the [J-30] or [K+30] tab to jump to
the previous or next 30 clips on the list.
6
Select the upload operation.
Tap (click) the [Actions] button.
.
4
6
5
Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser
191
Network
7
Select a method to upload the clips.
.
A
B
C
D
A
Upload all clips
Uploads all the clips in the displayed slots.
Tap (click) to move to the [Clip Server
]
screen.
B
Upload OK clips
Uploads all clips in the displayed slots that
are appended with an OK mark.
Tap (click) to move to the [Clip Server]
screen.
C
Upload selected clips
Uploads the clips you have selected.
Tap (click) to move to the [Clip Server]
screen.
D
Clear all selection
Clears all clip selection and returns to the
[Clip List] screen.
8
Select the clip server and start uploading.
0
Upon
selecting
the server to upoload clips to,
an upload screen appears.
.
8
0
The status
of the transfer process is indicated
by a progress bar.
.
192
Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser
Network
Memo :
0
To stop transfer, tap (click) the [Stop] button.
Tapping (clicking) [Yes] on the confirmation
screen
stops the transfer halfway and brings you
back to the main page.
0
If there already exists a file on the FTP server
with
a
name identical to the file to be transferred,
a confirmation screen asking to overwrite the file
will appear.
However, if “HTTP” is selected in the [Select
FTP Proxy] screen of the network connection
settings, an overwrite confirmation screen does
not appear, and the existing file will be
overwritten directly.
0
After
uploading
in step 8 has started, other web
browser operations are disabled until uploading
is complete.
0
After uploading in step 8 has started and upon
shifting to the Media mode by pressing the
[[MODE] selection button, operation from the
web browser will be disabled.
To enable web browser operation, press the
[[MODE] selection button again to switch to the
Camera mode.
0
If a setting other than
FTP” is specified for
[Protocol], to ensure the safety of the
communication path, a screen appears
prompting you to validate the fingerprint of the
public key and certificate received from the
server.
Check to ensure that the displayed value
coincides with the known value.
0
Fingerprint is a unique value that varies with
each public key and certificate.
0
For details of the fingerprint, please consult
the administrator of the server to be
connected.
(A P143
[ Clip Server ] )
0
When “HTTP” is selected in the
[Select FTP
Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,
connections to the servers other than “FTP”
protocol cannot be made.
9
Upload is complete.
0
After upload is complete, “Successfully
Completed.”
appears on the screen.
.
9
Exit
Successfully Completed.
FTP Upload
0
When clips are not uploaded successfully,
the following errors are displayed.
.
Cause of
Error
Exit
Internal Error.
Failed.
FTP Upload
(A P232 [List of FTP Transfer Errors] )
Memo :
0
Follow “[List of FTP Transfer Errors] (A P 232)”
to clear the error message.
Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser
193
Network
View Remote Feature
You can
access via a web browser on devices such
as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC to check
the live image and perform the following remote
control operations.
0
Start/stop recording
0
Zooming
0
Register/delete preset zoom
1
Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(A P186
[Connecting from a Web Browser] )
2
Tap (click) the [
View Remote] tab to open
the [View Remote
] screen.
.
2
Operating Procedure
.
268min
268min
230min
230min
---min
---min
01:12:54.19
01:12:54.19
STBY
STBY
282min
282min
Cam1
Cam1
Z 00
Z 00
A
B
D
E
C
F
G
H
I
J
A
Page Switch Tab
Tap (click) this tab to move to the [Planning
Metadata
], [Clip Metadata], or [Settings]
screen.
B
Live View Screen
Displays the live images.
Tap a live image to display or hide information
that is displayed on the live image, such as
remaining space on the media and time code.
C
[Clear] Button
Switches to the Delete Preset Zoom Position
mode.
(A P195 [Registering/Deleting Preset Zoom] )
(A P196 [Deleting a Preset Zoom] )
D
[Preset] Button
Switches to the Register Preset Zoom Position
mode.
(A P195 [Registering Preset Zoom] )
E
Zoom Control
0
Operate the zoom function by dragging the
zoom button along the sliding bar.
0
Tap (click)
the [Wide] or [Tele] button to fine-
tune the zoom position.
0
The slide
changes according to the dynamic
zoom.
(A P113 [ Dynamic Zoom ] )
Dynamic Zoom Off:
.
Dynamic Zoom On:
.
F
Start Record Button
G
Stop Record Button
H
[A]/
[B]/[C] Buttons
Use
these buttons to perform preset registration
or delete a preset data.
I
Function Lock Button
Locks the functions that have been set on the
[Settings] screen.
(A P199 [Changing View Remote Function
Settings] )
Icon Description
.
Locked
.
Not locked
J
Camera Control Function
(A P
196 [Camera Control Function] )
194
View Remote Feature
Network
Registering/Deleting Preset Zoom
Registering Preset Zoom
You can register any 3 zoom positions.
1
Set to the Register Preset Zoom mode.
Tap (click) the [Preset] button to switch to the
Register Preset Zoom mode.
.
268min
268min
230min
230min
---min
---min
01:12:54.19
01:12:54.19
STBY
STBY
282min
282min
Cam1
Cam1
Z 00
Z 00
2
Determine the zoom position.
Use the zoom control to operate the zoom and
determine a position.
3
Tap (click) [A].
Position [A] is registered, and position A is
displayed on
the sliding bar of the zoom control.
.
268min
268min
230min
230min
---min
---min
01:12:54.19
01:12:54.19
STBY
STBY
282min
282min
Cam1
Cam1
Z 00
Z 00
4
In the same way, register [B] and [C].
After all three positions A, B and C are
registered, the positions of the [A], [B], and [C]
buttons will be rearranged according to the
order of the registered zoom position from the
left.
.
268min
268min
230min
230min
---min
---min
01:12:54.19
01:12:54.19
STBY
STBY
282min
282min
Cam1
Cam1
Z 00
Z 00
5
Exit the Register Preset Zoom mode.
Tap (click) the [Preset] button to exit the
Register Preset Zoom mode.
Memo :
0
After registration is complete ([A]
, [B], and [C]
buttons are all active), tapping (clicking) each
button switches to the corresponding preset
zoom position.
0
This function operates independently of the
preset zoom position on the camera recorder.
(A P59 [Saving/Recalling Current Zoom
Position (Preset Zoom)] )
0
When the
dynamic zoom is on, the preset button
where the dynamic zoom position is registered
grays out when the dynamic zoom is off and the
zoom position cannot be changed.
0
When the dynamic zoom is off, the dynamic
zoom position cannot be registered.
View Remote Feature
195
Network
Deleting a Preset Zoom
1
Set to the Delete Preset Zoom mode.
When any of positions [A], [B], and [C] are
registered, tapping (clicking) the [Clear
]
button
switches to the Delete Preset Zoom mode.
.
268min
268min
230min
230min
---min
---min
01:12:54.19
01:12:54.19
STBY
STBY
282min
282min
Cam1
Cam1
Z 00
Z 00
2
Tap (click) the [A], [B], or [C] button that
corresponds to the position you want to
delete.
0
The position is deleted, and the button is
grayed out.
0
The corresponding zoom position mark on
the sliding bar also disappears.
.
268min
268min
230min
230min
---min
---min
01:12:54.19
01:12:54.19
STBY
STBY
282min
282min
Cam1
Cam1
Z 00
Z 00
Position mark
disappears
Grayed out
3
Exit the Delete Preset Zoom mode.
Tap (click) the [Clear] button to exit the Delete
Preset Zoom mode.
Memo :
0
The Clip
Review function of the camera recorder
is unavailable during View Remote operation.
(A P86 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately
(Clip Review)] )
Camera Control Function
You can
control the camera by accessing via a web
browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet
terminal, or PC.
You can perform the following operations for each
of the items.
The image is displayed on the View remote.
.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A
REC
For performing recording start or recording
pause operation.
.
B
STREAMING
Turns on or off live streaming.
.
196
View Remote Feature
Network
C
CAMERA
Enables operations related to the camera
functions.
.
.
D
ZOOM
Enables zooming operations.
.
E
FOCUS
Enables focusing operations.
.
F
USER SWITCH
You can
enable or disable the user buttons that
are assigned with a function.
.
G
MENU
You can show or hide the display and menu
characters on an external monitor as well as
operation of menus, switching the display
screen and status display.
.
Camera Control Function
197
Network
Changing the Settings via
a Web Browser
You can change the network-related settings by
accessing via
a web browser on devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
1
Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(A P186
[Connecting from a Web Browser] )
2
Tap (click) the [
Settings] tab.
.
2
3
The [Settings] screen appears.
Set each of the items as follows.
.
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
View Remote
Settings for operations on the View Remote.
B
Connection Setup
Settings related to the network.
You can change the settings for each of the
preset items on the [Wizard
]
screen of the
camera recorder.
C
Metadata Server
Settings on the server for importing the
metadata.
Setting can be performed in the same way as
the Metadata Server menu on the camera
recorder.
The latest settings are reflected, regardless of
whether they are specified via the camera
recorder or web operation.
D
Clip Server
Settings for the server to upload recorded clips
to.
Setting can be performed in the same way as
the [Clip Server] menu on the camera recorder.
The latest settings are reflected, regardless of
whether they are specified via the camera
recorder or web operation.
E
Live Streaming
Setting for streaming audio and video via the
network.
The latest settings are reflected, regardless of
whether they are specified via the camera
recorder or web operation.
F
Return over IP
For specifying settings related to Return over IP.
For configuring settings for receiving video and
audio via the network.
The latest settings are reflected, regardless of
whether they are specified via the camera
recorder or web operation.
Memo :
0
Priority is given to menu operation on the
camera recorder.
0
When the menu on the camera recorder is
opened while the [Settings] screen is opened
using a web browser, a warning appears, after
which the display returns to the main screen.
0
While the menu is displayed on the camera
recorder, the [Settings] screen cannot be
opened via the web browser.
198
Changing the Settings via a Web Browser
Network
Changing View Remote Function
Settings
For performing setting for using the View Remote
function.
.
A
B
C
A
[Camera Name]
0
For setting the name that appears at the top
left of the view screen.
0
Tapping the text input area displays a
software keyboard.
If you are using a PC, enter using the PC
keyboard.
0
By tapping
the Go key after input is complete,
the software keyboard disappears.
B
[Restrictions]
For setting the buttons to be disabled on the
View screen while in the locked mode.
0
[REC]:
For setting whether to disable the Stop
Record button, zoom operation, and camera
control during recording.
Tap (click) each item to switch between
[Unlock] and [Lock].
0
[Except REC]
:
For setting whether to disable the record
button, zoom operation, and camera control
in any mode other than the recording mode.
Tap (click) each item to switch between
[Unlock]
and [Lock].
C
[Save]/
[Cancel]
Tap (click) [Save] to save the settings.
Tap (click) [Cancel] to stop setting and return to
the main [Settings] screen.
Changing Connection Setup
You can change the settings for each of the preset
items on the [Wizard] screen of the camera
recorder.
0
If all the items cannot be displayed in a single
page, scroll down to display the remaining
items.
0
Items that cannot be changed are grayed out
according to
the type of adapter connected and
the mode of connection.
.
A
E
B
D
C
A
Method of Connection
B
Type of USB Adapter Connected
C
Mode of Wireless LAN Connection
D
[Search Access Point] Button
Tap (click) to display a list of the detected
access points.
The
currently
selected access point is indicated
by a dot mark ( 0 ).
.
E
Settings on the [Select Setup Type] Screen of
the Camera Recorder
Changing the Settings via a Web Browser
199
Network
.
F
F
Settings on the [IP Address Configuration]
Screen of the Camera Recorder
When “On” is
selected for “DHCP”, all items will
be grayed out.
.
G
G
Settings when using cellular adapter
.
H
I
H
Settings on the [Select FTP Proxy] Screen of the
Camera Recorder
I
[OK]/[Cancel] Button
After changing of settings is complete, tap
(click) the [OK] button.
On the confirmation screen, tap (click)
[Execute] to change the settings on the camera
recorder and restart the network.
Changing Metadata Server Settings
You can make direct changes to the FTP server for
importing the metadata set in [Network]
B
[Metadata Server], as well as the path of the file to
import.
(A P142 [Metadata Server Item] )
Changing Clip Server Settings
You can make direct changes to the server and
directory settings
that are specified in [Network] B
[Clip Server] for uploading recorded clips in the
recording media to the FTP server.
(A P143 [ Clip Server ] )
Changing Streaming Settings
You can make direct changes to settings that are
specified in [Network] B
[Live Streaming], such as
information on the destination of distribution.
(A P137 [Live Streaming Item] )
200
Changing the Settings via a Web Browser
Network
Managing the Network
Connection Settings File
This camera recorder allows you to save the
network connection
settings on the Wizard screen
to the camera recorder unit.
Loading a saved connecting settings file enables
you to reproduce the appropriate network
connection state speedily.
Memo :
0
To save or retrieve the connection settings, go
to [Network]
B [Connection Setup].
0
The following operations can be performed on
the [Connection Setup] menu.
0
[Saving the Connection Settings File]
(
A P 201)
0
[Reading the Connection Settings File]
(
A P 202)
0
[Deleting Connection Settings] (A P 203)
Number of Storable Setup Files
Camera recorder : [CAM1] to [CAM4]
Saving the Connection Settings File
1
Select [Network] B [Connection Setup
] B
[Setup File] and press the Set button (R).
2
Select [Store] and
press the Set button (R).
.
2
3
Select the file to be newly saved (or
overwritten) using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
.
3
4
Name the file.
Enter the subname using the software
keyboard.
(A P109 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )
Memo :
0
When overwriting an existing file, the subname
of the existing file is displayed.
0
Select [Cancel
] and press the Set button (R), or
press the [CANCEL] button to return to the
previous screen.
Managing the Network Connection Settings File
201
Network
5
Select [Store] and
press the Set button (R).
.
5
4
6
Save the file.
0
A confirmation screen appears when you
choose to overwrite.
Select [Overwrite] on the confirmation
screen,
and
press the Set button (R). Saving
starts, and “Storing...” appears on the screen.
.
:KAMAKURA
6
Cancel
Overwrite
CAM3
Setup?
Overwrite Connection
0
Saving starts,
and “Storing...” appears on the
screen when the file is newly saved.
.
Storing...
7
Saving is complete.
After saving of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
Reading the Connection Settings File
1
Select [Network] B [Connection Setup
] B
[Setup File] and press the Set button (R).
2
Select [Load] and press
the Set button (R).
.
2
3
Select the file to read using the cross-
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
.
3
4
Select [Load] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Loading starts, and “Loading...” appears on
the
screen.
.
:YOKOHAMA
4
Cancel
Load
CAM2
Setup?
Load Connection
5
Reading is complete.
After reading of the file is complete, “Complete
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
202
Managing the Network Connection Settings File
Network
Deleting Connection Settings
1
Select [Network] B [Connection Setup]
B
[Setup File] and press the Set button (R).
2
Select [Delete] and press the Set button
(R).
.
2
3
Select the file to delete using the cross-
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
.
3
4
Select [Delete] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Deletion starts, and “Deleting...” appears
on the
screen.
.
:TOKYO
4
Cancel
Delete
CAM1
Setup?
Delete Connection
5
Deletion is complete.
After file deletion is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen.
Managing the Network Connection Settings File
203
Network
Performing Live Streaming
By combining
with the decoder or PC application that supports live streaming, you can perform audio and
video streaming via the network.
Supported Formats
.
1920x
1080,
60p
1920x
1080,
60i
1920x
1080,
30p
1280x
720,
60p
1280x
720,
30p
720x
480,
60i
640x
360,
60p
640x
360,
30p
HD
QuickTime
(H.264)
1920x1080
1280x720
1920x1080
1280x720
QuickTime
(MPEG2)
MXF
(MPEG2)
1920x1080
1440x1080
1280x720
QuickTime
(H.264)
720x480
60p
60i
30p
60p
60p
60p
60i
30p
60i
60p
60i
Record Format
Usable Formats for Live Streaming
System Format
Resolution
Frame
Rate
SD
Exchange
(U model)
(U model)
.
1920x
1080,
50p
1920x
1080,
50i
1920x
1080,
25p
1280x
720,
50p
1280x
720,
25p
720x
576,
50i
640x
360,
50p
640x
360,
25p
HD
QuickTime
(H.264)
1920x1080
1280x720
1920x1080
1280x720
QuickTime
(MPEG2)
MXF
(MPEG2)
1920x1080
1440x1080
1280x720
SD QuickTime
(H.264)
720x576
50p
50i
25p
50p
50p
50p
50i
25p
50i
50p
50i
Record Format
Usable Formats for Live Streaming
System Format
Resolution
Frame
Rate
MP4
(E model)
(E model)
204
Performing Live Streaming
Network
Memo :
0
The distributable resolution, frame rate and bit
rate vary according to the recording format.
0
To distribute progressive video, set the frame
rate to any of the progressive frame rates. And
to distribute
interlace video, set the frame rate to
any of the interlace frame rates.
0
Depending on the type of network adapter used
and the connection, the images and audio
sound during live streaming can be choppy.
Audio
AAC
Supported Protocols
MPEG2-TS/UDP
MPEG2-TS/TCP
MPEG2-TS/RTP
RTSP/RTP
ZIXI
RTMP
Performing Live Streaming
205
Network
Setting Distribution
1
Set the [Record Format] according to the
resolution and
frame rate of the video to be
distributed.
For details on the [Record Format] settings,
please refer to [Distributable [Record Format
]
and [Live Streaming Set] Combinations]
(A P 206).
Memo :
0
Live streaming cannot be performed in the
following cases.
0
When [System] B [Record Set]
B [Record
Format] B [System] is set to other than “HD”
or “SD”
0
When [System] B [Record Set
] B [Record
Format] B[WFrame Rate] is set to “24p”
2
Set the Resolution and Frame & Bit Rate for
the video to be distributed.
Specify the settings in [Network] B [Live
Streaming].
(A P
137 [Live Streaming Item] )
3
Specify the distribution protocol and
related items.
Specify the distribution protocol and related
items in
[Network
] B [Live Streaming] B
[Streaming Server].
(A P137 [ Streaming Server ] )
4
Select the server for live streaming.
Select the distribution server in [Network] B
[Live Streaming]
B [Server].
Distributable [Record Format] and [Live Streaming Set] Combinations
.
24 Mbps
60p, 50p
1920 x 1080
60i, 50i, 30p, 25p 60p, 50p
1280 x 720
30p, 25p
MPEG2-TS/UDP
MPEG2-TS/TCP
MPEG2-TS/RTP
RTSP/RTP
ZIXI
RTMP
MPEG2-TS/UDP
MPEG2-TS/TCP
MPEG2-TS/RTP
RTSP/RTP
ZIXI
RTMP
MPEG2-TS/UDP
MPEG2-TS/TCP
MPEG2-TS/RTP
RTSP/RTP
ZIXI
RTMP
MPEG2-TS/UDP
MPEG2-TS/TCP
MPEG2-TS/RTP
RTSP/RTP
ZIXI
RTMP
20 Mbps
16 Mbps
12 Mbps
8 Mbps
5 Mbps
3 Mbps
1.5 Mbps
0.8 Mbps
0.3 Mbps
Resolution
Frame Rate
Ty p e
Bit
Rate
* R: Distributable
o: Distributable when [
Format] is configured as follows.
0
QuickTime(H.264), Exchange (U model)
0
MP4(H.264) (E model)
J: When [Format] is configured to “QuickTime(MPEG2)” or “MXF(MPEG2)”, configuring [Time
Stamp] to “On” or configuring
[Overlay Function] to “Enable” disables distribution. A
206
Performing Live Streaming
Network
.
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
24 Mbps
60i or 50i
720 x 480 or 720 x 576
60p, 50p 30p, 25p
640 x 360
MPEG2-TS/UDP
MPEG2-TS/TCP
MPEG2-TS/RTP
RTSP
ZIXI
RTMP
MPEG2-TS/UDP
MPEG2-TS/TCP
MPEG2-TS/RTP
RTSP
ZIXI
RTMP
MPEG2-TS/UDP
MPEG2-TS/TCP
MPEG2-TS/RTP
RTSP
ZIXI
RTMP
20 Mbps
16 Mbps
12 Mbps
8 Mbps
5 Mbps
3 Mbps
1.5 Mbps
0.8 Mbps
0.3 Mbps
Frame Rate
Resolution
Ty p e
Bitrate
* R: Distributable
Performing Live Streaming
207
Network
Starting Distribution
1
Perform the necessary setting for the
decoder and PC application.
For details on the settings, please refer to the
“INSTRUCTIONS” of the respective devices
and applications.
Memo :
0
If there is an NAT router within the
communication path between the camera and
the decoder, port forwarding setup is required.
For details on the settings, please refer to the
“INSTRUCTIONS” of the router in use.
0
The following parameters are required when
connecting to this camera recorder using the
RTSP/RTP.
Port number: 554
Stream ID: stream
0
Use the following to access via URL.
rtsp://<IP address
of the camera recorder>:554/
stream
2
With the network connection established,
set [Live Streaming
] to “On”.
(A P178 [Preparing Network Connection] )
0
Set [
Network] B [Live Streaming] B [Live
Streaming] to “On”.
0
The
network
connection mark appears on the
display screen when a network connection is
established.
(A P162 [Network Connection Icon] )
Memo :
0
You can also assign “Live Streaming
” to a user
button.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
0
You can view the status of distribution on the
LCD monitor.
(
A P164 [Live streaming mark] )
Icon Status
.
(Red)
Distribution in progress (good
connection quality)
Blinks when distribution starts or
stops
.
(Red)
Distribution in progress (poor
connection quality)
.
(Yellow)
Waiting for connection (during
RTSP/RTP) or connection failed
0
When the 5 icon is
displayed, you can view the
details of the error on the [Streaming] screen of
the status screen.
.
Cause of Error
(A P234 [List of Live Streaming Error Displays] )
Caution :
0
Streaming may be interrupted temporarily 24
hours after the process started.
208
Performing Live Streaming
Network
Setting the FEC Matrix
Set the amount of FEC (Forward Error Correction)
overhead for configuring SMPTE2022-1.
1
Select [Network] B [
Live Streaming]
B
[Streaming Server] B [Server1] to [Server4]
B [FEC Matrix] and press the Set button.
The FEC adjustment screen appears.
.
2
Adjust the L and D values.
Use the H/I buttons to adjust the L value, and
the J/K buttons to adjust the D value.
The amount of FEC overhead changes when
the L and D values are changed.
To restore the L and D values to their default
values, press the [
OIS/2] button.
Memo :
0
Setting range
0
4 L 20 (Default value: L = 10)
0
4 D 20 (Default value: D = 10)
0
L × D 100 (Default value: L×D = 10×10)
3
Press the Set button (R).
The screen returns to the streaming server
setting screen.
.
Memo :
0
Increasing the amount of FEC overhead
increases the packet loss resilience but more
network bandwidth is used.
0
Even with the same amount of overhead,
increasing the L value will increase the packet
loss (continuous packet loss) resilience.
Performing Live Streaming
209
Network
Return Video/Audio from
the Network (Return over
IP)
Return video/audio from the network can be
displayed on the viewfinder or LCD monitor of the
camera or listened through a headphone.
Memo :
0
This feature
is only usable in the Camera mode.
0
Start the encoder before activating Return over
IP. To end, turn off Return over IP before shutting
down the encoder.
0
This feature is available when [System] B
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [System] is
set to “HD” or “SD”. When [WFrame Rate] is set
to “24p”, this feature is not available.
Configuring the Return over IP Server
Configure the Return over IP settings and establish
the connection before displaying the return video.
1
Register the [Return Server].
Configure [Network] B [
Return over IP]
B
[Server] to “Server”.
Configure the individual settings in the [Return
Server] item.
Memo :
0
For details
on the registered information, please
consult the network administrator for the server.
0
Configure “Icecast” to a setting other than
[Type].
Operates as IFB when the setting is configured
to “Icecast”.
Return Video and Audio from the
Network
1
Set the camera recorder to the Camera
mode.
(A P24
[Operation Modes] )
2
Assign the
“Return Video” and “Return
over IP
features to any of the user buttons
(A P
46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
Memo :
0
The
“Return over IP” feature can also be
operated using
“On”/“Off” under [Network] B
[Return over IP] B [Return over IP].
3
When [WFormat] is configured to
“QuickTime (MPEG2)
or “MXF(MPEG2)”,
configure [Network] B [Return over IP] B
[Function] to “Enable”A
(A P
139 [ Function A
] )
4
Press the user button that is assigned with
the “Return over IP
function.
5
Press the user button that is assigned with
the “Return Video” function.
Displays the return video image.
The settings in [
A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B
[IFB/RET Monitor] will be applied to the audio.
(A P134 [ IFB/RET Monitor... ] )
210
Return Video/Audio from the Network (Return over IP)
Network
IFB (Return Audio)
Return audio from the network can be played
through a headphone.
Memo :
0
This feature
is only usable in the Camera mode.
0
Start the encoder before activating Return over
IP. To
end, turn off Return over IP before shutting
down the encoder.
0
This feature is available when [System] B
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [System] is
set to “HD” or “SD”. When [WFrame Rate] is set
to “24p”, this feature is not available.
Configuring the Return over IP Server
Configure the Return over IP settings and establish
the connection before displaying the return audio.
1
Register the [Return Server].
Configure [Network] B [
Return over IP]
B
[Server] to “Server”.
Configure the individual settings in the [Return
Server] item.
Memo :
0
For details
on the registered information, please
consult the network administrator for the server.
0
Configure “Icecast” to [Type
].
Operates as IFB when the setting is configured
to “Icecast”.
Return Audio from the Network (IFB)
1
Set the camera recorder to the Camera
mode.
(A P24 [Operation Modes] )
2
Assign
the “Return over
IP” function to any
of the user buttons.
(A P46 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
Memo :
0
The “Return over IP” feature can also be
operated using
“On”/“Off” under [Network] B
[Return over IP] B [Return over IP].
3
When [WFormat] is configured to
“QuickTime (MPEG2)”
or “MXF(MPEG2)”,
configure [Network] B [Return over IP] B
[Function] to “Enable”A
(A P
139 [ Function A
] )
4
Press the user button that is assigned with
the “Return over IP
function.
When Return over IP is activated, the settings
in [A/V Set] B [Audio Set
] B [IFB/RET Monitor]
will be applied to the audio.
(A P134 [ IFB/RET Monitor... ] )
IFB (Return Audio)
211
Network
Tagging Feature L
When using
the Exchange file format, entering the
tag information on the camera recorder helps to
ease the management of tags during editing.
Configuring to Exchange Format
To use the tagging feature, configure [System] B
[Record Set
]
B [Record Format] B [WFormat] to
“Exchange”.
(A P56 [Selecting System Definition, File
Format and Video Format] )
Configuring Camera Angle Information
Camera angle information can be recorded to the
metadata of the recorded clip.
Configure the settings in [Camera Function] B
[Camera Angle[Tagging]].
(
A P113 [ Camera Angle[Tagging] L ] )
Entering Tag Information
Tag information can be entered on the camera
recorder or via the web function of the camera
recorder.
Entering Tag Information on the Camera
Recorder
1
Assign the tag to a user button
(A P
116 [User Switch Set Item] )
2
Press
the user button that is assigned with
the tag
3
Start recording.
4
To make changes, press the user button
that is assigned with the tag.
5
Stop recording.
The tag is recorded to the .xchange file.
Entering Tag Information via the Web Function
1
Access the web function of this camera
recorder via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal or
PC, and display the main page.
(A P
178 [Preparing Network Connection] )
(
A P186 [Connecting from a Web Browser] )
2
Press the “Sports Tagging” button to
display the tag input screen.
3
Enter the tag information and press the
“Enter” button
Enter
“Title 1” and “Title 2” manually or using the
template input button.
4
Start recording.
5
To
make changes, enter the tag information
and press the “Enter”
button
Enter “Title 1” and “Title 2” manually or using the
template input button.
6
Press the Set button
7
Stop recording.
The tag is recorded to the .xchange file.
.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
A
Sports Tagging Button
B
Current setting
Displays the
text strings entered for [Title 1] and
[Title 2] just before the Set button is last
pressed.
C
Data input boxes [Title 1] and [Title 2]
Text can be entered into the boxes directly. For
smartphones or tablets, tapping the box
displays a OS keyboard.
D
Clear button
Clears the text in the [Title 1] and [Title 2] boxes.
212
Tagging Feature L
Network
E
Set button
Sends the
text strings in [Title 1] and [Title 2] to
the camera recorder and the tag data of the clip
is updated. Update of the tag data is possible
while recording is in progress.
F
Template input button
Enters a template phrase into the [Title 1].
(Example) Pressing the [KO] button enters KO
into “Title 1”.
G
REMOVE Button
Adds a REMOVE flag to the .xchange file of the
clip that is currently being recorded. When
recording is paused during Clip Continuous
recording, pressing the REMOVE button adds
a REMOVE flag to the .xchange file that was last
recorded.
H
Stop Record Button
Stops clip recording by the camera recorder.
This button is active only during clip recording
by the camera recorder.
I
Start Record Button
Starts clip recording by the camera recorder.
This button is active only when the camera
recorder is ready to start recording.
Memo :
0
You can enter up to 64 characters for “Title 1
and up to 128 characters for “Title 2”.
0
Changing (including clearing) the text in the
“Title 1
” and “Title 2
” boxes does not
automatically update the tag data of the
recorded clip. Make sure to press the Set button
to confirm the change. Changes in the tag data
cannot be made to clips for which recording has
already ended.
0
Input of tag data in file formats other than MOV
is not guaranteed.
0
When a recorded clip is split into multiple files,
the same
tag information may not be saved to all
the files depending on the timing at which the tag
information is updated. It is recommended that
a SDXC card be used with [System] B Record
Set B [4GB File Spanning(SDXC)] configured to
“Off”.
Synchronizing GPS Time Code
Time code information can be synchronized with
the date/time information acquired from the GPS.
(A P85 [Acquiring Positioning Information by
GPS] )
Setting Time Code Generator
Set
[TC/UB] B [TC Generator]
to “Free Run(GPS)”.
(A P124 [ TC Generator ] )
Memo :
0
When [System] B [Record Set] B
[Rec Mode] is
configured to “Interval Rec” or “Frame Rec”,
“Free Run(GPS)” cannot be selected.
0
The Z icon lights up when the time code is
synchronized.
.
1
/60
F2. 8
AE
±0
ND1
/64
12 :34 : 56
ISO
102400
00: 00:00.00
5 . 6 f t
B 5600
K
4030 20 10 0
Tagging Feature L
213
Network
Broadcast Overlay A
L
Texts, images
and watermark can be overlaid onto
recorded videos and live streaming videos from a
smartphone or tablet device by importing the SDP
file for broadcast.
Available when [System] is set to “HD” or “HD
+Web”.
Use the SDP Generator to create the SDP file for
broadcast.
0
For information on SDP Generator, please
contact your local dealer or download from our
website.
http://www.jvc.net
Caution :
0
Regardless of the recording resolution
(1920x1080, 1440x1080, 1280x720), the SDP
file resolution that can be used on this camera
recorder is fixed at 1920x1080.
Memo :
0
Configuring Type to “Broadcast” in the factory
settings displays
a sample of the overlaid image.
0
Check the display and operation in advance
before recording or live streaming starts.
Importing and Configuring Settings for
SDP Files for Broadcast
Memo :
0
When the recording format is “HD+Web
”, the
scoreboard display is always overlaid on the
“Web” recording clip.
0
The scoreboard display is always overlaid on
live video streaming.
0
The settings cannot be changed during
recording or live streaming.
1
Set [Overlay Settings] B [Overlay
Function
] to “Enable”.
When [System] is configured to a setting other
than “HD” and “HD+Web
”, this item is fixed at
“Disable
”.
2
Use [Overlay Settings] B [
Import User
Layout
] to import the file.
To use an overlay other than the SDP file at
factory
default,
import the SDP file for broadcast
to the camera.
3
Select the file for overlay from the imported
file in
[Overlay Settings
] B [Layout].
4
Select “Broadcast” in [Overlay Settings] B
[Type].
When the SDP file selected in [Layout] is
created in a type other than “Broadcast”, or
when the recording resolution of the
“Broadcast
type of the SDP file is different from
the recording resolution of the current camera,
“Broadcast” is not displayed in [Type].
0
Broadcast:
.
Watermark
Logo
Live Mark
Text 3
TimeText 2
Text 1
0
None: No display
5
Select the display in [Overlay Settings] B
[Output] B [
HD Recording]
/[HDMI]
(A
P144 [ HD Recording ] )
(
A P144 [ HDMI ] )
Entering Overlay Text
1
Connect this camera recorder to the
network
(A P179 [Connecting to the Network] )
2
Connecting from a web browser
(
A P186 [Connecting from a Web Browser] )
3
When the web browser screen appears,
press the overlay icon at the top of the
screen or the [Overlay Control] button to
display the input screen
.
4
One of the following screens appears
according to the setting for [
Type] in the
camera recorder menu.
214
Broadcast Overlay A L
Overlay
A
L
.
<A>
<B>
A
B
D
E
F
C
<C>
<D>
<E>
<F>
G
I
H
Memo:
Range <A> Text 1
Range <B> Text 2
Range <C> Text 3
Range <D> Time
Range <E> Logo
Range <F> Live mark
A
Shows the current overlay status.
B
Text selection area
The highlighted
text is overlaid and displayed.
C
[K] [J] Button
Selects the text.
D
[Edit] Button
Switches to the text entry mode.
E
[1][2][3][4] Button
Selects the image.
F
[Display] Button
Displays or hides specific areas.
G
Unit Button
Selects the unit to add after Text 3.
H
[Update] Button
Reflects the changed content in the overlay
display.
I
[Overlay] Button
Displays or hides the overlay.
Text that can be entered in [Text 1], [Text 2], and
[Text 3]
are as follows:
.
! " # $%&' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
: ; < = > ?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU
VWXYZ[ \ ] ^ _ ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n
o p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ ¡ ¢ £ ¤ ¥ ¦ § ¨
© ª « ¬ ® ¯ ° ± ² ³ ´ μ ¶ • ¸ ¹ º » ¼ ½ ¾ ¿
À Á Â Ã Ä ÅÆÇÈ É Ê Ë Ì Í Î ÏÐÑÒÓÔÕÖ×
ØÙÚÛÜÝ Þ ß à á â ã ä åæç è é ê ë ì í î ï
ð ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷øùúûüýþÿĞğİıOEoeŞşŠšŸ
Žžƒˆ˜–—‘’‚“”„†‡•…‰‹›€™
Memo :
0
Not more than 5 lines can be entered for Text 1
and
Text
2 each. Up to 63 bytes can be entered
for each line.
0
Up to 5 bytes can be entered for Text 3.
0
For some types of text, the text that has been
entered may not be displayed fully on the
overlaid display. Check the display in advance.
Broadcast Overlay A L
215
Overlay
A
L
Displaying Watermark Images
Import the SDP file in which the watermark image
has been preconfigured to the camera recorder in
advance.
The watermark setting menu will be displayed in
the [Overlay Settings] menu screen only when the
SDP file for broadcast is selected in [Overlay
Settings]
B [Layout].
1
Set [Overlay Settings] B [Watermark]
to
“On”.
2
Select [Overlay Settings] B [Position].
The
watermark position setting screen appears.
0
The position is moved 2 steps at a time.
0
The displayed coordinates shows the
position at the top left of the watermark
image.
3
Use the cursor to move the watermark and
press the Set (R) button
.
Horizontal
Direction
Vertical Direction
Displaying Images on the Whole Screen
(Full Screen Graphic Function)
Announcement and advertising images can be
displayed across the whole screen.
.
Importing Images for Display to the Camera
1
Prepare the image for display.
JPEG (extension .jpg) and PNG
(extension .png) formats are supported.
2
Copy the image file to the root directory of
the SD card.
0
Use
an
SD card of a recordable specification
in the current camera recording settings.
0
Up to 50 image files can be displayed.
0
The order of display by file name can be
specified.
Memo :
0
Add a two-digit number of 01 to 50 at the start of
the file name. Files will be displayed in the order
starting from those having the smallest number
in the file name.
Example: When 01flower.png, 02car.jpg,
13red.png are imported, they are displayed in
the order of 01flower.png B 02car.jpg B
13red.png.
0
Only alphanumeric characters and underscore
(_) can be used for the third character onwards
in the file name.
0
Enter not more than 31 characters for the file
name.
3
Select [Overlay Settings] B [Full Screen
Graphic].
4
Insert
the SD card where the image files are
copied into the SD card slot A or B of the
camera, and select [Import GraphicW] or
[Import GraphicY] to import.
0
Once import is performed, all images
previously imported will be deleted.
0
To delete the imported image files, select
[Overlay Settings
] B [Full Screen Graphic] B
[Delete Graphic].
216
Broadcast Overlay A L
Overlay
A
L
Memo :
0
The total number of currently imported image
files and the used capacity can be checked in
[Overlay Settings]
B [Full Screen Graphic] B
[Status]. This capacity may be bigger than the
actual image file size.
0
The maximum import size is approx. 23 MB,
after combining the capacity that can be
checked
in
[Status] and the size of the imported
SDP files.
0
Images that can be displayed are as follows:
0
Image Size: 960x540
0
File Size: 1MB and below
0
JPEG:
Gradation: 8 bit
Pixel format: YCbCr or grayscale
Baseline JPEG
0
PNG:
Bit/Channel: 1, 2, 4, 8
Pixel format: Grayscale, Index, True color
(RGB), grayscale with alpha, true color with
alpha (RGBA)
Non-interlaced PNG
0
When images that cannot be displayed are
imported to the camera, an error message
“Unsupported Graphic Format” is displayed on
the camera recorder while image display is in
progress.
Check in advance that images can be
displayed as per expectation.
Displaying Images
Display the image from the web screen for setting
the overlay.
.
E
D
C
B
A
A
Start:
Starts the display of images.
B
Stop:
Stops the display of images.
C
Next:
Image in
display
:
Displays the next image.
Image
not in
display
:
Starts displaying from the next
image of the image at which the
display stopped previously.
Depending on the status of the camera, it may
take a while to display the next image after
pressing the [Next] button.
D
Interval Time:
Sets the display time per image.
Depending on the status of the camera, it may
take a while to display the next image after
pressing the [Start] button. A time longer than
the configured interval time may be
displayed.
E
Loop Playback:
Select [ON] to return to the first image after the
last image is displayed.
Broadcast Overlay A L
217
Overlay
A
L
Memo :
0
To display only one image continuously, set
[Interval Time] to “0”.
0
When recording is performed together with live
streaming or when there is a lot of information
display on
the LCD/VF screen, images may take
more than 10 seconds to display. It is possible
to reduce the time taken to display by lowering
the resolution of the recording and live
streaming or by pressing the [DISPLAY] button
of the camera recorder to turn off the display
screen.
0
To use only the Full Screen Graphic function
without the overlay display, select [Overlay
Settings]
B [Type] and choose options other
than “None”. Then, set the [Overlay] button on
the web screen for controlling the overlay to Off.
0
When the format of the next image to be
displayed
is not supported during image display,
“Unsupported Graphic Format” will be displayed
on the camera recorder, and that image will not
be displayed. Import images that support a
displayable format.
(A P216 [Importing Images for Display to the
Camera] )
Protecting Overlay Settings with a
Password
You can use a password to protect overlay settings
to prevent
the cancellation of watermark display by
a third party.
Protecting with a Password
1
Set [Overlay Settings] B [
Password Lock
]
to “On”.
2
Enter the protection password and press
the cross-shaped button (I).
Enter not more than 16 characters for the
password using the software keyboard.
3
Enter the same password again and press
the cross-shaped button (I).
4
Press [Set].
A password request screen will appear
subsequently before you enter the [Overlay
Settings] screen.
Caution :
0
Do not
forget the password that you have set. If
the password is lost or forgotten, you cannot
deactivate the password protection function.
Memo :
0
When overlay settings are protected by a
password, the following items in [System] are
grayed out and cannot be selected.
0
[Reset All]
0
[Record Set]
B [Record Format]
0
[Setup File] B [Load File] B [Picture File]
/
[User File]/[All File]
0
[Setup File
]
B [Store File] B [Picture File]/
[User File]/[All File]
Deactivating Password Protection
1
Select [Overlay Settings].
A password request screen appears.
2
Enter the password and press the cross-
shaped button (I).
If the password matches the configured
password, the [Overlay Settings] menu
appears.
3
Change [Password Lock] to “Off”.
4
Press [Set] to close the deactivation
complete screen.
218
Broadcast Overlay A L
Overlay
A
L
Specifying Text and Images
1
Connect the camera recorder to a network
compatible device
such as a mobile device
via the network.
(A P178 [Preparing Network Connection] )
When network connection is established
between the devices, start the Web browser on
the network compatible device.
2
Enter the following URL in the address bar
of the Web browser.
.
http://
“IP address of camera ecorder”
Example; http://192.168.0.1
You can check the “IP address of camera
recorder” by pressing the [STATUS] button on
the camera recorder to display the Status
screen and use the cross-shaped button (H I)
to display the Network screen.
3
Enter the user name and password.
Enter the user name and the password on the
login screen to display the main page of the
camera.
4
Press the overlay control icon at the top of
the screen or the [Overlay Control
] button
to display the Settings screen
.
4
5
Press the [Update] button to reflect the
specified text and images in the overlay.
Scoreboard Overlay L
By using
a smartphone or tablet, a scoreboard can
be overlaid onto a recorded or live streaming video.
Available when [System] is set to “HD” or “HD
+Web”.
Memo :
0
Check the display and operation in advance
before recording or live streaming starts.
Configuring Scoreboard Display
Caution :
0
Regardless of the recording resolution
(1920x1080, 1440x1080, 1280x720), the SDP
file resolution that can be used on this camera
recorder is fixed at 1920x1080.
Memo :
0
When displaying
soccer or ice hockey, import an
SDP file to the camera recorder in advance.
Create an SDP file using the SDP Generator.
Next, select the imported SDP file in [Overlay
Settings] B [Layout].
0
When the recording format is
“HD+Web
”, the
scoreboard display is always overlaid on the
“Web” recording clip.
0
The scoreboard display is always overlaid on
live video streaming.
1
Configure [Overlay Settings] B [Overlay
Function]
to “Enable”.
When [System] is configured to a setting other
than “HD” and “HD+Web
”, this item is fixed at
“Disable
”.
2
Import the file in [Overlay Settings] B
[Import User Layout
]
0
Create SDP files for scoreboard overlay in
advance using the SDP Generator.
0
Skip step 2 if
[
Layout] is to be configured to
“Default” in step 3.
3
Select [Overlay Settings] B [Layout].
4
Select [Overlay Settings
] B [Type].
5
Select the display in [Overlay Settings] B
[Output] B [HD Recording]/[HDMI]
(A P144
[ HD Recording ] )
(
A P144 [ HDMI ] )
Broadcast Overlay A L
219
Overlay
A
L
Configuring Scoreboard Display
Position
The scoreboard can be displayed at the following
positions on
the screen. Create an SDP file with the
desired display position in the SDP Generator and
import the file to the camera recorder.
(A P228 [Importing an image containing the
team name and logo] )
Type Overlay Location
Type 1 Top, Bottom
Type 2 Top, Bottom
Football Top, Bottom
Basketball Top, Bottom
Baseball
Top Right, Bottom Right,
Top Left, Bottom Left
Soccer
Small
Top Right, Bottom Right,
Top Left, Bottom Left
Large
Bottom (not
changeable)
Penalty
Shoot-out
Bottom (not
changeable)
Hockey
Top Right, Bottom Right,
Top Left, Bottom Left
Type 1 :
.
Offense Team Indicator Period
Points Scored
TEAM NAME
Remainning Time
Type 2 :
.
Points Scored
TEAM NAME Set
Set Count
Football :
.
Offense Team Indicator
Points Scored
Period
Remainning Time
TEAM NAME
TOL
Down & Distance
Basketball :
.
Shot Clock
Period
Remainning Time
Points Scored
TEAM NAME
TOL
Baseball :
.
Runner
Count
Inning
Offense Team Indicator
Team Name;
Points Scored
Soccer :
Select [Small], [Large] or [Penalty Shoot-out] in
the Overlay Control web screen.
[Small]
.
Time
Points Scored
Team Name (Small)
Team Logo (Small)
Additional Time
Minutes of Added Time
[Large]
.
Text
Team Logo (Large)
Team Name (Large)
Points Scored
[Penalty Shoot-out]
.
Points Scored
Goal/Miss
220
Scoreboard Overlay L
Overlay
A
L
Hockey :
Select [Small] or [SHOOTOUT] in the Overlay
Control web screen.
[Small]
.
TEAM NAME Period
Remainning Time
Team Logo
Power Play
Points Scored
[SHOOTOUT]
.
Rounds 1 to 3
Rounds 4 and later
Goal/Miss
None: Does not display
Entering Scoreboard Data
1
Connect this camera recorder to the
network
(A P179 [Connecting to the Network] )
2
Connecting from a web browser
(
A P186 [Connecting from a Web Browser] )
3
When the web browser screen appears,
press the overlay icon at the top of the
screen or the [Overlay Control] button to
display the input screen
.
4
One of the following screens appears
according to the setting for
[
Type] in the
camera recorder menu.
All information except for the numerical values
is reflected immediately on the scoreboard
display without the need to press the [Update
]
button.
Memo :
0
When the camera recorder is live streaming
while recording, the update interval of the time
display may not be constant. When this
happens, reduce the resolution of the live
streaming.
Scoreboard Overlay L
221
Overlay
A
L
Type 1
.
A
B
C
D
E
A
Time
The start time entered is reflected on the score
overlay by pressing the [Set] button.
B
[Update] Button
Reflects numerical values such as score and
distance on the score overlay.
C
[Overlay] Button
Turns the score overlay on or off.
D
Team Name (for text input)
If the
SDP file selected in the menu item [Overlay
Settings] B [Layout] contains more than one
team name image, this item is grayed out and
text input is disabled.
E
Clock Count Direction
Count Up: Increase
Count Down: Decrease
Type 2
.
A
B
C
A
[Update] Button
Reflects numerical values such as score and
distance on the score overlay.
B
[Overlay] Button
Turns the score overlay on or off.
C
Team Name (for text input)
If the
SDP file selected in the menu item [Overlay
Settings] B [Layout] contains more than one
team name image, this item is grayed out and
text input is disabled.
222
Scoreboard Overlay L
Overlay
A
L
Football
.
B
C
D
A
A
Time
The start time entered is reflected on the score
overlay by pressing the [Set] button.
B
[Update] Button
Reflects numerical values such as score and
distance on the score overlay.
C
[Overlay] Button
Turns the score overlay on or off.
D
Team Name (for text input)
If the
SDP file selected in the menu item [Overlay
Settings] B [Layout] contains more than one
team name image, this item is grayed out and
text input is disabled.
Baseball
.
A
B
C
A
[Update] Button
Reflects numerical values such as score and
distance on the score overlay.
B
[Display] Button
Displays or hides specific areas.
C
Team Name (for text input)
If
the SDP file selected in the menu item [Overlay
Settings] B [Layout] contains more than one
team name image, this item is grayed out and
text input is disabled.
Scoreboard Overlay L
223
Overlay
A
L
Basketball
.
B
C
A
E
F
D
A
Time
The start time entered is reflected on the score
overlay by pressing the [Set] button.
B
[Update] Button
Reflects numerical values such as score and
distance on the score overlay.
C
[Overlay] Button
Turns the score overlay on or off.
D
[Display] Button
Displays or hides specific areas.
E
[Reset1]/[Reset2] Button
for Shot Clock
Resets the value (in seconds) set below
[Set] Button
Confirms
the value (in seconds) when [Reset1]/
[Reset 2] button is pressed
F
Team Name (for text input)
If the SDP file selected in the menu item [Overlay
Settings] B [Layout] contains more than one
team name image, this item is grayed out and
text input is disabled.
224
Scoreboard Overlay L
Overlay
A
L
Soccer
.
B
C
A
E
F
G
H
I
J
D
A
Time
The start time entered is reflected on the score
overlay by pressing the [Set] button.
B
Time (Left):
Currently displayed match time.
Time (Right):
Currently displayed additional time. Displayed
only during additional time.
C
Period:
Can
be
changed only when the clock is stopped.
D
Minutes of Added Time:
Displays the additional time granted only during
additional time if “ON” is selected.
E
[Update] Button
Reflects numerical values such as score and
distance on the score overlay.
F
[Overlay] Button
Turns the score overlay on or off.
G
Display Type:
[Small] Button: Small display
[Large] Button: Large display
[PSO] Button: Penalty Shoot-out
displayMinutes
H
Penalty Shoot-out:
Use when “PSO” is selected.
I
Preset Settings:
Items to be set before the match. Set the
duration of each halftime, texts to be displayed
in the Large display, and team names to be used
in the Small and Large displays.
J
Team Name (for text input)
If the SDP file selected in the menu item [Overlay
Settings] B [Layout] contains more than one
team name image, this item is grayed out and
text input is disabled.
Scoreboard Overlay L
225
Overlay
A
L
Hockey
.
B
C
A
E
F
G
D
A
Time
The start time entered is reflected on the score
overlay by pressing the [Set] button.
B
Power Play:
Entering the penalty time displays the power
play state that corresponds to it.
C
[Overlay] Button
Turns the score overlay on or off.
D
[Update] Button
Reflects numerical values such as score and
distance on the score overlay.
E
Display Type:
[Small] Button: Small display
[SHOOTOUT] Button: Shoot-out display
F
SHOOTOUT:
[Round 1-3] Tab: For round 1 to 3
[Round 4+] Tab: For round 4 and later
G
Team Name (for text input)
If
the
SDP file selected in the menu item [Overlay
Settings] B [Layout] contains more than one
team name image, this item is grayed out and
text input is disabled.
226
Scoreboard Overlay L
Overlay
A
L
Additional time display for Soccer
The display of additional time toggles on and off automatically depending on the elapsed time of [Time]
and the status of [Period]. Whether a match is in additional time is determined by the setting values of
[Duration of Each Half] and [Duration of Each Half of ET] of [Preset Settings]. The display example is as
follows.
Example) Duration of Each Half: “45:00”, Duration of Each half of ET:
“15:00”
Period Time Time Display
1st Half
1:23
.
46:23
.
2nd Half
46:23
.
91:23
.
ET 1
91:23
.
106:23
.
ET 2
106:23
.
121:23
.
Power play for Hockey
Depending on the state of the penalty time, power play is automatically displayed or hidden. The display
example is as follows.
Penalty Time Time Display
Left Team Right Team
Display Position Display Time
Penalty 1 Penalty 2 Penalty 1 Penalty 2
0:00 0:00 0:00 0:00
.
0:00 0:00 Time C 0:00
.
Time C
0:00 0:00 Time C Time D
.
Time C or D (the
smaller of the two)
Time A 0:00 0:00 0:00
.
Time A
Time A 0:00 Time C 0:00
.
Time A or C (the
smaller of the two)
Time A 0:00 Time C Time D
.
Time A, C or D (the
smallest of
the three)
Time A Time B 0:00 0:00
.
Time A or B (the
smaller of the two)
Time A Time B Time C 0:00
.
Time A, B or C (the
smallest of
the three)
Time A Time B Time C Time D
.
Time A, B, C or D
(the smallest of the
four)
Scoreboard Overlay L
227
Overlay
A
L
Team Display Settings
Team names can be displayed by one of the
following ways.
0
Specifying texts directly from web browser
0
Importing an image containing the team name
and logo
Specifying texts directly from web browser
Enter the texts in the Overlay Control web screen.
Available characters are as follows. However, text
cannot be entered when using a SDP file
containing team name images.
.
!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGH
IJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmno
pqrstuvwxyz{|}~¡¢£¤¥¦§¨©ª«¬®¯°±²³´μ¶•¸¹º»¼½
¾¿ÀÁÂÃÄÅÆÇÈÉÊËÌÍÎÏÐÑÒÓÔÕÖ×ØÙÚÛÜÝ
Þßàáâãäåæçèéêëìíîïðñòóôõö÷øùúûüýþÿĞğİıŒ
œŞşŠšŸŽžƒˆ˜–—‘’‚“”„†‡•…‰‹›€™
Memo :
0
For some types of text, the text that has been
entered may not be displayed fully on the
overlaid display. Check the display in advance.
Importing an image containing the team name
and logo
To display a team name with logo or a team name
that contains characters that are not available for
input, an image can be imported to the camera
recorder in
place of text input for display at the team
name area of the score overlay.
The data file (SDP file) to be imported can be
generated by an SDP Generator, a PC/Mac
application. A maximum of 30 teams can be
registered.
For information on SDP Generator, please contact
your local dealer or download from our website.
http://www.jvc.net
Caution :
0
Please check the content and font licenses of
the image before use.
1
Copy the SDP file to the root folder of an SD
card
Copy the SDP file generated by the SDP
Generator to the root folder of an SD card.
Specify
a
name for the SDP file that is not longer
than 63 alphanumeric characters with a “sdp”
extension.
Example: [overlay1.sdp]
2
Insert the SD card in which the SDP file is
copied into slot A or B,
then select [Overlay Settings] B [Import User
Layout].
The SDP files in the root folder of the SD card
are displayed (max. 8 files per slot). However,
if
the
file name is long and cannot be displayed
on the menu screen, the file will be displayed
with part of the file name omitted.
Select an SDP file to import from the list of
displayed SDP files.
3
Import the file
Select an import destination from areas 1 to 4
to
start
importing. If you select an area where a
file name is already displayed, a confirmation
screen asking whether to overwrite will appear.
It will take about 20 to 30 seconds to complete
the import. “Complete” will be displayed at the
end. A gray display area indicates insufficient
space and it cannot be selected. Select another
area or delete SDP files that are not required in
advance in [Overlay Settings] B [Delete User
Layout].
Caution :
0
Do not turn off the power of the unit during
import. You may lose the import data.
0
When import is successful, the name of the
imported SDP file will be added to the
[Overlay Settings]
B [Layout] item. Select an
SDP file name suitable for overlay. If a valid
SDP file is not imported to the camera
recorder, or if the SDP file imported does not
match the recording format of the camera
recorder, the [Type] item will be displayed as
“None” and grayed out. Import a correct SDP
file with [Import User Layout].
0
Select the team name to display in [Main
Menu] →
[Overlay Settings
] → [Left Team] (*)
or [Right Team] (*).
* This menu item name can be changed in the
SDP Generator settings.
0
It is
recommended that you check the display
of imported team names or logos before
recording starts.
228
Scoreboard Overlay L
Overlay
A
L
Deleting an Imported SDP File
You can delete an imported SDP file.
1
Select [Overlay Settings] B [
Delete User
Layout
].
2
Select an SDP file to delete.
The blue line at the background of the SDP file
name indicates that the file is applied for the
current overlay.
.
Memo :
0
The imported SDP file cannot be deleted in
[System] B [Reset All].
Please use this function
to delete.
Entering Scoreboard Data
Automatically
By using a scoreboard solution supplied from
Sportzcast, the camera can ingest scoreboard
data automatically. This enables the updating of
the scoreboard
display without having to manually
enter the scores from the Web screen. Please
contact the local dealers in your area on the
Sportzcast solution.
Configuring the Server
To connect to the Sportzcast cloud service, select
“Cloud” in the [Sever Settings] (
A P 146).
Meanwhile, connection to a Sportzcast that is
connected to a local network can be configured
using [Search Local Server]. Start search after
powering on Scorebot and connecting it to the
same network as the camera recorder.
1
From the list of search results, select the
Scorebot to connect and press the cross-
shaped button (I).
.
2
Details of the selected Scorebot will be
displayed. Check
the information and press
the cross-shaped button (I).
3
Once the connection is successfully
established, a confirmation screen
appears. Press the cross-shaped button
(I).
4
Select [Sever Settings] of the destination
for saving and press the cross-shaped
button (I).
.
Scoreboard Overlay L
229
Overlay
A
L
5
Enter the [Alias] name to save and press the
cross-shaped button (I).
6
After the connection complete screen
appears, press the Set button (R) to close
the menu screen.
Memo :
0
If a Scorebot is currently being connected,
search
cannot
be performed until the connection
has been terminated.
0
Old settings that are saved in [Sever Settings] at
the storage destination will be overwritten.
0
Connection is automatically established upon
exiting the Wizard, and the [Server] setting
switches to
[Sever Settings] while the camera is
connected to the Scorebot.
The connection status to the Sportzcast server is
displayed in the “Sportzcast” item of the status
screen (Network) as follows.
0
Press the [STATUS] button on the camera
recorder to display the status screen. Press the
cross-shaped button (H I) to display the
[Network] screen.
0
Check the displayed [Sportzcast].
.
Changing Sportzcast Settings
The different settings can be configured in the
respective items under [Overlay Settings]
B
[Sportzcast] B [Settings].
(A P145 [ Sportzcast L ] )
230
Scoreboard Overlay L
Overlay
A
L
Error Messages and Actions
Warning display
on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen, tally lamp indication and warning tone are as
follows according to the error status.
Memo :
0
This camera recorder makes use of a microcomputer. Noise interference from external sources may
prevent it
from functioning properly. When this occurs, turn off and on the power of the camera recorder
again.
Error Message Status Action
Turn Power Off Turn
Back On Later
System error.
* The warning
tone sounds and the
tally lamp blinks twice every
second.
Turn off the power, and turn it on again.
If the error persists, please contact the
local dealers in your area.
Fan Stop Detected
Please Turn P.Off
0
The fan stopped running. Please contact the local dealers in your
area.
Fan Maintenance
Required
Usage time of the fan has exceeded
9000 hours.
Check the fan and replace accordingly.
For
more
details, please contact the local
dealers in your area.
Memo :
0
You can check the usage time of the
fan in [System] B [System
Information]
B [Fan Hour].
(A P149
[ Fan Hour ] )
Getting Overheated. 
Please Turn Power Off.
0
The battery has exceeded the
specified temperature.
0
The power turns off
automatically after about 15
second.
0
Wait until the temperature drops or
replace the battery.
0
If the error persists, please contact the
local dealers in your area.
Rec Inhibited [REC] button is pressed when the
write-protect switch of the SD card
is set.
Turn off the write-protect switch of the SD
card, or insert a recordable SD card.
(A P
48 [Recording Media] )
Lost Media Info *
0
Card is
removed while recording
is in progress.
0
Card is removed while
formatting is in progress.
0
Card is removed while restoring
is in progress.
0
Card is removed while adding
the OK mark.
0
Card is removed while writing a
setup file.
0
Card is removed while deleting a
clip.
(*: A, B)
Restore the card using this camera
recorder.
(A P52 [Repairing the Recording
Media] )
Error Messages and Actions
231
Others
Error Message Status Action
Record Format Incorrect
0
The video format of the file for
Clip Review is different from the
current [WResolution],
[WFrame Rate], or [WBit Rate]
setting.
Set [WResolution], [WFrame Rate] and
[WBit Rate] correctly.
(A
P150
[WResolution/
GResolution] )
(A P151 [WFrame Rate/ GFrame
Rate] )
(A P151 [WBit Rate/ GBit Rate] )
Media Full
0
[REC] button is pressed when
the media in use has no
remaining space.
0
Remaining space
ran out during
recording.
Replace the recording media with a new
one.
No Clips No viewable clips are found on the
card for Clip Review.
Insert an SD card that contains clips that
can be reviewed.
(A P
48 [Recording Media] )
(
A P86 [Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately (Clip Review)] )
No Media When the [REC] button is pressed
while a recording media is not
inserted.
Insert a recording media.
(A P
48 [Recording Media] )
No Media No
recording media is inserted while
in Media mode or when the
thumbnail screen is displayed.
Insert a recording media.
(A P48 [Recording Media] )
No Clips No clips are found in the inserted
recording media while in Media
mode
or
when the thumbnail screen
is displayed.
Insert a recording media that contains
playable clips.
(A P48 [Recording Media] )
(A P97 [Playing Recorded Clips] )
Recording has stopped
as it has exceeded 4
hours
When continuous recording in “4K
EXT (SSD)
” has exceeded 4 hours.
Start recording again.
List of FTP Transfer Errors
If the upload of a recorded clip or download of the metadata setup file (XML format) is not successfully
completed, the following errors are displayed.
Error message Status Action
Timeout. Transfer was discontinued due to
timeout caused by network
transmission or server failure.
0
Execute again.
0
Use a different server.
Media Was Removed. Recording media is removed while
FTP transfer is in progress.
Insert the recording media and
execute FTP transfer again.
Adapter Was Removed. The USB network device is
removed while FTP transfer is in
progress.
Connect the USB network device.
Cannot Connect to Server. Unable to connect to the FTP server. Adjust the Server and Port settings
for [Metadata Server] or [Clip
Server].
(A P
135 [ Metadata Server... ] )
(
A P143 [ Clip Server ] )
232
Error Messages and Actions
Others
Error message Status Action
Access Denied. Access is denied. Adjust the Server and Port settings
for [Metadata Server
]
or [Clip
Server].
(A P135 [ Metadata Server... ] )
(A P143 [ Clip Server ] )
Invalid Username or
Password.
Authentication for login to the FTP
server failed.
Adjust the Username and Password
settings for [Metadata Server] or
[Clip Server
].
(A P135 [ Metadata Server... ] )
(A P143 [ Clip Server ] )
Invalid Path Was Requested. The path specified for the FTP
server is incorrect.
Adjust the [Clip Server] and [Dir.
Path] settings for [
Metadata
Server] or [File Path].
(A P135 [ Metadata Server... ] )
(A P143 [ Clip Server ] )
Server Error. There was an unintended operation
of the FTP server.
Execute again.
Use a different server.
Invalid Request. A bad request is executed for the
FTP server.
Execute again.
Invalid Data Size. Invalid data size, such as a planning
metadata size that exceeds 4 KB.
Adjust the planning metadata saved
in the [Metadata Server
]
.
(A P187 [ Planning Metadata ] )
Invalid Data Format. The XML format of the planning
metadata is invalid.
Adjust the planning metadata saved
in the [Metadata Server]
.
(A P187 [ Planning Metadata ] )
Transfer Error. Transfer failed due to
communication failure.
Execute again.
Invalid URL. The path was deemed invalid by the
FTP server.
Adjust the Server and Port settings
for
[Metadata Server
] or [Clip
Server].
(A P135 [ Metadata Server... ] )
(A P143 [ Clip Server ] )
Media Access Error. Reading/writing of the recording
media failed
while FTP transfer is in
progress.
Use a different recording media.
Internal Error. An internal error has occurred while
FTP transfer is in progress.
Adjust the settings and execute
again.
Other Error. An unknown error or other errors
have occurred while FTP transfer is
in progress.
Adjust the settings and execute
again.
Media Read Error. Reading of the recording media
failed while FTP transfer is in
progress.
Use a different recording media.
Error Messages and Actions
233
Others
List of Live Streaming Error Displays
The following error messages are displayed when the live streaming setting is incorrect, or when the
connection is lost during live streaming.
Error message Status Action
Invalid Address
0
The IP address format is
incorrect.
0
The domain name cannot be
converted into the IP address.
0
Enter
the
IP address, host name
or URL of the destination
correctly.
(A P206 [Setting Distribution] )
Multicast Is Not Supported An IP multicast address was set. Use an IP address that is not a
multicast address.
Cannot Connect to Receiver Establishment of connection with
TCP failed.
0
Ensure that the recipient’s
device is set to TCP.
0
Set Type to
“MPEG2-TS/UDP”.
(A P206 [Setting Distribution] )
TCP Disconnected TCP connection is lost. Check to ensure that there is no
abnormality in the decoder, or
network connection device and
cables,
followed
by establishing the
connection again.
Not Enough Bandwidth
0
The communication bandwidth
is narrower than the average bit
rate.
0
The network bandwidth is
insufficient, and packets are
discarded.
0
Lower the resolution/picture
quality of the video to be
distributed.
0
Consider switching
to the use of
a stable network, such as wired
LAN.
Connection Timeout Timeout for connection via ZIXI. Set [Destination Address] and
[
Destination Port
] correctly.
(A P206 [Setting Distribution] )
Authorization Failed Authentication of connection via
ZIXI failed.
Set [Stream ID] and [Password]
correctly.
(A P206 [Setting Distribution] )
Connection Error Connection via “ZIXI” or “RTMP
failed.
0
Check whether a different
camera with an identical stream
ID is connected.
0
Set [Destination URL] and
[Stream Key
] correctly.
(A P138
[ Destination URL ] )
(
A P138 [ Stream Key ] )
Disconnected “ZIXI” or “RTMP” connection is lost. Check whether there is abnormality
with
the
network connection device,
cables, etc., and try to re-establish
the connection.
234
Error Messages and Actions
Others
List of Layout Import Error Displays A L
Error Message Status Action
Failed To Read File From
Media!
SD card is defective. Use other SD card.
SDP file data is corrupted. Use the SDP file generated by the
SDP Generator.
No User Layout Exists. SDP file data is corrupted. Use the SDP file generated by the
SDP Generator.
The camera recorder version is old
and an unknown SDP file has been
imported.
Update the firmware for the camera
recorder to the latest version.
Failed To Write File To The
Camera!
There may be a problem with the
camera.
Please contact the local dealers in
your area.
Import Error! An internal error has occurred. Please contact the local dealers in
your area.
List of Sportzcast Connection Error Displays L
Error Message Status Action
Cannot Connect to Server Cannot connect to the Sportzcast
server.
Check that the network connection
settings are correct.
Enter the IP address or host name
of the Sportzcast server correctly.
Invalid License Sportzcast license is invalid. Enter the license name correctly.
Please note that you cannot use a
license name you have already
used in another camera.
Cannot Get Node Server response is invalid. Please contact Sportzcast.
Invalid BOT Number The BOT number entered is invalid. Enter the Sportzcast BOT number
correctly.
Error Messages and Actions
235
Others
Blinking of the Tally Lamp
The tally lamp starts blinking when the remaining space on the recording media is running out during
recording or when the battery power is running low.
Blinking Mode Remaining Battery Power/SD Card Space
Blinks slowly
(once every second)
0
Battery power is low
0
Remaining recording time on recording media is less than 3 minutes
(during recording)
0
When a malfunction occurred during live streaming
Blinks quickly
(2 times per second)
0
Remaining battery power is almost zero
0
Remaining
recording
time on recording media has reached 0 minutes
(during recording)
0
Error on the camera recorder
Warning Tone
0
Warning tone is output from the speaker and [x] terminal when the battery level is low.
Warning tone is also output when an error occurs in the camera recorder.
Memo :
0
You can
specify whether to turn on the warning tone as well as setting the volume in [A/V Set] B [Audio
Set] B [Alarm Level].
(A P
134 [ Alarm Level ] )
236
Error Messages and Actions
Others
Troubleshooting
Symptom Action
Power does not turn on.
0
Is the AC adapter properly connected?
0
Is the battery charged?
0
Is the power turned on immediately after it is turned off?
Make sure to wait for an interval of at least 5 seconds before turning
on the power again.
Unable to start recording.
0
Is the record trigger button/lock switch on the handle turned on?
0
Is the write-protect switch of the SD card turned on?
Make sure that the write-protect switch is turned off.
(A P49 [Write-Protect Switch on the SD Card] )
0
Is the camera recorder set to the Camera mode?
Use the [MODE] selection button to switch to the Camera mode.
(A P24
[Operation Modes] )
0
Is the SD card inserted compatible with the recording format?
(
A P57 [Selecting a Video Format] )
(A P154 [ 4GB File Spanning(SDXC) ] )
Camera image is not output on
the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screen.
0
Is the camera recorder set to the Camera mode?
Use the [MODE] selection button to switch to the Camera mode.
(A P24 [Operation Modes] )
0
The LCD monitor and viewfinder screens cannot be displayed at the
same time.
To display
the viewfinder screen, close the LCD monitor or press and
hold the [DISPLAY] button.
Playback does not start after
selecting a clip thumbnail and
pressing the Set button (R).
0
Is the selected clip a playable clip?
Playback is
not possible if the clip has a different video format setting.
Images on the LCD monitor
and viewfinder screen appear
dark or blurred.
0
Readjust the brightness of the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
0
Is the [
ND FILTER] switch set to “1/64
”?
0
Is the iris closed?
0
Is the shutter speed setting too high?
0
Is the peaking level too low?
Use the [PEAKING +/-] button to adjust the contour for the LCD
monitor and the viewfinder screen.
(
A P43 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor] )
(
A P44 [Adjusting the Viewfinder] )
The [CH1/CH2]
recording
level
adjustment knob does not
work.
0
Is the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] switch set to “AUTO”?
0
Is the [FULL AUTO]
switch set to “ON”?
Is the [FULL AUTO] switch set to “ON”, and [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B
[FULL AUTO] set to “Auto”?
(A P134
[ Audio On FULL AUTO ] )
Microphone audio cannot be
heard
through
the headphone.
0
Is the audio setting configured to “IFB/RET Only”?
Set [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [IFB/RET Monitor] B [CH1]/[CH2] to
“Off”.
(A P134
[ IFB/RET Monitor... ] )
SD card cannot be initialized
(formatted).
0
Is the write-protect switch of the SD card turned on?
Make sure that the write-protect switch is turned off.
(
A P49 [Write-Protect Switch on the SD Card] )
Battery alarm appears even
after loading a charged
battery.
0
Is the battery too old?
Troubleshooting
237
Others
Symptom Action
The time code and user’s bit
are not displayed.
0
Even in Camera mode or Media mode, the time code and user’s bit
may not be displayed depending to the type of display.
0
Is
[LCD/VF
] B [Display On/Off] B [TC/UB] set to “Off”? To display the
date and time, set it to “On”.
(A
P129 [Display On/Off Item] )
The time is not displayed.
0
The
time
is only displayed on the display screen in the Camera mode
(during shooting).
(A P159 [Display Screen in Camera Mode] )
0
Is [System] B [Record Set] B [Time Stamp] set to “On”? To display
the date and time, set it to “Off”.
(A P
154 [ Time Stamp ] )
The actual recording time is
shorter than the estimated
time.
0
The recordable time may be shorter depending on the shooting
conditions or the subject.
The two camera recorders are
not synchronized even though
the time codes have been
synchronized. (Z
on the Slave
device is not displayed.)
0
Is the [
TC IN/OUT] switch correctly set?
(A P81 [Synchronizing Time Code on Another Camera] )
0
Set [System]
B [Record Set] B [Record Format] B [WFrame Rate]
such that the two camera recorders have the same frame rate.
(A P151 [WFrame Rate/ GFrame Rate] )
Cannot connect to wireless
LAN.
0
Check the mode of connection and method of setting (
[SSID
] and
[Passphrase] in cases other than WPS).
(A P179
[Wireless LAN connection (“Internal Wireless LAN”A or
“USB”-“Wireless LAN”)] )
0
Even if the Passphrase is wrong,
“Completed the Setup Wizard.
Please Input the Passphrase into Your Device.
” may appear at the
browser setting depending on the type of encryption.
Adjust [Passphrase] again.
The View Remote screen turns
black.
The screen flickers.
The screen freezes.
Cannot perform remote
operation.
0
The network path is congested.
Wait a while before refreshing (reloading) the web browser.
0
Clear the cache in your Web browser.
The clips cannot be uploaded
to the FTP server.
0
Adjust the [Clip Server] settings.
(A P143 [ Clip Server ] )
0
If a file size limit is set in the FTP server, set the size limit such that it
is larger than the maximum size of the recorded clip.
0
Take necessary action as described in “[List of FTP Transfer Errors]
(
A P 232)”.
The wireless LAN is
disconnected.
0
The wireless LAN may be disconnected depending on the
environment. Change the usage environment.
0
Connect via wired LAN.
(A P179 [Wireless LAN connection (“Internal Wireless LAN”A or
“USB”-“Wireless LAN”)] )
The images and audio sound
during live streaming are
choppy.
0
Depending on
the connection method to the network and connection
environment, streaming may not be possible with the encoding bit rate
specified. Please reduce the encoding bit rate.
GPS signal cannot be
received. A L
0
Signal reception from GPS satellites may be affected by buildings or
trees.
Perform
positioning
preferably at an unobstructed location with a clear
view.
0
Radio wave reception may be affected by weather conditions such as
on a cloudy or rainy day.
The position is not accurate.
A L
0
The
precision
error may be up to hundreds of meters if the GPS signal
is weak or reflected off surrounding buildings.
238
Troubleshooting
Others
Specifications
General
Item Description
Power DC 12 V
Power
consumption
Approx. 24.0 W
(When recording in the factory
default settings using the
viewfinder.)
Mass Approx. 3.6 kg
(With battery attached)
Allowable operating
temperature
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Allowable operating
humidity
30 %RH to 80 %RH
Allowable storage
temperature
-20 °C to 50 °C (-4 °F to 122 °F)
Built-in wireless
LAN
A
IEEE802.11a/b/g/n/ac
(2.4 GHz/5 GHz band)
Encryption method: WPA2
U
model
2.4 GHz Ch1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11
5 GHz
USA
Ch36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64,
100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120,
124, 128, 132, 136, 140, 149,
153, 157, 161, 165
5 GHz
CANADA
Ch36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64,
100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 132,
136, 140, 149, 153, 157, 161,
165
E
model
2.4 GHz Ch1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11,
12, 13
5 GHz
Outside
Russia
Ch36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64,
100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120,
124, 128, 132, 136, 140
5 GHz
Russia
Ch36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64,
132, 136, 140, 149, 153, 157,
161, 165
Terminal Section
Video/Audio
Item Description
[SDI OUT] terminal (480i or 576i: Downconverted 720p/1080i/
1080p: embedded audio), BNC (unbalanced)
3G-SDI,
HD-SDI,
SD-SDI
Compliant with SMPTE ST424,
Compliant with SMPTE ST292,
Compliant with SMPTE ST259
3G-SDI,
HD-SDI,
SD-SDI
Embedded
audio
standard
Compliant with SMPTE ST299,
Compliant with SMPTE ST299,
Compliant with SMPTE ST272
[HDMI] output
terminal
Type A
[INPUT 1/INPUT 2] Terminal (XLR 3-pin)
[MIC] -50 dBu, 3 kK, XLR (balanced),
+48 V output (phantom power
supply)
[LINE] +4 dBu, 10 kK, XLR (balanced)
[AUX] terminal -22 dBu, 10 kK, 3.5 mm stereo
mini jack (unbalanced)
[x] Terminal Φ3.5 mm stereo mini jack
Specifications
239
Others
Others
Item Description
[LAN] terminal
(RJ-45)
100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T
[HOST] terminal USB-A type, network
connection function only
[REMOTE]
terminal
Φ2.5 mm mini jack
(Stereo)
[TC IN/OUT] terminal
[IN] 1.0 V(p-p) to 4.0 V(p-p) high
impedance
[OUT] 2.0 ± 1.0 V (p-p) low impedance
Camera Section
Item Description
Image pickup
device
1" single CMOS sensor
(effective resolution: approx.
9.35 megapixels)
Sync system Internal sync (built-in SSG)
ND filter OFF, 1/4, 1/16, 1/64
Gain -6 dB, -3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9
dB,
12
dB, 15 dB, 18 dB, 21 dB,
24 dB, Lolux (30 dB, 36 dB),
AGC
Electronic
shutter
1/6 to 1/10000, EEI
LCD Monitor 3.97" LCD (800x480)
Viewfinder 0.4"
4:3 Quad-VGA (1280x960)
Lens F2.8 to F4.5, 20x zoom,
f = 9.43 mm to 188.6 mm
(35 mm equivalent: 28.0 mm to
560.0 mm)
Filter diameter Φ82 mm
Sensitivity F11, 2000 lx (standard value: 60
Hz)
Storage Section
Item Description
Supported
media
SDHC/SDXC: SD slots x 2
M.2 SSD: Expansion slot
240
Specifications
Others
Video/Audio
Item Description
4K EXT (SSD) mode (Apple ProRes)
Recording file
format
QuickTime File Format
Video
422HQ mode Apple ProRes 422 HQ, 1768
Mbps (Max),
3840x2160/59.94p, 50p,
29.97p, 23.98p, 25p
422 mode Apple ProRes 422, 1178 Mbps
(Max),
3840x2160/59.94p, 50p,
29.97p, 23.98p, 25p
422LT mode Apple ProRes 422 LT, 821
Mbps (Max),
3840x2160/59.94p, 50p,
29.97p, 23.98p, 25p
Audio LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/24 bit
4K mode (MOV: H.264)
Recording file
format
QuickTime File Format
Video
XHQ mode
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 150 Mbps
(Max)
3840×2160/29.97p, 23.98p,
25p
XHQ mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 150 Mbps
(Max)
3840×2160/29.97p, 23.98p,
25p
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 70 Mbps
(Max)
3840×2160/29.97p, 23.98p,
25p
Audio LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 bit, 24 bit
(422 10 bit only)
Item Description
HD mode (MOV/MXF: MPEG-2) A
Recording file
format
QuickTime File Format (MOV),
MXF File Format (MXF)
Video
HQ mode MPEG-2 Long GOP VBR, 35
Mbps (Max) MP@HL,
1920x1080/59.94i, 29.97p, 50i,
25p
1440x1080/59.94i, 50i
1280x720/59.94p, 50p
SP mode MPEG-2 Long GOP CBR, 25
Mbps (Max) MP@H14
1440×1080/59.94i, 50i
Audio LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit
HD mode (MOV: H.264)
Recording file
format
QuickTime File Format
Video
XHQ mode
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 70 Mbps
(Max) 1920×1080/59.94p, 50p
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 50 Mbps
(Max) 1920×1080/59.94p,
59.94i, 29.97p, 23.98p, 50p,
50i, 25p
1280×720/59.94p, 50p
XHQ mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 50 Mbps
(Max)
1920×1080/59.94p, 59.94i,
29.97p, 23.98p, 50p, 50i, 25p
UHQ mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 35 Mbps
(Max)
1920×1080/59.94i, 29.97p,
23.98p, 50i, 25p
1280×720/59.94p, 50p
Audio LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit, 24 Bit
(422 10 bit only)
Specifications
241
Others
Item Description
HD mode (Exchange (U model) / MP4 (E model):
H.264)
Recording file
format
MP4 File Format
Video
LP mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 12 Mbps
(Max)
1920x1080/59.94p (U model),
1920x1080/50p (E model),
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 8 Mbps
(Max)
1280x720/59.94p (U model)
1280x720/50p (E model)
Audio AAC 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit 128
kbps
HD mode (High-Speed)
Recording file
format
QuickTime File Format
Video
XHQ mode
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 70 Mbps
(Max), 1920×1080
119.88/59.94p, 100/50p
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 50 Mbps
(Max), 1920×1080
119.88/59.94p, 100/50p,
119.88/29.97p, 100/25p,
119.88/23.98p
XHQ mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 50 Mbps
(Max), 1920×1080
119.88/59.94p, 100/50p,
119.88/29.97p, 100/25p,
119.88/23.98p
UHQ mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 35 Mbps
(Max), 1920×1080
119.88/29.97p, 100/25p,
119.88/23.98p
Audio LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit, 24 Bit
(422 10 bit only)
Item Description
SD mode (MOV: H.264)
Recording file
format
QuickTime File Format
Video MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 8 Mbps
(Max)
720×480/59.94i (U model)
720×576/50i (E model)
Audio LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16bit
Web mode (MOV: H.264)
Recording file
format
QuickTime File Format
Video
HQ mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 8 Mbps
(Max)
720x480/59.94i, 720x576/50i
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 3 Mbps
(Max)
960x540/29.97p, 25p, 23.98p
LP mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 1.2 Mbps
(Max)
480x270/29.97p, 25p, 23.98p
Audio LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit
(720x480, 720x576)
μ-law 2ch, 16 kHz (960x540,
480x270)
Streaming mode
Video MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
1920x1080/59.94p, 50p
24/20/16/12/8 Mbps (Max)
1920x1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97p,
25p
20/16/12/8/5/3 Mbps (Max)
1280x720/59.94p, 50p
20/16/12/8/5/3 Mbps (Max)
1280x720/29.97p, 25p
8/5/3/1.5 Mbps (Max)
720x480/59.94i
720x576/50i
8/5/3/1.5/0.8/0.3 Mbps (Max)
640x360/59.94p, 50p
3/1.5 Mbps (Max)
640x360/29.97p, 25p
3/1.5/0.8/0.3 Mbps (Max)
Audio AAC 2ch, 128/64 kbps
242
Specifications
Others
Accessories
Accessories
Warranty Card (U model only) 1
INSTRUCTIONS (BASIC) 1
AC Adapter 1
Power Cord (U model: 1, E model: 2)
Battery 1
Wireless LAN Antenna A 2
* A large eyecup and hood are mounted in
advance to the camera body.
Specifications
243
Others
Dimensional Outline Drawing (Unit: mm)
Wireless LAN antenna is not included in GY-HC500U/GY-HC500E/GY-HC500SPCU.
.
109
79
227
158
55
203
212
49
437
77
386
* The specifications and appearance of this product are subject to changes for further improvement
without prior notice.
244
Specifications
Others
Appendix
Tone Mapping Characteristics for Converting HLG to ITU709 for LCD/VF
.
*1
*2
*3
*5
*6
*4
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
INPUT
OUTPUT (IRE)
hlg
50%white + KNEE
60%white +_KNEE
72.5%_white + knee
75%_white + knee
80%_white + knee
ITU709_50%
ITU709_60%
ITU709_72.5%
ITU709_75%
ITU709_80%
WHITE POINT
50%
60%
72.5%
75%
80%
50%
ITU709
60%
ITU709
72.5%
ITU709
75%
ITU709
80%
ITU709
*1 HLG
*2 White Level
80% converted
*3
White Level
75% converted
*4 White Level
72.5% converted
*5 White Level
60% converted
*6 White Level
50% converted
Appendix
245
Others
Index
A
AC adapter .......................................... 35, 36
Action
........................................................
99
AF assist ............................................ 61, 114
Aspect ratio ................................................ 58
Auto FTP .................................................. 183
B
Backup rec ................................................ 89
Battery ................................................. 20, 35
Brightness adjustment ............................... 64
Broadcast Overlay ................................... 214
C
Camera control function ........................... 196
Camera mode .............................. 25, 41, 159
Cellular adapter ....................................... 180
Charging time ............................................ 36
Clip continuous rec .................................... 92
Clip cutter trig (splitting clips) ..................... 96
Clip name ............................................. 53, 98
Clip review ................................................. 86
Color bar .................................................. 169
Color matrix ............................................. 171
Connection settings file ............................ 201
Continuous operating time ......................... 36
D
Deleting clips ........................................... 102
Digital Extender ....................................... 113
Display screen ........................... 41, 159, 165
Dual rec ..................................................... 88
Dynamic zoom ................................... 59, 113
E
Electronic shutter ....................................... 67
Error message ................................... 72, 231
Expanded focus ......................................... 62
External monitor ....................................... 175
F
Face detection ................................... 62, 161
Favorites menu ........................................ 155
FAW (Full Auto White Balance) ......... 69, 117
FEC Matrix ............................................... 209
File format .................................................. 56
Focus ......................................................... 60
Focus assist ............................................... 61
Formatting (Initializing) of Recording Media 51
Frame rec .................................................. 94
FTP Resume ............................................ 186
FTP server ............................... 100, 180, 182
Full Screen Graphic ......................... 145, 216
G
Gain adjustment ........................................ 66
GPS ................................................... 85, 148
H
Hard Lock .......................................... 73, 111
Headphone ........................................ 76, 176
High-Speed ....................................... 56, 149
Histogram .......................................... 87, 127
I
IFB ........................................................... 211
Image stabilizer .......................................... 73
Infrared Recording ............................. 96, 113
Initial settings ............................................. 39
Interval rec ................................................. 95
Iris adjustment ........................................... 65
L
LCD monitor ............................. 22, 37, 41, 43
Lens cover ................................................. 33
Live streaming ......................................... 204
M
Manual FTP ............................................. 183
Marker display ......................................... 169
Media mode ................................. 25, 41, 165
Menu ........................................ 107, 108, 110
Metadata .......................................... 180, 187
MF Assist ........................................... 61, 115
N
ND filter ...................................................... 68
Network ........................................... 135, 177
NETWORK LED ................................ 47, 148
Network operating environment ............... 178
O
OK mark .................................................. 103
One push auto focus .................................. 60
Operation lock ........................................... 54
Overlay .................................... 144, 214, 219
P
Picture quality setting ................................. 73
Power .................................................. 37, 38
Pre rec ....................................................... 91
Preset zoom (browser) ............................ 195
Preset zoom (camera) ............................... 59
Push auto focus ......................................... 60
R
Rec Trigger (HDMI OUT) ................. 132, 163
Rec Trigger (SDI OUT) .................... 130, 163
Recordable time .................................. 48, 49
Recording simultaneously at two different
definitions .................................................. 87
Remote edit mode ............................... 25, 42
Repairing the Recording Media ................. 52
Resolution .................................................. 56
Return Audio ............................................ 211
Return over IP .................................. 139, 210
Return Videos .......................................... 210
246
Index
Others
S
Safety zone display .................................. 169
Scoreboard Overlay ................................. 219
SD/SDHC/SDXC card
......................... 21, 48
SDI ........................................................... 175
SDP Generator ........................................ 214
Selecting multiple clips ............................ 104
Series rec .................................................. 87
Setting the date/time .................................. 40
Setup file .................................................. 172
Shooting .................................................... 55
Software keyboard ................................... 109
Sportzcast ................................ 146, 229, 235
Spot meter ................................................. 83
SSD ....................................... 48, 49, 51, 149
STATUS LED ..................................... 47, 148
Status screen ..................................... 42, 167
Switching shutter speed ............................ 67
T
Tagging ................................................... 212
Tally lamp .......................................... 47, 236
Thumbnail (detailed screen) ...................... 99
Thumbnail (standard screen) ..................... 97
Thumbnail screen ...................................... 97
Time code ............................................ 76, 77
Time code generator ................................. 77
Time code playback ................................. 101
Trimming .................................................. 106
U
User button ................................................ 46
User’s bit .................................................... 76
V
Video format .............................................. 56
View remote ............................................. 196
Viewfinder ................................ 22, 37, 41, 44
W
Warning ............................................. 42, 236
Watermark ....................................... 145, 216
Web browser ............................ 186, 190, 198
White balance adjustment ......................... 69
White paint ................................................. 72
Wired LAN ............................................... 179
Wired remote control ............................... 176
Wireless LAN ..................................... 34, 179
Wizard ..................................................... 136
Z
Zebra pattern ............................................. 82
Zoom ......................................................... 59
Symbol
4K ...................................................... 56, 149
Index
247
Others
Software License
Agreement
The software embedded in the Product (hereinafter
the “Licensed Software”) provided by
JVCKENWOOD Corporation (hereinafter the
“Licensor”) is copyrighted to or sublicensable by the
Licensor, and this Agreement provides for the terms
and conditions which Users shall follow in order to
use the Licensed Software. The User shall use the
Licensed Software by agreeing with the terms of this
Software License Agreement. This Agreement shall
be deemed completed at the time the User
(hereinafter the “User”) initially used the Product in
which the “Licensed Software” is embedded.
The Licensed Software may include the software
which has been licensed to the Licensor directly or
indirectly from any third party. In such case, some
third parties require the Users to follow their
conditions for use separately from this Software
License Agreement. Such software shall not be
subject to this Agreement, and the Users are urged
to read the “[Important Notice concerning the
Software] (A P 249)” to be provided separately.
Article 1 General Provision
The Licensor shall grant to the User a non-exclusive
and non-transferable (other than the exceptional
case referred to in Article 3, Paragraph 1) licensed
to use the Licensed Software within the country of
the User (the country where the User bought the
Product (hereinafter the “Country”)).
Article 2 License
1. The license granted under this Agreement shall be
the right to use the Licensed Software in the Product.
2. The User shall not duplicate, copy, modify, add,
translate or otherwise alter, or lease the Licensed
Software and any related documents, whether in
whole or in part.
3. The use of the Licensed Software shall be limited
to personal purpose, and the Licensed Software
shall not be distributed, licensed or sub-licensed
whether it is for commercial purpose or not.
4. The User shall use the Licensed Software
according to the directions described in the
operation manual or help file, and is prohibited to use
or duplicate any data in a manner violating the
Copyright Law or any other laws and regulations by
applying whole or a part of the Licensed Software.
Article 3 Conditions for Grant of License
1. When the User transfers the Product, it may also
transfer the license to use the Licensed Software
embedded in the Product (including any related
materials, updates and upgrades) on condition that
no original, copies or related materials continue in
the possession of the User, and that the User shall
cause the transferee to comply with this Software
License Agreement.
2. The User shall not carry out reverse engineering,
disassembling, decompiling or any other code
analysis works in connection with the Licensed
Software.
Article 4 Right pertaining to the Licensed
Software
1. Any and all copyrights and other rights pertaining
to the Licensed Software and related documents
shall belong to the Licensor or the original holder of
the right who granted to the Licensor the license or
sublicense for the Licensed Software (hereinafter
the “Original Rightholder”), and the User shall not be
entitled to any right other than the license granted
hereunder, in respect of the Licensed Software and
any related documents.
2. The User shall, whenever the User uses the
Licensed Software, comply with any laws relating to
the copyright and other intellectual property rights.
Article 5 Indemnification of Licensor
1. Neither the Licensor nor the Original Rightholder
shall be liable for any damage incurred by the User
or any third party due to the exercise of the license
granted to the User under this Agreement, unless
otherwise restricted by law.
2. The Licensor will offer no guarantee for the
merchantability, convertibility and consistency with
certain objective of the Licensed Software.
Article 6 Liability to Third Party
If any dispute has arisen with any third party due to
an infringement upon a copyright, patent or any other
intellectual property right that was caused by the
User’s use of the Licensed Software, the User shall
settle such dispute at the User’s own cost and hold
the Licensor and the Original Rightholder harmless
from any inconvenience it may cause.
Article 7 Confidentiality
The User shall keep the confidentiality of such
portion of the Licensed Software, related documents
thereof or any other information to be granted under
this Agreement, as well as the conditions of this
Agreement as has not yet entered the public domain,
and shall not disclose or divulge the same to any third
party without approval of the Licensor.
Article 8 Termination
In case the User falls under any of the events
described in the following items, the Licensor may
immediately terminate this Agreement or claim that
the User compensates for the damage incurred by
the Licensor due to such event:
(1) when the User violated any provision of this
Agreement; or
(2) when a petition has been filed against the User
for an attachment, provisional attachment,
provisional disposition or any other compulsory
execution.
248
Software License Agreement
Others
Article 9 Destruction of the Licensed Software
If this Agreement is terminated pursuant to the
provision of Article 8, the User shall destroy the
Licensed Software, any related documents and
copies thereof within two (2) weeks from such date
of termination.
Article 10 Export Restriction
1. The User shall understand that the Licensed
Software shall be subject to the export restrictions
adopted by the country of User and any other
countries.
2. The User shall agree that the software will be
subject to any and all applicable international and
domestic laws including the export control regulation
of the country of User and any other countries, and
any restrictions concerning the end-users, the use
by end-users and importing countries to be provided
by the country of User and any other countries, and
any other governmental authorities.
3. If the User is an agency of the United States of
America (the “Government”), the User acknowledge
Licensor’s representation that the Licensed
Software is a “Commercial Item” as defined in
Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) part 2.101(g)
consisting unpublished “Commercial Computer
Software” as those items are used at FAR part
12.212 and is only license the User with the same
use right Licensor grants all commercial end users
pursuant to the terms of this Agreement.
Article 11 Miscellaneous
1. In the event any part of this Agreement is
invalidated by operation of law, the residual
provisions shall continue in force.
2. Matters not stipulated in this Agreement or any
ambiguity or question raised in the construction of
this Agreement shall be provided or settled upon
good-faith consultation between the Licensor and
the User.
3. The Licensor and the User hereby agree that this
Agreement is governed by the laws of Japan, and
any dispute arising from, and relating to the rights
and obligations under, this Agreement shall be
submitted to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Tokyo
District Court for its first instance.
Important Notice
concerning the Software
Software License Attached to the Product :
The Software embedded in the Product is composed
of several independent software components, and in
each of such individual components (hereinafter the
“Licensed Software”), a copyright of either
JVCKENWOOD Corporation (hereinafter “JKC”) or
a third party subsists.
The Product uses the software component
designated in the End-User License Agreement that
was executed between JKC and a third party
(hereinafter “EULA”).
The Licensed Software covers those corresponding
to free software, and, as a condition of distribution of
the software component in executable format which
is based on the license granted under the GNU
General Public License or Lesser General Public
License (hereinafter “GPL/LGPL”), it requires an
availability of the source code for the relevant
component. Please refer to the following URL
concerning the distribution of the source code;
https://www3.jvckenwood.com/english/
download/gpl/index.html
Please note that we are unable to answer any inquiry
relating to the contents, etc. of the source code. In
addition, the Licensed Software includes the
software developed or created independently by
JKC and there exists an ownership of JKC in such
software and any accompanying documents, which
is protected by the Copyright Law, any international
treaties and other applicable laws. As to matters
concerning the handling by JKC of the software
components, please refer to the “Software License
Agreement” attached hereto. Please note that any
software component licensed under “EULA” which
is not subject to “GPL/LGPL”, and those developed
or created independently by JKC shall not be subject
to the requirement for provision of the source code.
The software component distributed under “GPL/
LGPL” shall be licensed to users without charge,
and, therefore, no warranty is given for such software
component, either express or implied, within the
scope of the applicable laws and regulations. Unless
otherwise permitted by applicable laws and
regulations or agreed in written form, none of the
owners of the copyright or persons entitled to alter or
redistribute the software component under the said
license shall have any liability for any type of damage
or loss resulting from the use of or inability to use
such software component. For further details of the
conditions of use of such software component or
matters required to be complied with, please refer to
the relevant “GPL/LGPL”.
Users are urged to read the details for the relevant
license carefully before using the software
component covered by “GPL/LGPL” and embedded
in the Product. Since the terms and conditions of
individual licenses are provided by parties other than
JKC, the original English version will be displayed by
the Product.
A
Turn on the power.
B
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button.
C
Select [System]
B
[System Information]
B
[Open
Source License].
Software License Agreement
249
Others
250
251
.
GY-HC550U/GY-HC550E
GY-HC500U/GY-HC500E
GY-HC500SPCU
4K MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER
© 2019 JVCKENWOOD Corporation
B5A-2966-00
22

Brauchen Sie Hilfe? Stellen Sie Ihre Frage.

Forenregeln

Missbrauch melden von Frage und/oder Antwort

Libble nimmt den Missbrauch seiner Dienste sehr ernst. Wir setzen uns dafür ein, derartige Missbrauchsfälle gemäß den Gesetzen Ihres Heimatlandes zu behandeln. Wenn Sie eine Meldung übermitteln, überprüfen wir Ihre Informationen und ergreifen entsprechende Maßnahmen. Wir melden uns nur dann wieder bei Ihnen, wenn wir weitere Einzelheiten wissen müssen oder weitere Informationen für Sie haben.

Art des Missbrauchs:

Zum Beispiel antisemitische Inhalte, rassistische Inhalte oder Material, das zu einer Gewalttat führen könnte.

Beispielsweise eine Kreditkartennummer, persönliche Identifikationsnummer oder unveröffentlichte Privatadresse. Beachten Sie, dass E-Mail-Adressen und der vollständige Name nicht als private Informationen angesehen werden.

Forenregeln

Um zu sinnvolle Fragen zu kommen halten Sie sich bitte an folgende Spielregeln:

Neu registrieren

Registrieren auf E - Mails für JVC GY-HC500E wenn:


Sie erhalten eine E-Mail, um sich für eine oder beide Optionen anzumelden.


Das Handbuch wird per E-Mail gesendet. Überprüfen Sie ihre E-Mail.

Wenn Sie innerhalb von 15 Minuten keine E-Mail mit dem Handbuch erhalten haben, kann es sein, dass Sie eine falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben haben oder dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe eingestellt hat, um E-Mails zu erhalten, die kleiner als die Größe des Handbuchs sind.

Ihre Frage wurde zu diesem Forum hinzugefügt

Möchten Sie eine E-Mail erhalten, wenn neue Antworten und Fragen veröffentlicht werden? Geben Sie bitte Ihre Email-Adresse ein.



Info